JPS5890623A - Photographic information input circuit of camera - Google Patents

Abstract

PURPOSE:To improve the reliability of a camera without increasing the number of input pins by providing a data selector means which selects an output line in response to an input information signal. CONSTITUTION:Pieces of input information from a strobe device 384, reflected light photometer 350, incidence type photometer 354, etc., connected externally to a camera mechanism part 358 are applied through the mechanism 358 to the selector 380 of an input controlling part 360 controlled through a CPU362, and also applied to a current detector 386 as well. Then, the selection of outputs of the selector 380 applied with even measurement input information from the photometric part 378 of the mechanism part 358 is controlled in accordance with the detection information of the detector 386. The selected input information is applied through an A/D converter 382 to the CPU362 to obtain exposure information. Thus, desired information is inputted selectively without increasing the number of input pins of the IC-implemented CPU362, thereby preventing a decrease in the reliability of the camera due to an increase in the number of pins.

Description

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION The present invention relates to a camera, and particularly to a photographing information input circuit for a camera.

Conventionally, photographic information such as shutter speed, aperture value, and film sensitivity was input to the camera's control circuit as an analog signal, which had disadvantages such as the inability to input highly accurate information to the camera and the time required for adjustment. Ta.

Therefore, it has been proposed to input all of these pieces of photographic information as digital values, but since each piece of photographic information requires an amount of information of, for example, about 6 pits,
(Integrated circuit) There was a problem in that the number of input bins provided in the KIGK became extremely large.

When digitalizing a camera, especially when converting various circuits of the camera into ICs, an increase in the number of input bins that become external bins of the IC not only increases the occupied area, but also increases the need for the IC or camera 2.
This is a major problem as it causes a decrease in reliability and an increase in manufacturing costs.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a photographing information input circuit for a camera that solves these drawbacks and does not increase the number of input bins.

Note that descriptions related to the present invention &i are mainly shown in FIGS. 12 to 19.
Figures 28, 50, and pages 207 to 208 related to these figures; It will be explained in detail in the related explanation.

Hereinafter, the camera system of the present invention will be explained in more detail with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 1 is a six-sided view of a camera device to which a camera system according to an embodiment of the present invention is applied; FIG. 1(a) is a front view, FIG. 1(b) is a top view, and FIG. ) is the bottom view, and the same figure (d
) is a right side view, (e) is a left side view, and (f) is a rear view.

The camera device with the configuration shown in the figure is a single-lens reflex camera equipped with a dual-priority automatic exposure control mechanism based on the TTL photometry method.
It is a camera, and its parts are arranged with particular emphasis on its operability.

This camera device is composed of a lens device 2, which is an optical system, and a body 4, which is a main body system, and various combinations of different types of lens devices and main body systems are possible.
It is similar to conventional single-lens reflex cameras in that it allows for wide-ranging photography.

The lens device 2 includes a distance adjustment ring 6 and an aperture adjustment ring 8, and is attached to the body 4 by a tightening ring 10. The lens device 2 can change the imaging position of the subject using the distance adjustment ring 6, that is, perform focusing operations, and can also preset the aperture value using the aperture adjustment ring 8. I can do it. Here, the aperture value preset refers to the aperture adjustment ring 8.
According to this, the aperture position display 9 displayed on the circumference is aligned with the index 7 attached to the lens barrel of the lens device 2,
In fact, in this state the lens device 2 is in an open state. In this way, the preset aperture value can be obtained by narrowing down the aperture blades of the lens device 2 to the preset position using the driving force from the body 4 during exposure after the shutter release. However, in principle, Since this camera device focuses on operability in terms of automatic exposure control, the aperture adjustment ring 8 has a mark 1 on its circumference.
The aperture value is configured so that it is possible to preset the aperture value from the body 4 side while aligning the aperture value with the index 7, and this mechanism serves as the central function when controlling the aperture with this camera device. becomes. The lens device 2 also includes a mechanism for transmitting information regarding the maximum aperture value and the like to the body 4 side. This mechanism is an important mechanism for the arithmetic unit built into the body 4 to take in information necessary for performing arithmetic operations for exposure control.

The body 4 basically constitutes a dark box for forming the subject image introduced by the lens device 2 on the film surface, and the film is a 35 mm roll film in a cartridge. The exposed surface is exchanged by winding the roll film one frame at a time onto a take-up spool. The shutter is a two-curtain running focal plane shutter placed on the side of the lens device 2 on the exposed surface of the film.
The running force of the curtain is controlled by a charged spring force, and the running timing of the two curtains, ie, running start control, is performed by electrical means. The body 4 has a built-in finder mechanism including a quick return mirror and a pentaprism section 11, and is configured to perform framing and focusing operations through the finder window 13 before photographing. This finder mechanism is exactly the same as that of a well-known single-lens reflex camera. However, the difference, which will be described in detail later, is that most of the information necessary for photographing can be obtained from the finder window 13, and this is one of the features of this camera device. Note that this finder mechanism is equipped with a TTL photometry function that measures the brightness of the subject light introduced through the lens device 2, and collects subject brightness information (apex value: BV) necessary for calculations for automatic exposure control. ) is obtained.

A winding lever 14 is provided on the top surface of the body 4 to wind the film by one frame in conjunction with the film winding spool, and to charge springs for moving the mechanical parts necessary for shutter release. . The number of frames of the film wound by the winding lever 14 is displayed on a film counter 15. The button 16 provided at the center of rotation of the winding lever 14 is a multiple exposure button.If you operate the winding lever 14 while holding down this button 16, only the necessary mechanical parts will be charged and the film will be wound. is not carried out. Furthermore, the function attached to this winding lever 14 is to act as a power switch for the electrical function section within the camera device, and the power is turned on by pulling it out slightly in the direction of arrow α. This function is effective in preventing forgetting to turn off the power, especially for a camera device that has an automatic exposure control mechanism that consumes a large amount of battery power and is likely to cause serious malfunctions due to battery consumption.

18 is a shutter release button, which is arranged on the top surface of the body 4 so that it can be pressed with the index finger of the right hand when the body 4 is held with both hands, just like in conventional cameras. Various operations required after the release start. Incidentally, a hole 20 provided in the center of the shutter release button 18 is an insertion hole for a cable release or an air release. A selector lever 22 is arranged near the shutter release button 18 and is configured to select various functions by rotating around the button 18. This selector lever 22 can be operated with the same finger that operates the shutter release button 18, that is, the index finger of the right hand holding the body 4.

Now, when the selector lever 22 is rotated to the position where the mark 24 is selected, the shutter release button 18 is locked and cannot be pressed. This locked state can also be applied when the mark 24 is selected after the shutter release button 18 has been pressed down, so the shutter speed can be adjusted to the pulp position. It also allows for long exposures if selected. That is, the selection of the mark 24 based on the selector <-22 is applied to obtain the two functions of preventing the shutter release button 18 from being pressed down due to erroneous operation and enabling long exposure. It happens.

Furthermore, when the selector lever 22 is aligned with the position where the mark 26 is selected, the AE (Automatic-E
xposure) becomes locked. In this AE lock state, during automatic exposure control operation, the exposure amount (combination of aperture and shutter speed) obtained as a result of photometry and calculation is maintained at the amount immediately before the mark 26 was selected. The amount of exposure is held fixed, and even if there is a change in the amount of photometry thereafter, the amount of exposure is fixed, and when exposure is actually performed, it follows the amount of exposure that has been fixed. This function can be applied extremely effectively, especially when photographing subjects with large brightness differences, and when the actual frame to be photographed is different from the frame in which only the subject brightness related to photometry is desired, the automatic exposure control function can be used. This is an absolutely necessary function for cameras equipped with this function. This AE lock mechanism may include a mechanical lift/pull mechanism or an electrical processing mechanism, but
An electrical processing mechanism will be applied to this camera device. Note that the lever 22 that selects the mark 26 automatically returns to its original position as the shutter release button 18 returns after being depressed. By the way,
This does not apply if an external force is applied that prevents the lever 22 from returning.

Furthermore, when the selector lever 22 is set at a position where the mark 28 is selected, the self-timer kit is activated. In this camera device, unlike conventional cameras, the self-timer is equipped with a mechanism to electrically count time, and when the self-timer is set, the shutter release button When 18 is pressed, the shutter release is accompanied by -. The operation of the series is controlled by electrical signals issued after a predetermined period of time. Note that while the self-timer is operating, a light-emitting diode (LED) lamp 32 located on the top surface of the body 4 and hidden underneath when the selector lever 22 is in its original position flashes. Self-
Notifies that the timer is in operation. Note that if the selector lever 22 is returned to its original position during the self-timer operation, the self-timer setting is canceled and the shutter can then be released normally using the shutter release button 18. Furthermore, since the self-timer mechanism in this camera is not released even after the shutter release operation is performed, self-timer photography can be repeated without having to set the self-timer again. As will be described later, this function, in combination with a motor drive device, enables automatic photographing at timed intervals, and is extremely useful.

When the selector lever 22 is set to a position where the mark 30 is selected, a battery check state is entered. If the LF:JD clamp 2 blinks in this battery check state, it indicates that the power battery voltage is sufficient, and if it remains off, the power battery voltage has decreased, and the camera Indicates that the electrical functions of the device cannot function properly. Note that the selector lever 22 that has selected the position of the mark 30 is always applied with a return force toward the position of the mark 28 by the biasing force of the spring, and when the selector lever 22 is released from the position after checking the battery, the selector lever 22 moves to the position of the mark 28. is returned to the position. This function is to prevent not only the camera device from functioning properly if you forget to return the lever 22 after checking the battery, but also to prevent the blinking LED lamp 32 from wasting power. .

34 is a dial for setting the aperture value or shutter speed in the exposure information, and the set value is displayed on the display window 36. It has been stated repeatedly that this camera device is equipped with an automatic exposure control mechanism, but it does not specifically adopt only one method of aperture priority or shutter speed priority, but can selectively use both methods. It adopts a method that can be used selectively, the so-called dual destination method. Therefore, there are two modes to choose from: aperture priority mode, which automatically calculates and controls the shutter speed by setting the aperture value, and shutter speed priority mode, which automatically calculates and controls the aperture value by setting the shutter speed. However, (1) and (2) mentioned above
As is clear from the formula, even if the aperture is selected preferentially,
Even if the shutter speed is selected preferentially, the handling in performing calculations is exactly the same, so a configuration is adopted in which a desired amount corresponding to the aperture value or shutter speed is set with one dial 34. There is. Here, whether the amount set on the dial≦4 is an aperture value or a shutter speed is specified by switching the mode changeover switch 38. Note that depending on the switching of the mode changeover switch 38, the content of the numerical value displayed on the display window 36 is changed.

That is, when the mode changeover switch 38 is switched to the aperture priority mode, the aperture value is displayed on the display window 36,
Further, when the mode is switched to the shutter speed priority mode, the shutter speed is displayed on the display window 36. This mechanism may be a simple one that selectively fires one of the aperture value and shutter speed that are displayed in parallel.

40 is an ASA sensitivity setting dial for setting the ASA sensitivity of the film to be used.

This dial 40 can be rotated by slightly lifting it with a finger in the direction of the arrow β, and when the finger is released after setting the film sensitivity, the dial 40 returns to the opposite direction of the arrow β by the biasing force of the spring and the set position is fixed. .

This is a mechanism provided to prevent the dial 40 from rotating inadvertently during photographing.

42 moves the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 when performing automatic exposure control and wants to take a photo with an overexposure or underexposure amount relative to the appropriate exposure amount,
This is a scale that serves as an index for obtaining excessive or insufficient exposure by changing the set film sensitivity relative to the actual film sensitivity. This is the relational expression (1) listed earlier.
, As is clear from (2), if the set film sensitivity is changed with respect to the actual film sensitivity, the calculation result is
Focusing on the fact that the exposure amount that is considered appropriate and calculated is either excessive or insufficient for the film actually used by the amount of change made to the set film sensitivity, special changes are made to the calculation circuit or its calculation routine. It allows you to easily take photos with overexposure or underexposure without adding
It can be said that this is an extremely effective method.

Reference numeral 44 denotes a film rewind knob that houses a rewind lever 46, and the film that is being exposed while being wound one frame at a time by the winding lever 14 is rotated by the rotation of this knob. , is rehoused within Hatrone. To rewind the film, press the rewind button 48 provided on the bottom of the body 4 to release the film winding mechanism from the film winding lever 14, and then press the rewind lever from the film rewind knob 44. 46 and rotate it in the direction of arrow γ. This method of rewinding the film is well known.

This camera device is provided with an accessory shoe 50 like a general camera.

Of course, the main purpose is to attach a strobe or a light emitting device for flash photography, but as will be detailed later, the strobe included in the camera system of the present invention is closely connected to this camera device. It is about collaboration. Also,
An adapter for external photometry included in the camera system of the present invention can be connected to this accessory X7 unit 5Q.

In addition to the synchronization contact 52, the accessory shoe 50 includes a control terminal 54 for receiving control information from a strobe, an external photometry adapter, etc., a data terminal 56 for receiving data, and an AE lock terminal 58. Several levels of level signals are input to the control terminal 54, each instructing the camera to operate in different modes, and the data terminal 56 inputs signals such as the aperture value set on the strobe and the subject metered with an external metering adapter. Data regarding brightness is input as an analog value.

I'll explain more about strobes and external metering adapters later.

60 is an eyepiece shutter lever.

The eyepiece shutter is provided to shield the viewfinder window 13 from light, and when you take your eyes off the viewfinder window 13, especially when using the self-timer, the light entering through the viewfinder window 13 will expose the film surface. This is to prevent errors caused by light entering from the finder window 13 from being added to subject brightness information, which is a prerequisite for automatic exposure control. - The finder window is closed by operating the lever 6o in the direction of arrow C. This mechanism is T
This is definitely needed for cameras with TL photometry function.

Reference numeral 62 denotes a 1.

Reference numeral 64 denotes an aperture lever, and when pushed in the direction of arrow δ, the lens device 2 is apertured. Now, if the aperture value is preset by the aperture adjustment ring 8 of the lens device 2, the lens device 2 will be stopped down to the preset position by operating the aperture lever 64, and the mark on the aperture adjustment ring 8 will be 12 is set to the index 7, the operation of the aperture lever 64 is restricted. Note that it is possible to align the mark 12 on the aperture adjustment ring 8 with the index 7 while the aperture lever 64 is operated to the aperture position, but this is considered an erroneous operation and the viewfinder 1
A warning will be issued within 3 days. The relationship between the state of the aperture adjustment ring 8 of the lens device 2 and the states of the aperture lever 64 and mode changeover switch 38 of the body 4 will be described in detail later. This narrowing lever 64 is locked when operated in the narrowing position, but this lock is released by pressing the release button 66, and the lever 64
returns to its original position.

A screw hole 68 for fixing a tripod is provided on the bottom of this camera device, but this screw hole 68 can also be used for mounting a motor drive device. In addition, the motor
When installing the drive device, remove the lid 70 at the bottom of the shaft of the winding lever 14.
The shaft of No. 4 and the winding shaft of the motor drive device are fitted to form a mechanical connection. When the motor drive device is installed, a control signal is applied to the motor drive device through the contact device 72 on the bottom surface of the body 4. This motor
The drive device will be explained in detail later, but this motor
After the shutter is released and all camera operations associated with the shutter release are completed, the drive device uses the driving force of the motor to replace the film winding lever 14.
It has the function of advancing the film and charging other necessary parts, making it possible to perform continuous shutter release and making it easier for the photographer to capture the desired shutter opportunity. This is an extremely useful function, apart from the volume and weight of the motor and its driving power source.

When the film rewinding knob 44 is pulled up, the back cover 74 on the back of the body 4 opens, allowing the film in the cartridge to be refilled.

By opening the back cover 74, the film counter 15 on the top surface of the body 4 is reset and returns to the original indicated position.

Although the configuration of each part of this camera device has been briefly explained above, it is important to note that specific information about the lens device 2 and the body 4 has been omitted, or the lens device 2 from the body 4 side has been explained briefly.
, the aperture control mechanism of Since the relationship between the information or data display and the operation and operation of the camera device is insufficient, a more detailed explanation will be given below.

FIG. 2 is a perspective view for explaining the case where the lens device 2 and the body 4 of the first illustrated camera device are separated, and the lens device 2 is moved relative to the body 4 as shown by the arrow λ and assembled. The body 4 includes a mount ring 76 on the mounting surface of the lens device 2, and the mount ring 76 has three independent flanges 78A, 78B, and 78C protruding from its outer peripheral end. This mount ring 76 is firmly fixed to the body 4 in parallel to a plane perpendicular to the optical axis, that is, parallel to the film plane, so as to surround the optical path. This is because the mount ring 76 is the only member that connects the lens device 2 to the body 4, and any deviation in the mounting accuracy or changes over time will definitely have a negative effect on the subject image formed on the film surface. It depends on On the other hand, a tightening ring 10 is rotatably provided on the lens device 2 side, and this tightening ring 10 moves the lens device 2 in the direction of the arrow λ in the illustrated state.
When combined with the body 4, the flange 78 of the mount ring 76
Notch 80 through which each of A, 78B, and 78C can pass.
A, 80B, and 80C, the mount ring 7
After each of the flanges 78A, 78B, 78C of 6 is passed through the corresponding notch 80A, 80B180C, by rotating the tightening ring 10 in the direction of the arrow φ, each of the flanges 78A, 78C, 78B and 78C are the non-notched portions 8 of the tightening ring 10.
2A, 82B, and 82C to fix the lens device 2 to the body 4.

The side where the lens device 2 is attached to the body 4 is provided with various mechanisms for information exchange or control with the body 4.

A lever 84 is associated with the number of aperture stages from the open position of the lens device 2, and is disposed movably in the directions of arrows ψ and φ along the annular hole 86. This lever 84 is biased in the direction of arrow φ by a strong spring, but the lens device 2
is not attached to the body 4 and the tightening ring 10 is in the ready state as shown in the figure, when the arrow φ is inserted into the annular hole 86.
It is held in a state where it moves in the direction.

This state is released by rotating the tightening ring 10 in the direction of the arrow φ in order to attach the lens device 2 to the body 4. At this time, the lever 84 moves in the direction of the arrow φ due to the biasing force of the spring, but when it reaches a certain position, its movement is restricted. This certain position is the lens device 2
This corresponds to the number of aperture steps from the open position for the preset aperture value, and the closer it is in the direction of the arrow ψ, the smaller the number of aperture steps, and the closer it is in the direction of the arrow φ, the larger the number of aperture steps. It is something. As mentioned above, the lens device 2 can preset the aperture value using the aperture setting ring 8, but the movement restriction position of the lever 84 changes depending on the preset aperture value. , Along with this, Reno ;-84 also moved,
Therefore, depending on the position of this lever 84, it is possible to transmit the number of aperture steps from the open aperture to the body 4 for the preset aperture value set by the aperture setting ring 8. The reason I say "possibility" here is that the main focus of the camera device applied in this example is to perform automatic exposure control, and as will be explained in detail later, the aperture value from the body side of the camera device is This is because it is not necessary to particularly detect the position of the lever 84 to detect the number of aperture steps preset by the aperture setting ring 8 of lens mount #2.

When the mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 is aligned with the index 7, the lever 84 is always moved to the position corresponding to the maximum aperture stage number of the lens device, that is, the lever 84 is moved in the annular hole 86 by the biasing force of the spring. It is in a state where it moves all at once in the φ direction.

In other words, no matter where the lever 84 is restricted from moving in the φ direction according to the biasing force of the spring, it moves against the biasing force of the spring in the direction of the smaller number of aperture stages, that is, in the direction of the arrow ψ. things are possible. That is, lever 8
4 to a desired position against the biasing force of the spring, a desired aperture value can be set without depending on the aperture setting ring 8. This characteristic can be applied to a so-called servo-type AE camera that automatically controls the aperture value by controlling the position of this lever 84 with a servo motor.
Although it has been implemented, it has drawbacks such as slow response, so this embodiment uses a different method to take advantage of this characteristic.

Now, what is indicated by 88 is the aperture lever, and the aperture opening position of this aperture lever 88 is in the direction of the arrow Ω.
That is, it corresponds to the large diameter side and is always urged in this direction by a spring. Also, since the arrow ν direction corresponds to the narrowing position of the lens, that is, the small diameter side, by moving the narrowing lever 88 in the arrow ν direction against the biasing force of the spring, the lens device 2 is moved to the open position. The aperture is narrowed down by the number of aperture stages corresponding to the position of the lever 84.

Further, reference numeral 90 denotes an open bottle having a protruding amount corresponding to the open aperture value of the lens device 2, and is used to transmit the open aperture value of the lens device 2 to the body 4. This open pin 90 is important in performing various corrections for calculating accurate subject brightness information in exposure calculation based on subject brightness information by TTL photometry.

Further, 91 indicates a minimum aperture pin having a protrusion amount corresponding to the maximum aperture value, that is, the minimum aperture of this lens device 2, and is used to transmit the maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 to the body 4. . This minimum aperture pin 91 is used to detect the limit of the aperture of the controllable lens device 2 during exposure control.

92 is an AE bin that protrudes when the mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 is aligned with the index 7, and indicates that the aperture value is not preset on the lens device 2 side.
It was set up to transmit information to the other side.

On the other hand, the body side is provided with mechanisms that cooperate with various mechanisms of the lens device 2 as described above.

94 operates by bringing its surface on the arrow θ side into contact with the surface on the arrow φ side of the lever 84 provided on the lens device 2.
The E lever is always biased in the direction of arrow θ with a weak spring force. The spring that biases the fart lever 94 in the direction of the arrow θ is extremely weak compared to the force that biases the lever 84 on the lens device 2 side in the direction of the arrow φ.
cannot resist the force that tries to move in the direction of the arrow φ. Therefore, this AE lever 94 is always urged in the σ direction by the lever 84 on the lens device 2 side. This AE lever 94 operates when the winding lever 14 is operated.
It moves in the direction of the arrow θ together with the lever 84 and against its biasing force, and is locked in the illustrated position. This lock is released when the shutter is released, but as a result of the release of the lock, the AFL/bar 94 is naturally moved to the lever 8.
It will run in the direction of arrow σ depending on the urging force of 4. In addition,
The body 4 operates the AE lever 94 based on the control aperture value set by the dial 34 or obtained as a result of calculation.
The AE lever 94 is provided with a mechanism for clamping at an appropriate position, and when this clamp mechanism operates, the AE lever 94 stops at the clamp position. Therefore, naturally, the lever 84 is also
Movement in the direction of the arrow φ is restricted at a position corresponding to the clamp position of the lever 94, and the number of aperture stages is preset. That is, the clamp position of the AE lever 94 is extremely important in determining the number of aperture stages of the lens device 2, and therefore a highly accurate mechanism is required for detecting the clamp position. This mechanism converts the amount of movement of the AE lever 94 in the direction of arrow σ from the lock position into pulses, and counts the number of pulses in correspondence with the number of aperture stages to obtain the desired number of pulses. A configuration that obtains the number of aperture stages is applied.

Due to its structure, when the lens is narrowed down by pushing the aperture lever 64 provided on the body 4 in the direction of the arrow δ, the AE lever 94 is locked at the reference position or
The clamp at the desired position is released, and the At lever 94 moves in the direction of the arrow σ due to the biasing force of the lever 84. At this time, if the aperture value has been selected and set with the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side, the lever 84 is restricted from moving at a position corresponding to the number of aperture stages up to this aperture value, and therefore the AE lever 94 is also restricted from moving. The aperture is stopped and the aperture is stopped until it reaches the set aperture value, but if mark 12 is set on the aperture setting ring 8, the lever 84 is not restricted to travel to the maximum aperture position, that is, the minimum aperture position. In the end, the aperture is narrowed down to the maximum aperture value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the aperture setting ring 8 is setting the mark 12, the aperture L/bar 64 is locked so that it cannot be operated. However, if for some reason the lock of the barrel lever 94 to the reference position is released before the shutter release, the film can be moved without advancing by operating the winding lever while pressing the multiple exposure button 16. This AE easily
The lever 94 can be locked at the reference position.

Note that when the AE lever 94 is locked at the standard position, it is said that the AE is being charged, and also when the AE lever 94 is locked at the standard position.
Locking the E lever 94 at the standard position is called performing AE charging. Further, the release of the AE lever 94 from the reference position is called AE discharge.

Reference numeral 96 denotes an aperture input pin for taking in the aperture value of the lens device 2, which contacts the aperture pin 90 of the lens device 2 and outputs a signal corresponding to the amount of protrusion of the pin 90, that is, in response to the aperture value of the lens device 2. It is used to capture signals. In addition,
This open input pin 96 is connected to a mechanism that converts the amount of movement thereof into a digital value, and as a result, the open aperture value of the lens device 2 is taken in as a digital value.

Reference numeral 97 denotes a minimum aperture input pin for taking in the minimum aperture value of the lens device 2, and when it comes into contact with the minimum aperture pin 91 of the lens device 2, a signal corresponding to the amount of protrusion of the pin 91, that is, the maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 is generated. This is to capture a signal corresponding to the value, that is, the minimum aperture diaphragm. Note that this minimum aperture input pin 97 is connected to a mechanism that converts the amount of movement thereof into a digital value, and as a result, the maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 is taken in as a digital value.

Reference numeral 98 denotes an aperture drive lever, which brings the surface in the direction of the arrow ε into contact with or faces the surface in the direction of the arrow Ω of the aperture lever 88 of the lens device 2, and moves in the direction of the arrow ε before exposure starts at the time of shutter release. Drive the aperture drive lever 88 in the direction of arrow ν to move the aperture of the lens device 2 from the open position to the lever 84.
This allows narrowing down to the aperture position specified by. Note that after the exposure is completed, the aperture drive lever 98 moves in the direction of the arrow ω and returns to its original position, thereby opening the aperture of the lens device 2 again. The aperture drive lever 98 can also be moved in the direction of the arrow ε by operating the aperture lever 64 of the body 4 in the direction of the arrow δ. This is a necessary mechanism for viewing the subject image through the lens device 2 narrowed down from the finder 13.

Reference numeral 100 denotes an AE detection unit facing the AE pin 92 of the lens device 2, which detects the protruding AE bin 92 and detects the mark 12 when the mark 12 is selected by the second aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device. It is provided to take in a control signal indicating that it is selected.

As is clear from the above explanation, when trying to control the aperture value of the lens device 2 from the body 4 side, the mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 needs to be aligned with the index 7. Mark 12 is called the AE mark.

Next, the lever 8 is used after the lens device 2 is attached to the body 4 until the aperture is stopped, that is, the shutter is released.
4. For each movement of the AE lever 94, the aperture lever 88, and the aperture drive lever 98, the aperture setting ring 8
The case where the aperture setting ring 8 is set to a certain aperture value will be explained according to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 3, and the case where the aperture setting ring 8 is set to the AE mark 12 will be explained according to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 4.

As mentioned before, FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of each lever in a state where some aperture value is preset on the lens device 2 side. With the lens device 2 in the preparation state, the tightening ring 10 has not been rotated to the mounting position, so the lever 84 is moved against the force of the spring that urges the lever 84 in the direction of the arrow φ.
It is kept moved in the direction of the arrow ψ. Now, if only the tightening ring 10 is rotated in the direction of the arrow φ without attaching the lens device 2 to the body 4, the lever 84
moves in the direction of the arrow φ to a position defined by the aperture setting ring 8, as shown in FIG. This movement depends on the force of the spring which tends to move the lever 84 in the direction of the arrow φ. Let us now assume that this lens device 2 is attached to the body 4 when AE charging is not completed or when the aperture lever 64 is being operated to suppress it. In this case, the AE lever 94 on the body 4 side is biased by the spring in the direction of the arrow θ, but it is not specifically locked, so
When the tightening ring 10 of the lens device 2 is rotated in the direction of the arrow φ and attached to the body 4, the biasing force of the spring that tries to rotate the lever 84 in the direction of the arrow φ is A
Since it is superior to the biasing force of the spring that tries to move the E lever 94 in the direction of arrow δ, the lever 84 moves as shown in the figure (J).
As shown in the figure, the aperture setting ring 8 moves in the direction of the arrow φ to a position defined by the aperture setting ring 8. Along with this, the AE lever 94 is pushed by the lever 84 and enters the state shown in FIG. Now, here and there, the aperture lever 6 of the body 4
If AE charging is performed by operating the winding lever 14 with the winding lever 94 returned to its original position, the AE lever 94 is driven in the direction of arrow θ against the biasing force of the lever 84, and as shown in FIG. ), it is locked at its standard position.

Therefore, the lever 84 on the lens device 2 side is
4 and is held in the state shown in FIG. 4(D'). Note that when the lens device 2 is attached to the body 4 that has been charged with AE, the AE lever 9
It is obvious that the positions of the lever 84 and the lever 84 will be maintained as shown in FIG. Next, when the shutter release is performed, the lock of the AE lever 94 is released, so the lever 84 runs in the direction of the arrow σ against the spring biasing force of the AE lever 94, and the aperture setting ring is moved as shown in the figure. It stops at the position specified by 8. At this time, the AE lever 94 that has been pushed by the lever 84 also stops at the position where the lever 84 has stopped, as shown in FIG. Next, when the aperture drive lever 98 of the body 4 moves in the direction of the arrow ε as shown in FIG. Accordingly, the position is narrowed down to the specified position. In this state, exposure is started, but the state ηG in the figure is maintained at least until the exposure is stopped. Note that when the exposure is completed, the aperture ν drive lever 98
When it returns to the direction of the arrow ω, the lever 84, aperture lever 88, -AE lever 94, and aperture drive lever 98 return to the state shown in 5(d) in the figure.

In addition, through the above operations, the lever 84 and the AE lever 9
4 does not have any particularly meaningful action. This is because, as mentioned earlier, this embodiment does not have a mechanism for taking in the aperture step number information regarding the aperture value preset by the aperture setting ring 8 from the lever 84 to the body 4; The AE lever 94 is used to prevent the lever 84 from running in the direction of the arrow σ by clamping it at a desired position, and to preset the aperture from the so-called body 4 side. Since the aperture is preset using the aperture setting ring 8,
Renoku-84.94 has no effect.

However, as is clear from the explanation of the figure, each Reno 9-8
4.94 each have independent functions, but in modes unrelated to those functions, they do not cause any interference or operational failure. This largely depends on the arrangement of the AB lever 94 and the lever 84 with respect to one lens device configuration and the force distribution of the springs that bias each lever.

As mentioned earlier, FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of each lever in a state where no aperture value is set on the lens device 2 side. With the lens device 2 in a ready state to be attached to the clamping ring 10
Since the lever 84 has not been rotated to the mounting position, the lever 84 is kept moved in the direction of the arrow ψ against the force of the spring that urges the lever 84 in the direction of the arrow φ.

Now, if only the tightening ring 10 is rotated in the direction of the arrow φ without attaching the lens device 2 to the body 4, the lever 8
4 moves in a negative direction in the direction of arrow φ as shown in FIG. 4(b). Incidentally, this movement position is the same as the position defined when the minimum aperture of the lens device is selected with the aperture setting ring 8. Note that this moving force depends on the force of the spring that attempts to move the lever 84 in the direction of the arrow φ. Next time,
Assume that this lens device 2 is attached to the body 4 in which AE charging has not been completed or the aperture lever 64 is pressed. In this case, the AE lever 9 on the body 4 side
4 is at an uncertain position depending on the previous photographing situation or the state of the aperture lever 64. That is, when preset control of the aperture is performed from the body 4 side, the AE lever 94
is clamped at a location corresponding to the controlled aperture value and remains in that position until the next AE charge is performed, and when the aperture lever 64 is operated, AE discharge is performed and the clamp is released.

Therefore, when the tightening ring 1o of the lens device 2 is rotated in the direction of the arrow φ and attached to the body 4, the lever 84 is urged toward the position shown in FIG. However, since the E lever 94 is actually clamped at the position shown in FIG.
4 is moved in the direction of arrow φ (() by the AE lever 94 to the position shown in FIG. When the winding lever 14 of No. 4 is operated to perform AE charging, the AE lever 94 is driven in the direction of arrow θ against the biasing force of the lever 84, and is locked at its reference position as shown in FIG. The lever 84 on the lens device 2 side is pushed by the AE lever 94 and held in the state shown in FIG. The positions of the AE lever 94 and the lever 84 are exactly the same as in the same figure (D).
It is self-evident that the city will be held in the position shown in (Miyako). Next, when the shutter is released, the AE lever 94 is unlocked, so the lever 84 starts running in the direction of the arrow σ against the spring biasing force of the AE lever 94. The AE lever 94 is pushed by the lever 84 and runs in the direction of the arrow σ, but during this time, the AE lever 94 is
The amount of travel of the lever 94 is detected in a pulse manner and the body 4 is
When the vehicle travels by a movement amount corresponding to the number of aperture stages corresponding to the aperture set or calculated on the side, the AE lever 94 is clamped to restrict further travel. Therefore, A.E.
The lever 94 is clamped and held at the position shown in FIG. Through the above operations, the aperture set or calculated on the body 4 side becomes a preset state. Next, when the aperture drive lever 98 of the body 4 moves in the direction of the arrow ε as shown in FIG. It is narrowed down to the position regulated by.

In this state, exposure is started, but the state shown in FIG. Note that when the exposure is completed and the aperture drive lever 98 returns to the direction of the arrow ω, the lever 84, the aperture lever 88, the AE lever 94, and the aperture drive lever <-9s are shown in the same figure (C) <d>
If shown in , the same state will be restored.

The above operations are performed while performing wide-open photometry with the lens device 2. This operation is performed when an automatic exposure control operation including aperture priority and shutter speed priority is applied, and is particularly effective in controlling the aperture value from the body 4 side of the camera device.

FIG. 5 shows an example of a strobe applied to the camera system of this embodiment, in which (a) is a front view, (b) is a rear view, and (c) is a bottom view. This strobe has a well-known automatic light adjustment function, but is also unique in that it has an information exchange function with a camera device.

In the figure, reference numeral 102 is a light emitting unit that emits a flash of light up to the limit of the light emitting ability of this strobe. Further, 104 is the light emitting section 10.
This is a light detection unit that detects reflected flash light from a subject in order to dim the second flash light. The automatic light adjustment method applied to this strobe is such that when taking a photo, the strobe is emitted and the light emitting section 102 emits light toward the subject, and at the same time, the light detecting section 104 detects the reflected light from the subject. is photometered, and when the total amount of reflected light reaches a predetermined value, the light emitting section 1
By stopping the light emission from 02, an appropriate amount of exposure is given to the film surface. In order to perform such automatic light adjustment, the film sensitivity to be used and the aperture value of the photographic lens must be given in advance as setting information, and the film sensitivity setting dial 106 is provided for this purpose. and an aperture value setting dial 108. Considering this, it seems possible to set the film sensitivity and aperture value through the film sensitivity setting dial 40 and the dial 34 for setting the aperture or shutter speed provided on the camera or camera body. However,
In this embodiment, in order to make it possible to use the strobe in camera systems other than this system, input means for prerequisite information necessary for automatic light adjustment is intentionally provided on the strobe side. The aperture value setting dial 108 is used for manual no mode, that is, a mode in which the operator sets the aperture value without relying on automatic light adjustment, and for selecting a desired aperture value when performing automatic light adjustment. You can select the mode. This selection is made by turning the dial to align the manual mode display 110 or aperture value display 112 written on the diamond 108 with the index 114 provided on the strobe body.
This is done by rotating 08. Further, the film sensitivity setting dial 106 can be rotated by moving a lock lever 116 that restricts its rotation in the direction of the arrow τ. This lock lever 116 is always biased by a spring in the direction opposite to the arrow τ to prevent the film sensitivity setting dial 106 from being inadvertently rotated. Incidentally, as the dial 106 is rotated, a film ASA sensitivity display 120 appears in a window 118 provided on the dial 106.
Index 1 with SA sensitivity display 120 provided on the dial 106
The film sensitivity setting is completed by setting the value to 22.

Note that this film sensitivity setting dial 106 is a guide/sensitivity setting dial 106.
It also serves as a number calculation board, and when manual mode is selected using the dial 108, it can be used to manually set the aperture value of the lens device 2 based on the distance to the subject. That is, when the aperture value setting dial 108 is set to manual mode,
The strobe emits the maximum amount of light it has, without automatically adjusting its brightness. Therefore, in order to give the proper amount of exposure to the film surface, it is necessary to select an appropriate combination of shooting distance and shooting lens aperture value, and the guide number calculation board used for this purpose is A configuration is adopted in which the combination of aperture value and photographing distance is changed to match the guide number of the strobe according to the film sensitivity. Therefore, it is naturally possible to use the film sensitivity setting dial 106 as a guide number calculation board, but in this embodiment, the aperture value series is displayed in the window 124 provided on the dial 106.
126, a shooting distance series display 128 is displayed on the periphery of the window 124 of the dial 106, and the photographer manually sets the aperture value on the camera device side from the corresponding aperture value display 126 and shooting distance display 128. The structure is such that an appropriate amount of exposure is given to the film surface by doing this. As is well known, many strobes have a capacitor discharge type configuration, in which a battery or commercial power source is boosted to a voltage sufficient to cause the xenon discharge tube to emit light, and then the voltage is accumulated in a capacitor and used to take pictures. Sometimes, a configuration is adopted in which the charge in the capacitor is discharged through a xenon discharge tube, thereby causing the discharge tube to emit light. Therefore, in order for the xenon discharge tube to reliably emit light, the capacitor must be charged to a specified voltage, and even if you take a picture before the capacitor is fully charged, the strobe will not work. Since the light does not emit light, sufficient exposure to the film surface cannot be obtained. Therefore, what is needed is a charging completion indicator light 130, which emits light when charging is complete to notify the photographer of this fact. In addition, this charging completion indicator light 13
0 also serves as a light emission test switch, and pressing this switch causes the strobe to emit light. This feature is
It can be effectively used when measuring exposure using a flash meter, etc. 132 is a power switch, and by turning on this switch, charging of the capacitor is started.

The functions of this strobe described above are roughly the same as those of conventionally known strobes equipped with automatic light control devices, but as mentioned earlier, this strobe depends on its combination with a camera device. This constitutes one component of the camera system, and can greatly improve the operability of the camera device.

The strobe shown in the fifth figure is an accessory for the camera device shown in the first figure.
- It can be attached to the shoe 50, but in that case, the shoe 134 provided at the bottom of the strobe body from the back side of the camera device
After fitting and mounting on the accessory shoe 50, it is fixed by tightening with a tightening ring 136. In addition, at the bottom of the strobe shutter 134, there are a synchronization contact 138, a control signal contact 140, and a data signal contact 14.
2, when the strobe is attached, '7 accessory
It is electrically connected to the synchronizing contact 52, the control terminal 54-, and the data terminal 56 of the shoe 50, respectively. Further, the shoe 134 is provided with a ground terminal 144 in a part thereof, and is grounded to the main body of the accessory shoe 50 when the strobe is attached.

When taking pictures using strobe light, the focal
The shutter speed at which a camera equipped with a brain shutter can perform exposure in synchronization with the strobe light emission, that is, the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN, is generally on the low side of 1/60th to 1/125th of a second or less. , it often happens that this setting is incorrect when operating the camera,
Furthermore, resetting the shutter speed for strobe photography impedes operability, and some countermeasures have been required.

On the other hand, the strobe used in this example does not use a passive system that simply issues a warning in case of erroneous operation, but an active system that controls the shutter speed necessary for flash photography from the strobe side. is adopted. This includes a fully automatic method that automatically releases the shutter at the strobe synchronized shutter speed TSYN, regardless of the shutter speed set on the camera device, prior to taking a photo with strobe light, and is set to a higher speed than the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN, the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSY
A semi-automatic method can be considered in which the shutter is released with N and the shutter is released at a shutter speed set on the camera device side in a shutter speed range smaller than this strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN, but in this embodiment, a fully automatic method or It is configured to select and adopt a semi-automatic method as appropriate. A switch 146 provided on the back of the strobe body is used to select between the fully automatic method and the semi-automatic method.

A signal for determining the switching position of the changeover switch 146 is sent from the control contact 140 to the control terminal 5 of the accessory shoe 50 along with a signal indicating that charging of the strobe is completed.
4 as a signal containing two pieces of information.

This is possible by setting the current value that flows when a voltage is applied from the camera side control terminal 54 to the strobe side control contact 140 to be different depending on the switching position of the changeover switch 146. Note that each of these two pieces of information is given to the camera device according to an AND condition with information indicating that charging of the strobe is completed. Therefore, when charging of the strobe is not completed, no signal is transmitted to the camera device side. Now, if a signal indicating that the strobe charging is completed is given as the first information, it will be taken into the camera device as a signal indicating the fully automatic method, and the charging completion signal will be given as the second information. If given, it will be taken into the camera device as a signal indicating semi-automatic mode. The first
Or, depending on the second information signal, the camera device enters the strobe photography mode, and the shutter speed is selected to be the strobe synchronized shutter speed or a slower speed (in the case of semi-automatic mode), and at the same time the data terminal is Data on the aperture value or full light emission is taken in from the data terminal 56. Information set by the aperture setting dial 108 is given to this data terminal 56 as an analog value. That is,
As mentioned earlier, information about the aperture value of the lens is essential in automatic light control mode, and although we configured this to be set on the strobe side, this setting value can also be directly used on the camera device side. In order to use this as an aperture control signal, a transmission system is required. For this purpose, a data contact 142 is provided on the strobe side, and a data terminal 56 is provided on the camera body side. Now, when the charging completion signal is input to the camera device side, the camera device
6, analog information regarding the aperture value is taken in, and aperture control is performed in accordance with that information. Note that when the aperture setting dial 108 of the strobe is set to manual mode, the de-4-event contact 142 contains analog information other than levels corresponding to other aperture values,
For example, an analog signal with a relatively higher level than the data representing the aperture value is output, and a signal is transmitted to the camera body indicating that the strobe is in manual mode and will emit the maximum amount of light.

At this time, since the aperture control is not performed on the camera device side, it is necessary to set the desired aperture value on the lens device 2 side or the aperture value calculated from the guide number calculation board through the aperture setting ring 8.

According to the configuration described above, the camera system in this embodiment can completely automatically obtain the appropriate exposure amount even when shooting using an auxiliary light called a strobe. Conventionally, when taking pictures using an auto-adjustable flash, the shutter speed on the camera device side is set to a strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN or less that can be synchronized with the strobe, for example, 1/60th of a second or less, and the aperture value is set to below. For automatic flash control, it was important to set the value specified from the strobe side, but since the shutter speed and aperture settings are completely automatic, operability has been greatly improved. This makes it possible to avoid erroneous operations. Also, on the camera device side, automatic exposure control operations will be performed until the strobe is fully charged, so even if the shutter is released while the flash is not fully charged, the exposure will not be at the correct exposure or close to it. Since the photo is taken, the probability of obtaining a good photographic image increases.This means that with conventional camera equipment, when taking strobe photography, the strobe is not fully charged and the strobe does not fire when the shutter is released. This is a big improvement compared to the case where the shutter speed and aperture value set for strobe photography often resulted in underexposure when the flash did not fire.

In addition, with this camera system, when taking strobe photography, there is no need for any special operation on the camera device side; simply attach the strobe to the camera device, turn on the strobe's power switch, and wait until the strobe is ready to fire. When the camera is charged, the camera device automatically switches to strobe shooting mode, so all that is left is to adjust the distance and release the shutter. We aim to significantly improve the operability of camera devices that previously required a lot of effort.

One of the most important elements when incorporating an automatic exposure control function into a camera is the photometry system. This photometry system has a function to take in object brightness information, which is one element for exposure calculation, and most commonly used is a configuration in which the brightness of the object is converted into an electrical signal through a photoelectric conversion element.

Most of the light meters built into reflex cameras use internal light metering (TTL), which is also true for single-lens reflex cameras with automatic exposure control. Not an exception. This TTL photometry method actually measures the brightness of the subject that enters through the lens, so relatively accurate photometry is possible, and it is useful because it can be equally applied even when using lenses with different focal lengths. The gender is extremely large.

Also, since you can check the photometering area or frame through the viewfinder, you can easily make corrections to the photometering stitches.

What is discussed in camera devices using this TTL photometry method is the issue regarding the photometry area in the frame.

This photometry area can also be roughly divided into two areas: a partial photometry area that focuses on only a specific part of the frame, such as the center, and an average photometry area that measures the entire area of the frame on average.
Irregular photometry areas are also being considered, such as combining the partial photometry area and the average photometry area, or dividing the average photometry area into several areas and changing the weight of each area.

In camera devices incorporating an automatic exposure control function, it is convenient to apply the average photometry area to this photometry area from the viewpoint of quick shooting, etc., so the average photometry area is widely applied. It still includes some problems.

This is a big problem when using a wide-angle lens, etc., but when the background brightness is extremely different compared to the actual subject you want to photograph, the automatic exposure control mechanism will automatically adjust the exposure according to the background brightness. - There is a risk that the control operation may result in extreme underexposure or overexposure of the subject you actually want to photograph. The above-mentioned AE lock mechanism was provided to deal with this problem, but camera devices that perform such average metering only measure the brightness of the subject at a specific position within the frame. If you want to measure the
Once you get close to the subject, frame the camera so that the specific position of the subject occupies most of the frame, perform photometry, and then move away from the subject while operating the AE lock mechanism to achieve the desired framing and focusing. It is a cumbersome operation to perform the two-shot release after the release.

In order to avoid this, it is preferable to measure the subject brightness by partial photometry.

In the camera system of this embodiment, in order to deal with this problem, an accessory shoe 50 of the camera device is provided.
The camera is configured such that an external photometer other than the TTL photometer can be attached to the camera, and automatic exposure control is performed based on the photometry results from this external photometer.

FIG. 6 shows a perspective view of an external photometer applied to the camera system of this embodiment, and shows the bottom surface 145 of this photometer.
The contact point 146 provided on the camera device side
contactable with a control terminal 54 provided within the shoe 50;
When the photometer is attached to the accessory shoe 50, this information is notified to the camera side. This is given from the photometer to the camera device as third information separate from the charging completion signal, which consists of two pieces of information indicating whether the strobe attached to the accessory shoe 50 is fully automatic or semi-automatic. The camera device that received this third information,
The mode is switched to external photometry mode, and analog information input from the data terminal 56 is taken in as subject brightness information. The contact 148 provided on the bottom of the photometer can be contacted with the data terminal 56 when the photometer is attached to the accessory 7U 50, and outputs the brightness of the subject light incident through the light receiving window 150 as analog data. , is transmitted to the camera device side through the data terminal 56. The light-receiving angle of the light-receiving window 150 may be fixed as appropriate depending on the purpose, but in this embodiment, a zoom function is added to the light-receiving angle, and the focal length of the photographic lens used and the The structure is such that the light receiving angle can be freely and variably set according to the desired photometric area.

With this configuration, the camera device automatically switches to external metering mode when a photometer for external metering is attached to the accessory shoe 50, and performs automatic exposure control operation based on side view information from the photometer. As a result, the scope of application can be further expanded.

Now, when we consider the TTL exposure meter built into an eye reflex camera and the external photometer mentioned earlier, these metering systems are so-called reflected light metering systems that measure the light reflected from the subject. Since this is a method, the amount of photometry corresponds to the actual brightness of the subject as the subject brightness.

However, since this subject brightness is greatly affected by the subject's color tone and surface condition, it is important to accurately measure the brightness of the light, that is, the illuminance, to determine the subject's color tone, etc. This is not a suitable method if you are trying to make accurate exposure decisions that are not influenced by this method. For example, when metering an all-white subject and an all-black subject under the same lighting, if you use the reflected light method, there will naturally be a difference in the amount of photometry, but if you measure the light using the incident light method, Naturally, the amount of photometry depends only on the lighting conditions in which the two-wave subject is placed, so
There is no difference between the two. Therefore, if you want to know the actual exposure amount accurately, it is preferable to use the incident light method, and even if the camera device, especially a camera device that has an automatic exposure control function, uses automatic exposure control based on the photometry results based on the incident light method. It is desirable to be able to do so.

From this point of view, the shooting system in this embodiment further includes an incident light type 0 exposure meter as an external photometry system.

FIG. 7 shows a perspective view of an incident light type exposure meter applied to the camera system of this embodiment, and this exposure meter 60 is connected to the camera device by a cord 154. This code 15
4 includes a signal line for transmitting various information or data from the exposure meter 160 to the camera device, and a coupler 1 at one end.
56 to the accessory shoe 50 of the camera device, and connect the plug 158 provided at the other end to the exposure meter 160.
By attaching the light meter 160 to the socket 162 of the camera device, the exposure meter 160 is connected to the camera device.

A contact 166 on the bottom surface 164 of the coupler 156 is contactable with a control terminal 54 in the accessory shoe 50 of the camera device, so that the exposure meter 160 can be connected just as in the case of the external photometer described above. When connected to a camera device, this information is notified to the camera side. This is also given from the exposure meter to the camera device as third information separate from the charging completion signal, which consists of two pieces of information indicating whether the strobe attached to the accessory shoe 50 is fully automatic or semi-automatic. Upon receiving this third information, the camera device switches to external photometry mode and takes in the analog information input from the data terminal 56 as illuminance information. Note that this illuminance information is treated as a value that is completely equivalent to the subject brightness information input from the external photometer mentioned above in terms of exposure calculation. Note that a contact point 168 provided on the bottom surface of the coupler 156 can come into contact with the data terminal 56 when attached to the accessory shoe 50,
The illuminance information obtained as a result of photometry at 0 is transmitted as analog data to the camera device side through the data terminal 56. Furthermore, the contact point 1 provided on the bottom surface of the coupler 156
70 is capable of contacting the AE lock terminal 58 of the accessory shoe 50; 1) At the same time as the coupler 156 is attached, this contact 170 contacts the AE lock terminal 58 to activate the automatic exposure control mechanism of the camera device; In particular, lock the amount of photometry. This AE lock is released only while the metering button 174 provided on the exposure meter 160 is pressed. Note that the exposure meter 160 starts metering by pressing the metering button 174, and stops metering by releasing the metering button 174.

176 to explain the exposure meter 160 in more detail.
is a light-receiving head that is rotatably provided, and its light-receiving portion is covered with a hemispherical diffusion member 178. During photometry, the photometry button 174 is pressed after positioning the light receiving section of the light receiving head 176 from the subject toward the camera device. By this operation, the AE lock on the camera device side is released, calculations for automatic exposure control are started, and the exposure meter 160 starts photometry and the data regarding the illuminance measured by the light receiving section is converted into a code. 154 to the camera device side as analog data. Here, the camera device from which the AE lock has been released performs calculations for automatic exposure control based on the data regarding the illuminance. Note that during photometry, the illuminance obtained as a result of the photometry is also displayed by the meter 180 on the exposure meter 160 side. Accordingly, the photographer can also know the combination of aperture value and shutter speed change necessary to obtain proper exposure from the instruction from the pointer 182 of the meter 180 through the calculation board 184. When the metering is finished, press the metering button 174.
By releasing the suppression, the camera device enters the AE lock state again and the pointer 182 of the meter 180 is clamped. In this state, remove the exposure meter 160 from the metering position, perform appropriate operations such as framing and focusing on the camera device side, and then release the shutter to automatically expose based on the AE-locked calculation result. It is controlled and exposure can be obtained under desired conditions.

The reason why we added the AE lock function of the camera device to this incident light type exposure meter is because it is necessary to use the incident light type exposure meter close to the subject, away from the location where the camera is installed when shooting. Therefore, the location where the light metering operation using the exposure meter 160 is performed and the location of the camera device used for taking pictures are not necessarily the same, and if you release the shutter while continuing to meter the light, the exposure meter will be inside the subject and the picture will be taken. The reason is that there is a risk of this happening and it is necessary to avoid this.

That is, the exposure meter 160, like a general incident light type exposure meter used alone, temporarily performs photometering operation near the subject, and releases the AE lock of the camera device only during photometry to record the photometry data. After the exposure metering is completed, the calculation results are locked using the AE lock. This allows exposure control.

As mentioned above, by providing a camera device with an automatic exposure control function with an automatic exposure control function based on photometric data from an incident light exposure meter, the scope of application of the camera device can be greatly expanded. be.

The camera system of this embodiment allows application of a motor drive device. This motor drive device has a mechanism that automatically winds the film after the shutter release, allowing continuous shooting of moving objects,
It can be used extremely effectively to capture the correct shutter opportunity, but since it eliminates the need to advance the film, you can concentrate on 7-raming and focusing for taking photos, and you can also use the shutter speed.・Since there is more leeway for opportunities, the possibility of photographing can be greatly improved.

The motor drive device applied to the camera system of this embodiment is extremely effectively applied to photographing.
It is required that the camera device be compact and functionally superior, without deteriorating the operability of the camera device compared to before the motor drive is installed.

FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing an example of a motor drive device applied to the camera system of this embodiment, in which 186 is a main body of the motor drive device, and 188 is a rotatable motor drive device mounted on the main body 186. a camera mounting screw for mounting the main body 186 on the body 4;
90 is a mounting ring that is pivotally connected to the camera mounting screw 188 and is used to rotate the mounting screw 188; 192 is a power switch for this motor/drive device; 194 is the number of frames that can be taken with the film being used or the number of frames desired by the photographer; A frame number setting gear 196 for setting the desired number of frames to be shot by this motor drive device is the number of remaining frames that can be taken on the film that is fed one frame at a time by this motor drive device, or the number of frames that can be shot by the motor drive device. a film counter for displaying the number of frames set by the number setting gear 194;
98 is a contact terminal that is connected to the contact device 72 on the bottom surface of the body 4 when this motor drive device is attached to the camera device, and 200 is a contact terminal that is connected to the shaft of the winding lever 14 of the camera device when the motor drive device is attached. A winding coupler 202 is used to mate and mechanically connect the rewind button 48, since the rewind button 48 cannot be operated when a motor drive device is attached to the bottom of the camera device body 4. A rewind lever 204 provided to be operated from the device side projects onto the main body 186 by operating the rewind lever 202, and is used to press the rewind button 48 on the bottom of the camera device body 4. It is a rewind pin.

In addition, when attaching the motor drive device to the camera device, it is necessary to remove the lid 70 on the bottom surface of the body 4 to expose the coupler 206 that interlocks with the shaft of the winding lever 14 of the camera device. After removing the lid 70,
The motor drive device main body 186 is connected to the camera device body 4.
When attached to the bottom surface, the winding coupler 2 on the main body 186 side
00 and the turnip 2206 on the body 4 side are fitted together, making it possible to wind up the film from the motor drive device side.

Note that the motor drive device attached to the camera device needs to operate in close cooperation with each operation of the camera device, and for this purpose, some kind of information transmission means is required between the motor drive device and the camera device.

The contact device 72 on the camera device side and the contact terminal 198 on the motor drive device side are provided for this purpose, and when the motor drive device is attached to the camera device, the contact device 72 on the bottom of the camera device The three contacts 214, 216, and 218 included in the motor drive device main body 1
Three contacts 208.2 included in 86 contact terminals 198
10.212, respectively. Note that when the contacts 208 and 214 come into contact here, they connect the ground wires of the camera device and the motor drive device, and when the contacts 210 and 216 come into contact here, they connect the ground wires of the camera device and the motor drive device. The signal to drive the winding motor is transmitted from the time when exposure is completed until the winding is completed, and contacts 212 and 218 are connected to the shutter release device provided on the motor drive device side to the camera device. This is to perform the shutter release.

Note that 220 is the aforementioned shutter release device, which is a device for remotely operating the camera device, particularly for winding the film using the shutter release and motor drive device.

This shutter release device 220 is connected to the motor drive device main body 186 by a control cord 222 of an appropriate length.
This connects the plug 224 provided at the tip of the control cord 222 to the motor drive device main body 186.
This is done by inserting it into a socket 226 provided in the socket.

This shutter release device 220 has an operation button 228
By pressing this operation button 228, a shutter release signal is applied from the motor drive device to the camera device through the contacts 212 and 218 mentioned above.

This operation button 228 has exactly the same function as the shutter release button 18 provided on the top surface of the body 4 on the camera device side. Note that the operation button 228 is locked in the pressed state by sliding it in the direction of the arrow while being pressed.

To explain in more detail the motor drive device configured as described above, when applying the motor drive device to a camera device, first remove the lid 70 provided on the bottom surface of the camera device body 4, and then remove the lid 70 from the bottom of the camera device body 4. 4 Align the bottom surface with the top surface of the motor/drive device main body 186. In this state,
The winding coupler 200 is in a position where it can be mated with the coupler 206, the mounting screw 188 is still in a position where it can be screwed into the screw hole 68, the pin 204 is still in a position facing the winding button 48, and the contact terminal 198 contacts 208
．． 210.212 is the corresponding contact 21 of the contact device 72
It is necessary to position it so that it can come into contact with 4.216.218. This positioning is done by the camera device and the motor.
Unless the direction of the drive device is reversed, this can be done easily and quickly by holding the bottom surface of the camera device body 4 with the holding edge 228 provided on the upper edge of the motor/drive device main body 186. Next, by rotating the mounting ring 190, the mounting screw 188 is screwed into the screw hole 68 on the bottom surface of the body 4 while rotating 1, thereby firmly fixing the motor drive device to the camera device. In this state, the winding coupler 200 and the coupler 206 are fitted, and each contact 208, 210, 212 of the contact terminal 198 abuts a corresponding contact 214, 216, 218 of the contact device 72. In addition, to fit the winding coupler 200 and the coupler 206, the two claws 230 of the winding coupler 200 are connected to the coupler 2.
Depending on the rotational position of each coupler, the claws 230 of the winding coupler 200 may fit into the engagement holes 232 of the coupler 206 when the motor drive device is installed. 232 may not engage properly. In preparation for such a case, the winding coupler 200 is designed to be able to sink in its axial direction, and is held protruding by the biasing force of a spring. That is, if the pawl 230 of the winding coupler 200 does not engage with the engagement hole 232 of the coupler 206, the pawl 230 will be pushed by a portion other than the engagement hole 232 of the coupler 206 and sink, so that each This prevents excessive force from being applied to the coupler. However, on the camera device side,
By operating the winding lever 14 or rotating the motor on the motor drive device, the winding coupler 2
00 or the coupler 206 rotates, and the claw 230 and the engagement hole 2
32 are in an engageable position, the pawl 230 protrudes under the biasing force of the spring and engages with the retaining hole 232.

By installing a motor drive device, this camera device can automate the winding of the film after shooting and can take continuous photos. The photographer turns on the power of the motor drive device using the power switch 192 immediately after taking a picture using the motor drive device. At this time, if film winding has already been completed on the camera device side, the motor drive device is in a standby state, but if film winding has not been completed, the motor drive device performs the -H film winding operation. It will be in a standby state. next,
By pressing the shutter release button 18 on the camera device side, the motor drive device winds up the film after photographing. Further, by keeping the shutter release button 18 pressed, the no-yata release and film winding are continuously repeated.

It should be noted that the film counter 196 performs a subtraction count every time the film is wound once, and when the content of the counter 196 reaches '0', the operation of this motor drive device is regulated. This is an important function in the sense of protecting the film perforations and preventing excessive force from being applied to the motor of the motor drive device.

When rewinding the film after shooting all the frames of the film, by rotating the rewind lever 202 in the direction of the arrow, the pin 204 pushes the rewind pin 48 of the camera device, making it possible to rewind the film. becomes.

Note that the shutter release device 220 has exactly the same function as the shutter release button 18 provided on a camera device, and the shutter release and film winding are performed by pressing the operation button 228.
Continuous shutter release and film winding is achieved by holding down or locking the operating button 228.

Also, align the selector lever 22 provided on the top surface of the camera device body 4 to the position where the mark 28 is selected, and keep the shutter release button/18 pressed or release the shutter release device. If the operation button 228 of 220 is pressed and locked, the self-
The shutter release and film advance are repeated at intervals specified by a timer mechanism.

As described above, the motor drive device applied to the camera system of this embodiment can greatly expand the range of use of this camera device, and improve the mobility of the camera device.
This greatly improves quick shooting performance and operability.

The viewfinder plays an extremely important role in camera operation, and most camera operations, including framing and focusing operations, which are the basics of camera operation, are performed while looking through the viewfinder. As mentioned earlier, the viewfinder has an important relationship with the operability of the camera, and for that reason,
If most of the information necessary for camera operation can be obtained through the viewfinder, the operability can be greatly improved. However, the shooting information displayed in the viewfinder is
They need to be efficiently arranged in a limited area, and the displayed information needs to be easy to confirm. This is important in the sense that the photographer can concentrate on framing and focusing.

The camera system of this embodiment is equipped with a new information display system that allows camera device finder information and shooting information to be viewed efficiently and easily, prevents erroneous camera operations, and improves operability. .

Through this information display system, the operator can obtain various information such as shutter speed, aperture value, low brightness warning, high brightness warning, automatic or manual mode, pulp, strobe charging completion, and warnings for incorrect operation. Therefore, it is possible to obtain information to deal with any situation while looking through the finder.

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram of the finder information when looking through the finder window 13 of the camera device, and the focusing screen 234 has a split section 236 and a micro-screen for reliably and quickly focusing.
A prism section 238 is arranged coaxially. This focusing screen 234 is the most important part in projecting the subject onto it and performing focusing and 7-raming operations.
The operator can obtain desired information necessary for photographing from a portion outside the outer periphery of the screen 234. The shooting information is configured to be displayed using light emitting elements such as LEDs so that it can be confirmed even when shooting with a strobe in the dark or when shooting a stage, but in this embodiment, the information is also displayed digitally. It is characterized by displaying

Digital display of shooting information allows the photographer to obtain objective shooting information, unlike the fixed point type, hand movement type, and other methods that relatively obtain shooting information, which were commonly used in the past. When performing operations, it becomes possible to predict depth of field, camera shake, etc., making it possible to perform accurate photographic operations.

This LED display is the focusing screen 23
4, and consists of a symbol display section 240 for representing a reciprocal number, a numeric symbol display section 242 for displaying a 4-digit number or symbol, and a decimal point display section for representing a decimal point. The first display section 2 consists of a section 243.
44, a second display section 250 consisting of a decimal point display section 246 for representing a decimal point, and a numeric symbol display section 248 for displaying a two-digit number or symbol consisting of eight character segments;
'M' when in manual to display manual or automatic lock mode
It is composed of a third display section 252 that displays characters.

The first display section is mainly used to display the shutter speed, and the second display section is mainly used to display the aperture position, but depending on the operation mode, other information may be displayed.

That is, the first display section not only displays the shutter speed from 60 seconds to 1/2000 seconds, but also displays "buLb" when variable is selected as the shutter speed, and also displays "buLb" for flash photography. When the strobe is fully charged, the photographer should be informed that strobe photography is possible ("EF" is displayed together with the shutter speed for strobe photography, and it is also necessary to let the photographer know that photography is possible. As a warning to let the photographer know that this is not allowed.
EEEE” is also displayed blinking.

In addition to displaying the aperture values from Fl, 2 to F22, the second display section also displays the aperture settings when manually adjusting the exposure by operating the aperture setting ring 8 while the aperture of the lens device 2 is closed down. If the aperture value set is insufficient for proper exposure, a blinking display of "op" will be displayed, and if it is excessive, a flashing display of "c" will be displayed.
A flashing display "L" is displayed, and a display "oo-II" is displayed when the aperture is appropriate, informing the photographer of the appropriate aperture for shooting, and also informing the photographer that the aperture is not being taken correctly. As a warning, a blinking "EE" is displayed together with the first display section.

Since the information in the viewfinder as explained above is closely related to each operation mode of the camera device, below, while explaining each operation mode of the camera device shown in the first diagram,
What information is displayed in the finder accordingly will be clarified through the explanatory diagram of FIG. 10, which shows a display example.

Now, when performing automatic exposure control photography with shutter speed priority (hereinafter referred to as AE photography) with the camera device shown in the first figure, set the mode selector switch 38 on the top of the body 4 to the shutter speed priority mode side, and rotate the dial 34. Enables shutter speed setting input through operation. Further, the mark 12 of the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is set as the index 7, so that the aperture of the lens device 2 can be preset controlled from the body 4 side. In this state, this camera device is in a state where AE photography with shutter speed priority is possible, and when the dial 34 is turned now, the first display section 24
The shutter speed displayed at 4 changes according to the rotation of the dial 340. Note that the display of the shutter speed at this time is as shown in FIGS. A desired shutter speed can be selected and set by rotating the shutter. At the same time, an arithmetic circuit (not shown) determines whether the upper surface of the body 4 is properly exposed or overexposed or underexposed by the number of steps desired by the photographer, based on object brightness information (or illuminance information) corresponding to the brightness of the object. ASA sensitivity setting dial 4 provided in
The aperture value necessary to obtain the appropriate exposure (which is set by selecting (→ or ←) on the scale 42 at 0, hereinafter referred to as appropriate exposure) is calculated, and the aperture value is displayed on the second display section 250. is displayed as shown in FIG. 10(a)-(1). Therefore, the photographer can know the aperture value calculated for the speed set by himself/herself before releasing the shutter. If the shutter is released in this state, the camera device will stop down the lens device 2 to the calculated aperture value and release the shutter at the set shutter speed.

Note that the aperture, or aperture, of the photographic lens device 2 used has an upper and lower limit, and if the aperture of the lens calculated for the set shutter speed is larger than the maximum aperture of the photographic lens device 2, that is, the object When the brightness is low, aperture control using the calculated aperture value is impossible. In such a case,
In order to inform the photographer of this, the second display section 250 displays a photographing lens 2 corresponding to the maximum aperture that is capable of aperture control.
The aperture value, that is, the maximum aperture value, is displayed blinking. In addition,
The maximum controllable aperture of the photographic lens 2, ie, the maximum aperture value, is input from the opening pin 90 of the lens device 2 through the opening input bin 96 on the body 4 side.

Furthermore, if the aperture of the lens calculated for the shutter speed set by the dial 34 is smaller than the minimum aperture of the photographic lens device 2, that is, if the brightness of the subject is high, the aperture at the calculated aperture value is Control is impossible. In such a case, in order to notify the photographer of this, the second display section 250 flashes the aperture value of the photographing lens 2 corresponding to the minimum aperture that allows aperture control, that is, the maximum aperture value. Note that the controllable minimum aperture of the photographic lens device 2, that is, the maximum aperture value, is taken in from the minimum aperture pin 91 of the lens device 2 through the minimum aperture input bin 97 on the body 4 side.

Note that even if the subject brightness is too low or too high for the set shutter speed and the second display section 250 flashes the open aperture value or the maximum aperture value to issue a warning. , shutter release is possible, and in this case, the aperture value is controlled according to the value blinking on the second display section 250.

Further, when performing aperture-priority AE photography next time, the mode changeover switch 38 on the top surface of the body 4 is set to the aperture-priority mode side, and the aperture value can be set and input by rotating the dial 34.

Also, the mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side
is set as the index 7, so that the aperture of the lens device 2 can be preset controlled to the aperture value set by the dial 34 on the body 4 side. In this state, this camera device is in a state where aperture-priority AE photography is possible, and if the dial 34 is now rotated, the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 will change according to the rotation of the dial 340. It changes accordingly. The display of the aperture value at this time is shown in Fig. 10 (a) - (II
), the photographer uses the second display section 25.
A desired aperture value can be selected and set by rotating the dial 34 while looking at the aperture value displayed at 0. At the same time, an arithmetic circuit (not shown) generates object brightness information (or illuminance information) σ corresponding to the brightness of the object.
Based on this, the shutter speed necessary to obtain proper exposure is calculated, and a message shown in FIG. 10(a) is displayed on the first display section 244.
It is displayed as shown in (U). Therefore, the photographer can know the shutter speed calculated for the aperture value he or she has set before releasing the shutter. If the shutter is released in this state, the camera device will stop down the lens device 2 to the set aperture value and release the shutter at the calculated shutter speed.

Note that the aperture, or diameter, of the photographic lens device 2 used has an upper and lower limit, and if the aperture of the lens set by the dial 34 on the body 4 side is larger than the maximum aperture of the photographic lens device 2, the setting It is impossible to control the aperture at the aperture value set.

In such a case, the aperture value was set incorrectly.
Although some kind of countermeasure is required, in this embodiment, such erroneous settings are treated as if the aperture value of the maximum aperture of the photographing lens, that is, the aperture value at the maximum aperture value has been set. For example, the maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 is F number "1.
Although it is 8", the dial 34 on the body 4 side
If you set the aperture value to 1.4" in F number, the camera equipment actually treats the set aperture value as 1.8" in F number, and adjusts the shutter speed based on this value. At this time, the display in the viewfinder shows the aperture value and shutter speed, which are used to control the actual exposure, regardless of the setting value of the dial 34, as shown in Figure 1θ (e)-(1). Ru.

Conversely, if the lens aperture set by the dial 34 on the body 4 side is smaller than the minimum aperture of the photographic lens device 2, aperture control using the set aperture value is impossible. In such a case, the aperture value has been set incorrectly, and some countermeasure is required. It is treated as if the aperture value of the aperture, that is, the maximum aperture value has been set. For example, the maximum aperture value of lens device 2 is F number 16''.
If you do not struggle with this and set the aperture value to 22" in F number using the dial 34 on the side of body 4, the actual aperture value in the camera device will be the same as that set to 16" in F number. The shutter speed is calculated based on this value. At this time, the aperture value and shutter speed used to control the actual exposure are displayed in the viewfinder, as shown in FIGS. 10(e)-(■), regardless of the setting value of the dial 34.

Furthermore, there are upper and lower limits to the shutter speed that can be controlled by the camera body 4, and if the shutter speed calculated for the set aperture value is slower than the shutter speed that can be controlled by the body 4, that is, the subject brightness is If it is low, it is impossible to control the shutter at the calculated shutter speed. In such a case, in order to inform the photographer of this, the first display section 244 flashes a shutter speed corresponding to the longest time that shutter control is possible.

Also, if the aperture value set by the dial 34 is used, the aperture value is calculated. If the shutter speed is faster than the shutter speed that can be controlled by the body 4, that is, if the subject brightness is high, it is impossible to control the shutter at the calculated shutter speed. In such a case, it is impossible to control the shutter speed using the calculated shutter speed. In such a case, in order to notify the photographer of this, the first display section 244 blinks and displays the fastest shutter speed at which shutter control is possible.

Note that even if the subject brightness is too low or too high for the set aperture value and the longest shutter speed or fastest shutter speed is blinking on the first display section 244 and a warning is issued. , shutter release is possible, in which case the shutter speed is controlled according to the value blinking on the first display section 244.

The camera device shown in Figure 1 is mainly a shutter speed priority AE system.
The main focus is on use in the two modes mentioned above, shooting or aperture-priority AE shooting, but in normal photography, most of the shooting is done in the two modes mentioned above. It seems possible to satisfy the requirements of

However, the lens device 2 is not always used by aligning the mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 with the index 7, and sometimes it is necessary to align the aperture display 9 on the ring 8 with the index 7. There is a possibility that it will be done. In such a case, the camera device enters an open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode. At this time, the mode and dial 34 are used to preferentially set the shutter speed using the dial 34 depending on the setting position of the mode selector 38, and then manually set the aperture value on the lens device 2 side.
There are two possible modes: setting the aperture value preferentially in , and then manually setting the same aperture value on the lens device 2 side.

Now, when the mode selector 38 is set to the shutter speed priority side, the dial 34 will be used as a dial for setting the shutter speed, and by rotating this dial 34, the desired shutter speed can be set. You can select and set. The selected shutter speed is displayed on the first display section 244 as shown in FIG. The aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 necessary to obtain proper exposure is calculated based on the set shutter speed, etc., and
It is displayed on the second display section 250 as shown in I). Note that at this time, the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 is not controlled from the body 4 side, but is controlled by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side. 9, the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 is set as the index 7.
By adjusting the precera l-- on the lens device 2 side,
be done. In this way, in order to inform the photographer that the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 needs to be manually set on the lens device 2 side, the third display section 252 in the finder is displayed. The character “M” is displayed. Also, if the mode
When the selector 38 is set to the aperture priority side, the dial 34 is used as a dial for setting the aperture value, and by rotating this dial 34, an arbitrary aperture value is selected. Can be set.

The selected aperture value is shown in Fig. 10 (a) - (I
[[] is displayed on the second display section 250 as shown in parentheses. On the other hand, the camera device calculates the shutter speed necessary to obtain proper exposure based on the subject brightness information measured through the lens device 2, the set aperture value, etc.
(I[[) is displayed on the second display section 244 as shown in parentheses. Note that at this time, the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 is not controlled from the body 4 side, but is controlled by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side, and the aperture value display 9 above it is controlled by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side. Among them, the aperture value that is the same as the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250, that is, the aperture value set using the dial 34.
By matching the value with index 7, it is preset on the lens device 2 side. In this way, the third display section 252 in the viewfinder is used to inform the photographer that the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 needs to be manually set on the lens device 2 side. The letter “M” is displayed.

As described above, by setting the shutter speed or aperture value with the dial 34 and manually presetting the aperture value on the lens device 2 side according to the display on the second display section 250 in the viewfinder, At the time of shutter release, the lens device 2 is stopped down to a manually preset position, and the shutter is released on the body 4 at the shutter speed set by the dial 34 or the shutter speed determined as a result of calculation, resulting in proper exposure. It is possible to take pictures of

Note that even in this wide-open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, especially when the mode selector 38 is set to the aperture priority side, the aperture value set with the dial 34 and the aperture value set on the lens device 2 side are different. By setting the value in advance so that it always matches the value,
This camera device performs an aperture-priority AE photographing operation. That is, since aperture priority AE photography is controlled by calculating the exposure time for a set aperture value, when presetting the lens device 2 for a preset aperture value, it is necessary to This is because the operation of the system is the same whether it is performed from the body 4 side or from the lens device side.

However, in this case, since the aperture value must be set on both the body 4 and the lens device 2, it is unavoidable that operability is significantly impaired.

In addition, in the aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, the aperture value calculated for the set shutter speed is smaller than the aperture value of the lens device 2, and is larger than the maximum aperture value. However, in that case, it is assumed that the value cannot be set, and a warning is given by flashing the open aperture value display or the maximum aperture value display to let the photographer know. .

In addition, in this mode, the shutter speed calculated for the set aperture value was smaller than the minimum shutter speed (low speed) that can be controlled by the body tip 4, and the maximum shutter speed (high speed) ) It is possible that the value is larger than 1), but in that case, the minimum shutter speed display or maximum shutter speed display should be blinked to let the photographer know that the value is uncontrollable. Give a warning.

Furthermore, in this mode, especially mode selector 3
8 is set to the aperture priority side, the range of aperture values that can be set with the dial 34 and the range of aperture values that can be set on the lens device 2 side are naturally the same.

In other words, there is an upper limit and a lower limit for the aperture, that is, the aperture of the photographic lens device 2 used, and if the aperture of the lens set by the dial 34 on the body 4 side is larger than the maximum aperture of the photographic lens device 2, It is impossible to control the aperture using the set aperture value.

In such a case, the aperture value was set incorrectly.
Although some kind of countermeasure is required, in this embodiment, such erroneous settings are treated as if the aperture value of the maximum diameter of the photographing lens, that is, the aperture value at the maximum aperture value has been set.

This matter is exactly the same as in the aperture priority AE shooting mode.

Conversely, if the aperture of the lens set by the dial 34 on the body 4 side is smaller than the minimum aperture of the photographic lens device 2, it is impossible to control the aperture at the set aperture value. In such a case, the aperture value has been set incorrectly, and some countermeasure is required. However, in this example, in order to prevent such incorrect setting, value,
In other words, it is treated as if the maximum aperture value has been set. This matter is exactly the same as in the aperture priority AE shooting mode.

The above-mentioned shutter speed priority, aperture priority AE shooting and aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting modes all perform only aperture metering, and therefore the viewfinder's focusing and
There is a problem in that the screen 234 makes it impossible to check the effect of the aperture, especially the depth of field effect of the shutter release.

In particular, during AB photography, the aperture value displayed on the second display in the viewfinder is preset after the shutter is released. Therefore, it is not possible to check the narrowing down. As is clear from the explanation of FIG. 2, when the aperture setting/g8 on the lens device 2 side is set to mark black for AE photography, operating the aperture reduction lever 64 charges the AE. This is because the aperture control from the body 4 side to the lens device 2 side becomes impossible as the aperture adjustment lever 64 is locked. It is made so that it cannot be operated.

On the other hand, in the case of the open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, the lens device 2
It is possible to aperture the lens device 2 to the aperture position preset with the aperture setting ring 8 on the side. Through this operation, the photographer can know the state of the image when the lens device 2 is stopped down to the set position through the focusing screen 7234. By the way, depending on the aperture operation at this time, the camera device switches from open metering to aperture metering operation, and the control operation of the camera device differs depending on whether the mode selector switch 38 has selected shutter priority or aperture priority. It's coming. If the mode changeover switch 38 is set to the aperture priority side, the camera device will not be in the aperture priority AE shooting mode with aperture metering.
When the switch 38 is set to the shutter speed priority side, the camera device enters the aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode.

Now, to explain the aperture metering number-priority AE photography, the lens device 2 is always in a closed state, and the aperture value changes depending on the setting position of the aperture setting ring 8. On the other hand, whatever aperture value is set on the dial 34 at this time, it is ignored. At this time, in the body 4, brightness metering is performed through the lens device 2, which has been stopped down to the position set by the aperture setting/gage 8, and takes into account the aperture value of the upper subject. The shutter speed is calculated as follows. The shutter speed calculated in this manner is displayed on the first display section in the viewfinder as shown in FIG. 10(a)-(b).

After the above operations, when the shutter is released, the lens device 2 maintains the aperture value in the stopped-down state.
In the body 4, the result of the calculation is obtained and displayed on the first display section 244.
The shirt's edge is cut off according to the shutter speed displayed, allowing you to take pictures with proper exposure.

Even in this mode, if the shutter speed calculated as a result of stop-down photometry is slower than the shutter speed that can be controlled by the body 4, it is impossible to control the shutter at the calculated shutter speed. In such a case, in order to inform the photographer of this, the first display section 244 flashes a shutter speed corresponding to the longest time that shutter control is possible.

Further, if the shutter speed calculated as a result of aperture-down photometry is faster than the shutter speed that can be controlled by the body 4, it is impossible to control the shutter at the calculated shutter speed. In such cases, the first step is to inform the photographer of the situation.
The fastest shutter speed at which shutter control is possible is displayed blinking on the display section.

In this mode, the 20th
The aperture p value is not displayed on the display section 250. This is because, as described in the explanation of FIG. 2, the body 4 is not provided with means for taking in the aperture value set by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side.

Next, to explain about aperture metering manual exposure control photography, the lens device 2 is always in a stopped-down state, and the aperture value changes depending on the setting position of the aperture setting/gage 8.

On the other hand, the shutter speed is set using the dial 34 at this time, and the set shutter speed is displayed on the first display section 244 in the viewfinder. At this time, body 4
Then, the aperture is adjusted to the position set by the aperture setting/g8, and the brightness is measured through the aperture setting device 2, taking into account the aperture value of the subject. It is determined whether or not proper exposure can be obtained. If it is determined that the combination of aperture, force value, and shutter speed at this time will result in a proper exposure or an exposure amount within a certain allowable range for the proper exposure, then
As shown in V), "00" is displayed on the second display section 250, informing the photographer that the appropriate exposure or allowable exposure amount can be obtained with the currently set aperture value and shutter speed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the currently set combination of aperture value and shutter speed is underexposed for the proper exposure or allowable exposure amount, the second display section 250 will display the first
As shown in Figure 0 (a)-ff), a flashing "OP" message is displayed, informing the photographer that the set aperture value and shutter speed are underexposed compared to the appropriate exposure.

In contrast, the photographer operates the aperture setting ring 8,
By resetting the aperture of the photographic lens device 2 to a larger aperture side, or by operating the dial 34 and resetting the shutter speed to a lower speed side, the correction of the set exposure can be made on the second display section 250. By repeating the process until the "oo" display indicating proper exposure is found, it is possible to set the aperture or shutter speed necessary to obtain the proper exposure or allowable exposure amount.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the currently set combination of aperture value and shutter speed is overexposed compared to the appropriate exposure or allowable exposure amount, the second display section 250 will display the first
As shown in Figure 0 (a)-ff), a blinking "cL" is displayed, informing the photographer that the aperture value and shutter speed set are correct or overexposed compared to the allowable exposure amount. . In response, the photographer operates the aperture setting ring 8 to reset the aperture of the photographic lens device 2 to a smaller diameter side, or operates the dial 34 to change the shutter speed to a higher speed side. By resetting the set exposure and correcting the set exposure until 00'' is displayed on the second display section 250, which indicates the appropriate exposure, the aperture or aperture necessary to obtain the appropriate exposure or allowable exposure amount can be adjusted. You can set the shutter speed.

In this aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, the third display section 252 in the viewfinder displays "M" indicating the manual mode.

When the shutter is released after the above operations, the lens device 2 maintains the aperture value in the closed state, and the shutter is released at the shutter speed set by the dial 34 in the body 4, which is appropriate. It is possible to take pictures with exposure.

Next, when the mode selector switch 38 is switched to the shutter speed priority mode, the pulp mode can be selected using the dial 34. When this dial 34 is set to pulp, the shutter remains open as long as the shutter release button 18 is pressed, so the shutter speed follows the operator's will, but in most cases pulp It is used for long exposures.

Now, when performing bulb photography, if you set the pulp using the dial 34 and align the mark 12 with the index 7 using the aperture setting switch 8 on the lens device 2 side, the shutter speed will not be set. Since there is no aperture value, it is not possible to calculate the aperture value that should be controlled.0 Therefore, it is desirable to manually set the aperture value to some value, but in this example, especially when the aperture value is not set. focuses on the fact that pulp is generally used on the low brightness side, and is configured to control the aperture value to an open aperture value. At this time, the first display section 244 in the viewfinder displays "buLb", and the second display section 250 displays the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 in use, as shown in FIG. b) to (I).

On the other hand, when performing pulp photography, when the pulp is set using the dial 34 and the aperture value is set on the lens device 2 side according to the aperture value display 9 on the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side. , the camera device is in completely manual mode. At this time, the display in the finder is shown in Figure 10 (b).
- As shown in (I[), ' bu
"Lb" is displayed, and "Ml+" is displayed on the third display section 252.
will be displayed.

At this time, the aperture value set on the lens device 2 side is not displayed on the second display section 250, as has been stated many times before, but the aperture value set on the lens device 2 side is not displayed. This is because the body 4 side does not have a means for inserting the 9.

Next, strobe photography will be described. This camera device, especially the camera system of this embodiment, mainly adopts a configuration to which the strobe shown in FIG. 5 is applied.
Automatic exposure control photography using a strobe is possible.

As mentioned above, the strobe shown in FIG.
The synchro contact 138, the control signal contact 140, and the data signal contact 142 are connected to the synchro contact 52, the control terminal 54, and the data terminal 56 on the body 4 side. In terms of this, it is necessary to consider two cases: use in automatic light control mode and use in full emission mode.

The automatic light control mode is selected when a desired aperture value is set using the aperture setting dial 108, and provides an appropriate amount of exposure to the film surface at the set aperture value. As mentioned above, the light emitting section 102 emits a flash of light, and the light detecting section 104 detects the reflected light from the subject to dim the flash emitted from the light emitting section 102, as described above. Although it is common sense,
At this time, the aperture value set by the aperture setting dial 108 is given to the body 4 side as an analog signal from the data signal contact 142 through the data terminal 56.

On the other hand, the full flash mode is selected when the mark "M" is set without setting the aperture value using the aperture setting dial 108, and the flash emitted from the light emitting unit 102 is not controlled in any way. The full amount of light that this strobe is capable of is emitted without being overloaded.

Ru. Note that at this time, the fact that the strobe is in the full emission mode is given to the body 4 from the data signal contact 142 through the data terminal 56 by an analog signal at a predetermined level.

It should be noted that this strobe device provides a signal to the camera device body 4 to control the shutter speed whether it is in the automatic light control mode or the full flash mode. This was designed in response to the fact that currently known focal plane shutters cannot synchronize the strobe at shutter speeds of 1/60th to 125th of a second or higher. As mentioned above, this control is applied in two ways, fully automatic or semi-automatic, which can be freely selected. This switching between fully automatic and semi-automatic is performed by selecting the selector switch 146. If the fully automatic method is currently selected, what shutter speed is selected using the dial 34 of the body 4? However, at the same time as the charging of the strobe is completed, the control signal contact 140 is sent from the strobe side.
When a charging completion signal is input as a first level analog signal through the control terminal 54, the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN is set as the shutter speed on the body 4 side, and the semi-automatic method is selected, the dial 34 on the body 4
Only when a shutter speed equal to or higher than the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN is selected by
The shutter speed of the body 4 is automatically set to the strobe synchronization speed TS in response to a charge completion signal given as a second level analog signal input through the control terminal 54, and The shutter speed that was set below the strobe synchronization speed TS is used as the shutter speed for control.

Furthermore, regardless of whether the strobe switch 146 is set to fully automatic mode or semi-automatic mode, if pulp is set using the dial 34 on the body 4 side, the pulp will have the highest priority. The shutter of the camera device will be pulp controlled.

On the other hand, no matter how the camera device body 4 and strobe are set, the operation of the camera device will differ greatly depending on the position of the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens/lens device 2 side. I'm coming. This depends on whether the mark 12 is selected to point to the index 7 by the aperture setting ring 8 or not.

Note that when a charging completion signal is input from the strobe side to the body 4 during flash photography, the first display section 2 in the viewfinder
In the lower two digits of 44, "bdEF" is displayed to inform the photographer that charging is complete and the strobe can fire. This display is as shown in FIG. 10(C).

Various control or operation methods will be enumerated below, but it goes without saying that the various methods described below need to be used appropriately depending on the purpose of photographing.

First, the flash is in autoflash mode, the shutter is set to fully automatic, the shutter speed is set to seconds using the dial 34, and the aperture setting ring 8 is set. This is the case when mark 12 is selected, but at this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in shutter priority AE shooting mode and ready for AE shooting, but after the strobe is fully charged, When a signal indicating this is applied to the body 4, the camera device switches to fully automatic/automatic light adjustment/automatic strobe photography mode. At this time,
The shutter speed of the body 4 is automatically set to the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN, for example, 1/60th of a second, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is set to the aperture υ value set by the aperture setting dial 108 on the strobe side. Therefore, it will be controlled from the body 4 side. At this time, a display as shown in FIGS. 10(c) to 10(I) will be displayed in the fine chamber, and the first display section 244 will display the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN, for example, 1/60. EF to display the seconds and notify the photographer that the strobe is fully charged.
" is displayed, and the aperture value set on the strobe side is displayed on the second display section 250. Note that if you release the shutter in this state, the strobe will automatically control the flash by itself. The camera device will be controlled with the same shutter speed and aperture value as displayed in the viewfinder.

Second, the flash is in autoflash mode, the shutter is set to fully automatic, and the shutter speed is set to seconds using the dial 34 and the aperture setting ring. 8 is the case where mark 12 is not selected. At this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in the open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode and ready to take pictures, but the flash is not fully charged. When a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device is fully automatic.
Switches to automatic flash/manual flash shooting mode. At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 is automatically set to a strobe synchronized shutter speed, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8.

In addition, at this time, in the finder there is a screen shown in Fig. 10 (c) - (
The first display section 244 displays the strobe synchronization shutter speed and "EF" to notify the photographer that strobe charging is complete.
is displayed, the second display section 250 displays the aperture value set on the flash side, and the third display section 252 displays the aperture value that needs to be adjusted manually using the aperture setting ring 8. "M" is displayed to indicate something. Therefore, the photographer needs to set the aperture value on the lens device 2 side according to the aperture value displayed on the second display section 252 in the viewfinder, that is, the aperture value set on the strobe side. When the shutter is released, the strobe flash automatically adjusts and emits light independently, and the camera device is controlled with the same shutter speed as displayed in the viewfinder and the aperture value manually set on the lens device 2.

Third, the strobe is in automatic light control mode, the shutter is set to fully automatic, and the shutter speed is set to the pulp position by the dial 34, and the shutter speed is set to the pulp position and the aperture setting. This is a case where ring 8 is selected with mark 12. At this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in pulp shooting mode and ready for pulp shooting at the wide open aperture, but when the strobe is When charging is completed and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to pulp, automatic light control, and automatic strobe photography mode. At this time, the shutter speed in the body 4 is set preferentially to maintain the pulp, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is controlled from the body 4 side with the aperture value set by the aperture setting dial 108 on the strobe side. It will be done. In addition, in the case of (g), a display as shown in FIG. b” display and an EF to notify the photographer that the strobe has been fully charged.
" is displayed, and the aperture value set on the strobe side is displayed on the second display section 250. Note that if you release the shutter in this state, the strobe will perform auto-flash control independently. , the camera device is controlled with an arbitrary shutter speed according to the photographer's intention and an aperture value that is the same as that displayed in the viewfinder.

Fourth, the strobe is in automatic flash mode, the shutter is set to fully automatic, and the shutter speed is set to the pulp position by the dial 34, and the aperture setting ring 8 is the case where mark 12 is not selected, but at this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in pulp shooting mode, and pulp shooting is possible at the aperture value set on the lens device 2 side. However, when the strobe is fully charged and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to pulse, flash, automatic light control, and manual flash photography modes. At this time, the shutter speed in the body 4 is set to maintain the pulp preferentially,
The aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8. At this time, the viewfinder displays a display as shown in FIGS. 10(C)-N), and the first display section 244 displays "b11" indicating that pulp photography is being performed. "EF" is displayed to notify the photographer that charging of the strobe is complete, the second display section 250 displays the aperture value set on the strobe side, and the third display section 252 displays the aperture value set on the strobe side. "M" is displayed to indicate that it is necessary to manually adjust the aperture using the aperture setting ring 8.Therefore, the photographer can adjust the aperture value displayed on the second display section 252 in the viewfinder. In other words, it is necessary to set the aperture on the lens device 2 side according to the aperture value set on the strobe side, but if you release the shutter in this state, the strobe will perform autoflash control independently, and the camera device will Any shutter speed and lens device 2 depending on the photographer's will
The aperture value is manually set.

Fifth, the flash is in automatic flash mode, the shutter is set to semi-automatic, the shutter speed is set to seconds using the dial 34, and the aperture setting ring 8 is set. This is the case when mark 12 is selected, but before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in shutter priority AE shooting mode and ready for AE shooting, but after the strobe is fully charged, When a signal indicating this is applied to the body 4, the camera device switches to semi-automatic/automatic light control/automatic strobe photography mode. At this time, if the shutter speed set by the dial 34 of the body 4 is greater than or equal to the strobe synchronization shutter speed TS, the shutter speed of the body 4 is set to the strobe synchronization shutter speed TS. If the speed is below TSYN, the seconds are set using the dial 34, and the aperture of the photographing lens 2 is set using the aperture setting dial 1 on the strobe side.
The aperture value set according to 08 is controlled from the body 4 side. At this time, the first
A display as shown in Figure 0(C)-ff) will be displayed, and the first display section 244 will display the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN or the set shutter speed and notify the photographer that strobe charging has been completed. The second display section 250 displays the aperture value set on the strobe side. Note that when the shutter is released in this state, the strobe automatically performs automatic flash control and the camera device is controlled with the same shutter speed and aperture value as displayed in the viewfinder.

Sixth, the flash is in automatic light control mode, the shutter is set to semi-automatic, the shutter speed is set to seconds using the dial 34, and the aperture setting ring 8 This is the case when mark 12 is not selected. At this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in the open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode and ready to take pictures, but when the strobe is fully charged When a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device semi-automatically
Switches to automatic flash/manual flash shooting mode. At this time, the shutter speed for body 4 is
If the shutter speed set by the dial 34 is greater than or equal to the strobe synchronization shutter speed, the shutter speed is set to the strobe synchronization shutter speed, and if it is less than or equal to the strobe synchronization shutter speed, the shutter speed is set to the seconds set by the dial 34, and the photographing lens 2 is set to the flash synchronization shutter speed. The aperture is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8.

In addition, at this time, in the finder, there are
) will be displayed, and the first display section 2
44 displays the strobe synchronized shutter speed TS" or the set shutter speed, and displays "EF" to notify the photographer that strobe charging is complete.
The display section 250 displays the aperture value set on the flash side, and the third display section 252 displays "M11" indicating that the aperture needs to be adjusted manually using the aperture setting ring 8.
A display is made. Therefore, the photographer must use the second
It is necessary to set the aperture on the lens device 2 side according to the aperture value displayed on the display section 252, that is, the aperture value set on the strobe side, but if you perform the shutter release in this state, the strobe performs automatic light control and light emission independently, and the camera device is controlled with the same shutter speed as displayed in the viewfinder and the aperture value manually set on the lens device 2.

Seventh, the strobe is in automatic light control mode, the shutter is set to semi-automatic, the shutter speed is set to pulp position by the dial 34, and the aperture setting ring 8 is the case where mark 12 is selected. At this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in pulp shooting mode and ready for pulp shooting at the maximum aperture value, but when the strobe is When charging is completed and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to pulp, automatic light control, and automatic strobe photography mode. At this time, the shutter speed in the body 4 is set preferentially to maintain the pulp, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is controlled from the body 4 side with the aperture value set by the aperture setting dial 108 on the strobe side. This will result in At this time, a display as shown in FIGS. 10(C)-(4) will be displayed in the viewfinder, and the first display section 244 will display "b" indicating that pulp photography is being performed. "EF" is displayed to notify the photographer that charging of the strobe is complete, and the aperture value set on the strobe side is also displayed on the second display section 250. When the shutter is released, the strobe flash automatically adjusts and emits light by itself, and the camera device is controlled at an arbitrary shutter speed and aperture value that is the same as that displayed in the viewfinder, depending on the photographer's intention.

Eighth, the strobe is in automatic dimming mode, the shutter is set to semi-automatic, and the shutter speed is set by the pulp position by the dial 34 and the aperture setting ring. 8 does not select mark 12, but at this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in pulp shooting mode, and pulp shooting is possible at the aperture value set on the lens device 2 side. However, when the strobe is fully charged, a signal indicating this is sent to the body 4.
When given, the camera device switches to pulp, autoflash, and manual strobe shooting modes. At this time, the shutter speed in the body 4 is preferentially set to maintain the valve, and the aperture of the photographing lens 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8. At this time, a display as shown in FIG. 10(C)-1 will be displayed in the viewfinder, and the first display section 244 will indicate that bulb photography is being performed.
bI+ display and "EF" to notify the photographer that charging of the strobe is completed, and the second display section 25
0 displays the aperture value set on the strobe side, and the second display section 252 displays "M'° indicating that the aperture needs to be adjusted manually using the aperture setting ring 8. Therefore, the photographer should look at the second display section 25 in the viewfinder.
It is necessary to set the aperture on the lens device 2 side according to the aperture value displayed in 2, that is, the aperture value set on the strobe side. However, if you release the shutter in this state, the strobe will automatically adjust automatically. Light is emitted, and the camera device is controlled by an arbitrary shutter speed and an aperture value manually set in the lens device 2 according to the photographer's intention.

Ninth, the strobe is in full flash mode, the shutter is set in full automatic mode, the shutter speed is set in seconds using the dial 34, and the aperture setting ring 8 This is the case when mark 12 is selected, but at this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in shutter priority AE shooting mode and ready for AE shooting, but after the strobe is fully charged. When a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to a fully automatic, full-power flash, minimum aperture strobe photography mode.

At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 is automatically set to the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN, for example, 1/60th of a second, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is set to the photographic lens device 2 used.
The maximum aperture value will be controlled. At this time, a display as shown in FIGS. 10(d) to (I) will be displayed in the viewfinder, and the first display section 244 will display the strobe synchronized shutter speed, for example, 1/60th of a second. The second display section 250 does not display any display, but this is because the lens device 2 Stopping down the aperture to the maximum aperture value does not necessarily provide proper exposure; rather, it is intended to warn the photographer of an erroneous operation.

When the shutter is released in this state, the strobe emits the full amount of light, and the camera device is controlled at the same shutter speed and maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 as displayed in the viewfinder.

Tenth, the strobe is in full flash mode, the shutter is set to fully automatic mode, and the shutter speed is set to seconds using the dial 34 and the aperture setting ring. 8 is the case where mark 12 is not selected. At this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in the open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode and ready to take pictures, but when the strobe is fully charged When a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to a fully automatic/full flash/manual strobe photography mode. At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 is automatically set to a strobe synchronized shutter speed, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8. In addition, at this time, the viewfinder contains the image shown in Figure 10 (d).
) - (It) will be displayed, and the first display section 244 will display the strobe synchronization shutter speed and "EF" to inform the photographer that strobe charging is complete. "M11" is displayed on the third display section 252, indicating that it is necessary to manually adjust the aperture 9 using the setting ring 8.Therefore, the photographer must adjust the guide and It is necessary to use the number calculation board 106 to determine the aperture value to be set in the lens device 2 based on the distance from the camera device to the subject, and to manually set the aperture using the aperture setting ring 8.

In this state, when the shutter is released, the strobe emits the full amount of light, and the camera device is controlled with the same shutter speed as displayed in the viewfinder and the aperture value manually set in the lens device 2.

11th, the strobe is in full flash mode, the shutter is set to fully automatic -E-)'75E, and the shutter speed is set to the pulp position using the dial 34. , the aperture setting ring 8 is set to mark 12. At this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in the pulp photography mode and is ready for pulp photography at the widest aperture. When the strobe is fully charged and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to pulp/full flash/minimum aperture strobe photography mode.At this time, the shutter speed in the body 4 is preferentially set to pulp. Maintain settings, shoot/
The aperture value of lens 2 is controlled to the maximum aperture value of photographic lens device 2 used. At this time, a display as shown in FIGS. 10(d) to (III) will be displayed in the viewfinder, and "b" indicating bulb exposure will be displayed on the first display section 244. is displayed and EF' is displayed to notify the photographer that charging of the strobe is complete.

In this state, when the shutter is released, the strobe emits the full amount of light, and the camera device is controlled at an arbitrary shutter speed and maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 according to the photographer's intention.

Twelfth, the strobe is in full flash mode, the shutter is set in full automatic mode, and the shutter speed is set to pulp position by dial 34 and aperture setting. /g 8 is the case when mark 12 is not selected, or at this time, the camera device is in pulp shooting mode before the strobe is fully charged, and the bulb is set at the aperture υ value set on the lens device 2 side. Although the camera is in a state where photography is possible, when the strobe is fully charged and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to pulp, full flash, and manual strobe photography modes. At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 is preferentially set to maintain the pulp, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8.

In addition, at this time, in the finder, there is a screen shown in FIG.
A display as shown in [V] will be displayed, and the first display section 244 will display "b" indicating bulb photography and an EF display to notify the photographer that strobe charging is complete. " is displayed, and the third display section 252 displays "M" indicating that it is necessary to manually set the aperture and adjust the aperture using The aperture value to be set in the lens device 2 is determined based on the distance from the camera device to the subject using the guide number calculation board 106, and the aperture value is manually set using the aperture setting ring 8. Required 0 In this state, when the shutter is released, the strobe emits the full amount of light, and the camera device is controlled by an arbitrary shutter speed according to the photographer's intention and an aperture value manually set in the lens device 2. This will result in

Thirteenth, the strobe is in full brightness mode, the shutter is set in semi-automatic mode, the shutter speed is set in seconds using the dial 34, and the aperture setting ring 8 is set. This is the case when mark 12 is selected, but at this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in shutter priority AE shooting mode and ready for AE shooting, but after the strobe is fully charged, When a signal indicating this is applied to the body 4, the camera device switches to semi-automatic/full-power flash/minimum aperture strobe photography mode. At this time, the shutter speed for body 4 is
If the shutter speed set by the dial 34 is higher than the strobe synchronization shutter speed TS'', the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN is set, and if the shutter speed is lower than the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN, the dial 34 is set. The aperture of the photographic lens 2 will be controlled to the maximum aperture of the photographic lens device 2 in use.
dl-ff), and the first display section 244 displays the strobe synchronized shutter speed or the set shutter speed and a message to inform the photographer that strobe charging has been completed. "EF" is displayed.

When the shutter is released in this state, the strobe emits the full amount of light, and the camera device is controlled at the same shutter speed and maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 as displayed in the viewfinder.

14th, 'If the strobe is in full flash mode,
The shutter is set to semi-automatic mode, the shutter speed is set to seconds using the dial 34, and the aperture setting ring 8 is set to mark 12, but this is the case. At this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in the open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode and ready to take pictures, but when the strobe is fully charged and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device is Switches to semi-automatic, full flash, and manual flash shooting modes. At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 will be set to the strobe synchronized shutter speed if the shutter speed set by the dial 34 of the body 4 is higher than the strobe synchronized shutter speed, and will be set to the strobe synchronized shutter speed or lower than the strobe synchronized shutter speed. If the speed is on the low speed side, the seconds are set using the dial 34, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled using the aperture setting ring 8. At this time, a display as shown in FIG. 10(d)-(■) will be displayed in the viewfinder, and the first display section 244 will display the strobe synchronized shutter speed or the set shutter speed. The speed is displayed and "EF" is displayed to inform the photographer that charging of the strobe is completed, and the third display section 252 indicates that it is necessary to manually adjust the aperture using the setting ring 8. ``M'''' is displayed. Therefore, the photographer should
Guide number calculation board 106 attached to the strobe
Therefore, it is necessary to determine the aperture value to be set in the lens device 2 based on the distance from the camera device to the subject, and manually set the aperture generally using the aperture setting ring 8.

When the shutter is released in this state, the strobe emits the full amount of light, and the camera device is controlled with the same shutter speed as displayed in the viewfinder and the aperture value manually set in the lens device 2.

15th, the strobe is in full flash mode °,
A semi-automatic mode is set for the shutter,
Furthermore, the shutter speed is set to the pulp position by the dial 34, and the aperture setting ring 8 is set to mark 12, but at this time, the camera device is in the pulp shooting mode before the strobe is fully charged. However, when the strobe is fully charged and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to the full-flash/minimum aperture strobe shooting mode. At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 is set to maintain pulp preferentially, and the shooting lens 2
The aperture is controlled to the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 used. Note that at this time, the first
The display as shown in Figure 0(d)-(4) will be displayed, and the first display section 244 will display "b++" indicating that the flash photography is being performed, and a message indicating that the strobe charging has been completed. "EF" is displayed to notify the photographer.

In this state, when the shutter is released, the strobe emits the full amount of light, and the camera device is controlled at an arbitrary shutter speed and maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 according to the photographer's intention.

Sixteenth, the strobe is in the full emission mode, the shutter is set in semi-automatic mode, the shutter speed is set to the pulp position by the dial 34, and the aperture setting ring 8 is set. This is a case where mark 12 is not selected, but at this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in pulp shooting mode and ready for pulp shooting at the aperture value set on the lens device 2 side. However, when the strobe is fully charged and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to pulp, full flash, and manual strobe photography modes. At this time, the shutter speed in the body 4 is preferentially set to maintain the bulb, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8. At this time, a display as shown in FIG. 10(d) will be displayed in the viewfinder, and the first display section 244 will display "b" indicating bulb photography. "EF" is displayed to inform the photographer that charging of the lens and robot is completed, and "M" is displayed on the third display section 252 to indicate that the aperture needs to be adjusted manually using the setting ring 8. Therefore, the photographer uses the guide number calculation board 106 attached to the strobe to determine the aperture value to be set on the lens device 2 based on the distance from the camera device to the subject. , it is necessary to manually set the aperture using the aperture setting ring 8.

In this state, when the shutter is released, the Suge Tropo will emit full light, and the camera device will be controlled by the arbitrary shutter speed and aperture value manually set on the lens device 2, depending on the photographer's intention. becomes.

Note that in the above-mentioned strobe shooting mode, if the mode changeover switch 38 on the camera device body 4 side is set to the aperture priority side, the aperture setting value set by the dial 34 is completely ignored, and the aperture value is set on the strobe side. The aperture value is controlled to the set aperture value, the aperture value set by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side, or the maximum aperture value.

Now, when the strobe is in full automatic mode, the shutter speed is automatically set to the strobe synchronized shutter speed, for example, 1/60th of a second, but when the strobe is in semi-automatic mode, the If there is no set shutter speed, there is a risk that it will not be possible to control the shutter speeds below the strobe synchronization shutter speed. Therefore, in principle, each of the modes described above requires that the mode selection switch 38 be set to the shutter speed priority side, but sometimes semi-automatic strobe photography is performed with the mode selection switch 38 set to the aperture priority side. It is also possible that it will be done. Therefore, in order to deal with this problem, the camera of this implementation 9u
In the system, when the mode selector switch 38 is set to the aperture priority side in the strobe shooting mode, the shutter speed is set to semi-automatic mode on the strobe side, regardless of the state of the selector switch 146. It is configured to perform longitudinal control using a so-called fully automatic mode in which the shutter speed is set to a synchronized shutter speed. It is a semi-automatic motor;
This is based on the opinion that it is not used on the aperture priority side since it is considered that it is used when there is any intention whatsoever regarding the shutter speed.

These are the shooting modes for strobe photography explained above.

Figure 11 shows the prisoners in one table. However, although this figure does not specifically mention the case of bulb photography, it is the same if you replace the shutter speed with a loop. Explain about the prevention system 0 Originally, if a camera system was based on a comprehensive and rational system design, it would have to be designed to prevent erroneous operation or malfunction. As far as I know, the most accurate exposure control means that can obtain good photographic images, such as the Nyatsuta device and the aperture device, are mostly composed of mechanical components, and their operation is quite difficult. This is done by a mechanical sequence mechanism with a complicated mechanism.On the other hand, in order to view the camera device as a comprehensive system and apply rational control, extensive electrical control is required. However, due to the complicated mechanisms of this electromechanical interface and camera device, it is extremely difficult to adopt a configuration that completely prevents erroneous operation or malfunction. In contrast, in this example,
If an erroneous operation is performed by the photographer, the system will detect the erroneous operation and notify the photographer of the error.
In order to prevent malfunctions due to erroneous operation, a locking system is used to prevent the shutter release from being performed.

Regarding the camera device applied to this example, what operations are considered to be erroneous operations?
The explanation will be given below according to the logic explanatory diagram of FIG. 11(B).

Note that the erroneous operation described here is caused by the
This is closely related to the operating characteristics of the lever 84 of the lens device 2 and the AE lever 94 on the body 4 side. In other words, when the mark 12 is selected and set with the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side, the lens device 2 side considers it to be equivalent to selecting the maximum aperture value as the aperture value, so the body 4
If no aperture control is performed using the AE lever 94 on the side, the aperture will be unconditionally reduced to the minimum aperture position by the zoom device, making control impossible. Furthermore, when attempting to perform AE photography, if the AE Ray''-94 is not charged, it is impossible to control the aperture 9 of the lens device 2 from the body 4 side. A warning lock is applied to the cases due to malfunction, but these cases are (1), (■), and Tsukuda) shown in Figure 11 (B).
, (IV). But especially (
The condition of I[l) and (V) is that it is the state after film winding is completed by operation of the film winding lever 14. This is because the AE lever 94 is in the AE discharge state unless a special operation is performed before the AE charge is performed by film winding, and this state is not necessarily a malfunction state. Note that the AE charging state cannot exist when the aperture of the lens device 2 is narrowed down by the aperture lever 64, as is clear from the explanation in Fig. 2, so it is blank in Fig. 11 (B). There is.

Incidentally, let us consider in what cases the erroneous operation states shown in FIG. 11(B)-(I) to W) occur.

Now, when the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is set to mark 12, the camera device is in the shutter speed priority or aperture priority AE shooting mode depending on the state of the mode changeover switch, and the Figure 10 (a
) (1) or (...) are displayed. In such a state, even if the photographer actually stops down the lens device 2 to the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 and tries to check the depth of field on the finder screen 234, the AE lever will not work in the AE shooting mode. Due to the structure of the lens 94, it is not possible to narrow down the lens device 2 to the aperture value set or calculated on the body 4 side. Despite these conditions, if we stop down the lens device 2 to <-64, the aperture position set by the mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 will correspond to the minimum aperture aperture position of this lens device 2. Therefore, the lens device 2 is narrowed down to the minimum aperture diaphragm position. This state corresponds to the states shown in FIGS. 11(B)-(I) and (U), and clearly results in an erroneous operation. However, in this embodiment, as mentioned earlier, the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is mark 12''
f: When selected, the operation of the aperture lever 64 is restricted, so that such a situation is prevented from occurring. On the other hand, in order to confirm the depth of field, the photographer first cancels the selection of the mark 12 by the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2, and manually sets the aperture value to the lens device 2. There is no problem with setting the aperture on the side and then operating the aperture lever 64 to aperture the lens device 2 to the set position. At this time, the camera device is in the aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode or the aperture aperture metering mode. The priority AE shooting mode is activated, allowing you to check the depth of field.

In this state, as is clear from the explanation in FIG. 2, the AE lever 94 is in the AE discharge state. In the case, the 11th
The state shown in Figure (B) - (1) or (II) is shown, but as mentioned earlier, this is clearly an erroneous operation, and in the viewfinder there is a message "EEEE EE" as shown in Figure 10 (f).
A flashing display indicating a warning lock will be displayed, and the release will be locked so that the shutter release cannot be performed.

Furthermore, if the photographer cancels the aperture of the lens device 2 by pressing the aperture release button 66 from the state of FIG. 11(B)-(1) or (II),
Tsukuda), as shown in [V], AE-94 is AE dis-
The device returned to the AE shooting mode with the battery still charged, and this was also an error in that AE shooting was not possible.
A blinking display indicating a warning lock of "EE" is displayed, and the shutter is locked so that the shutter release cannot be performed.

In the states of FIGS. 11(B)-(r) and (U), the photographer who received a warning of an erroneous operation as shown in FIG. 10(f) releases the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 from the mark 12. By doing so, it is possible to perform aperture metering manual exposure adjustment 1 photography or aperture priority AE photography with aperture metering, and by opening the lens device 2 using the aperture release button 66, it is possible to perform open metering manual exposure adjustment photography. is also possible. Further, from this state, when setting the mark 12 with the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2, the result is shown in FIG. 11(B) -@
), as shown in (IV), the warning is locked again, but
This warning lock can be released by the following method.

In the state shown in FIG. 11(B)-(III), fv)(7), the photographer who received a warning of an erroneous operation as shown in FIG. 10(f)K releases the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 from the mark 12. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform wide-open metering and manual exposure adjustment photography. Alternatively, by operating the film advance lever 14 while holding down the multiple exposure button 16 provided on the top surface of the body 4, the AE lever 94 is recharged, and the AE with shutter priority or aperture priority is activated. It is also possible to take pictures.

・In addition, it is judged as a malfunction only when the film winding is completed, and when the film winding is not completed, the shutter priority or aperture priority is set to A.
Although it is treated as E shooting mode, Fig. 11 (B)
- Conditions (I) and (II) are determined to be malfunctions regardless of whether film winding is completed or not.

As mentioned above, in the camera system of this embodiment, there is a gap between the mechanical configuration or the traditional lens device configuration and the various control mechanisms introduced for new improvements and functional enhancements. We are actively trying to improve performance and widening the scope of the various constraints that occur, and in the event of unavoidable erroneous operations or malfunctions, we will issue a warning in the viewfinder and take pictures. In addition to notifying the person concerned, the shutter mechanism is also locked to prevent photographing.

Next, specific configurations provided to the first illustrated camera device for realizing various performances will be described in detail.

Conventionally known camera devices are equipped with an aperture control mechanism that determines the aperture of the lens device and a shutter mechanism that determines the exposure time for the film surface.
Traditionally, and in the future, it is believed that a configuration including a mechanical control mechanism will be common. However, in recent years, configurations in which electrical control mechanisms are added to various control mechanisms constituting camera systems have been proposed and realized. Most of these configurations with electrical mechanisms are concentrated in the exposure control mechanism including the photometry system of the camera device, but this is because the general photometry system relies on the light guide conversion function to Since information such as brightness is input into the camera system as an electrical signal, it is necessary to have an interface between electricity and machinery in order to perform automatic exposure control.
This is because it is necessary to pass through the face.

A simple mechanism is sufficient for such an interface to perform a single function in a camera system, and the specific configuration has been known for a long time.
As the functions required for camera systems increase,
Their configurations also tend to become more complex. In contrast, many currently known camera systems apply relatively simple analog electrical control systems, but these simply rely on either shutter speed priority or aperture priority. This is because only a configuration that fulfills the function is adopted, so it can be realized with a relatively simple and economical circuit configuration.

However, a configuration that has both shutter speed priority and aperture priority functions as well as various discrimination and judgment functions, such as the camera system of the above embodiment, is expected to be a considerably complicated configuration, but especially Applying a purely analog electrical circuit to such a configuration not only poses problems in terms of accuracy, but also complicates the configuration, leading to poor economic efficiency and an increase in the size of the device, so it is not a preferable solution. I can't say that.

On the other hand, one possibility is to configure most of the control circuits with digital electrical circuits that can be integrated, but this would be useful for cameras with various functions, such as the camera system shown in Figure 1. This can be said to be an extremely rational method for realizing the device. This digital electric circuit is easier to design than analog electric circuits, and can easily realize various control modes9, as well as being able to respond immediately to changes in specifications.・
The present invention is extremely suitable for application to equipment having various discrimination/judgment functions, measurement, and display functions, such as systems.

Therefore, the control system applied to the camera system of this embodiment is mostly composed of digital electric circuits, and is intended to improve reliability and economical efficiency.

Before explaining the system by which the camera device shown in the first diagram operates, it is important to understand how the camera device shown in the first diagram receives inputs regarding photometry data, setting data, operating conditions, operating states, etc. I will explain how this is done through. Considering the input of such various information is relatively important when constructing a digital system, especially when various mechanical operating parts are compactly housed in a small space, such as a camera system. This is a major issue that must be taken into consideration in the system.

The camera device basically performs TTL photometry, and a photoelectric conversion element such as a CdS or silicon light-receiving element is used as a light-receiving element. The output of the photoelectric conversion element is an analog signal, which is then logarithmically compressed, that is, apex value converted, and then converted into digital information through an AD converter. The information obtained from such a photometry system is expressed as an apex value in the case of open photometry, BVo,
If the case of aperture metering is B V s, then BVo = BV - AVo - AVc (8) BVs
= BV-AV-AVc' (4) In the above formula, AVo is the open aperture value of the lens device 2,
AV corresponds to the actual aperture value depending on the aperture reduction, A V c corresponds to the bending error when the lens device 2 is opened, and AVc' corresponds to the bending error when the lens device 2 is stopped down. Note that the above-mentioned errors AVc and AVc' are for the photographing lens device 2 during photometry.
It is necessary to calculate it based on the aperture value of Regarding the bending error, it is impossible to calculate it because there is no means for inputting the actual aperture value from the lens device 2 side to the body 4 side. Therefore, in the camera system of this embodiment, the bending error at the time of stopping down is ignored, and it is assumed that BVs = BV - AV (5).

As is clear from the above description, the data obtained from the photometry system is data regarding the subject brightness expressed by the above equations (3) to (5).

Note that the data is later converted into 8-bit digital data through an A-D converter, and the least significant bit of this digital data has a weight of l''/8''.
The most significant bit is binary data with a weight of "16". That is, the photometric data is converted into digital data with an accuracy of h steps using the apex value.

For TTL photometry, a well-known circuit that logarithmically compresses an analog voltage signal proportional to the amount of received light, converts it into an analog signal corresponding to an apex value, and outputs the analog signal is applied.

Also, as mentioned before, this camera device has a body 4.
An ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 for photographic film is provided on the top surface. This ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 is used to set the ASA sensitivity of the film to be used, and the current tendency of commercially available films is that the ASA sensitivity is set in increments of apex values. . Therefore, depending on this ASA sensitivity setting dial 40, the film sensitivity is ASA16.20.25.32.40.50.64.
．． 80.100.125.160.200.250.3
20.400.500.640, 800, . . . , the apex values are input and set with T step precision. However, of course, the film sensitivity data set by this ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 will also be taken in as a digital value, but it is impossible to input a value equivalent to 1 in decimal in binary code. It is possible. On the other hand, it is possible to use a binary value code, but since all other data in this camera system is a binary value with a higher precision value, there is a difference between it and other data. Matching for digital operations cannot be achieved, and it becomes necessary to perform complex arithmetic operations including multiplication or division. On the other hand, if the arithmetic results for actual control are obtained as binary values with a precision of one step, such complicated arithmetic operations become meaningless.

Therefore, this camera system method is adopted.

1"2" That is, 11 days are each l 1 1- ■+70N-0.375 ・・・・・・・・・・・・
・・・ (6) 2 1 1 completion + 110 − H = 0.625 ・・・・・・・・・・・・
...(7) can be approximated by the i-stage stacking degree, but the error that occurs is ±0.042 stages, which is not sufficiently permissible compared to the official one, that is, 0.125 stages. This is the error range obtained. Therefore, the film sensitivity set by the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 is directly input as a binary value code of i-stage loading.In this camera system, the film sensitivity is 7-bit. This digital data is treated as digital data, but the lowest focus has a weight of "1" and the most significant bit has a weight of "1".
It is binary data with a weight of 8". Of course, this binary data has a one-step accuracy as shown in the equation (6). Therefore, the data regarding the 7-bit film sensitivity In inputting, especially if "1" is set to G, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which "1, ' is set to that bit later without looking at the bit with the weight of T, so this embodiment In the camera system of
The structure is such that it is converted into bit data.

FIG. 12 shows a specific configuration for inputting digital data regarding film sensitivity from the ASA sensitivity setting dial 4o. The dial rotation position is configured such that digital data corresponding to the dial rotation position can be obtained from the digital data setting plate 254 that is rotated. The digital data setting board 254 has an insulating base 25
A plurality of concentric conductive rings 256 corresponding to each bit of film sensitivity setting data are provided on the data setting plate 2.
a common ring 258 in electrical communication with all of the conductive rings 256 through 54 radially extending conductors 262;
It is made up of the following. Note that the common ring 258 is always in contact with the brush 260;
0 is connected to the power supply Vcc through a resistor 261 and also to an inverter 263. Note that between each of the conductive rings 256 is a data trunk corresponding to each bit of film sensitivity setting data, and six brushes 264 corresponding to each bit of data are in contact with each track. The track has a brush 264 and a brush 264 corresponding to each focus of the digital value of the setting data, which has a weight of 2'', corresponding to each setting position of the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40, which is set for every i step of the film sensitivity f. In order to establish electrical contact between the conductive rings 256, a conductive portion 266 extending in the radial direction from the conductive ring 256 is disposed at a portion facing each of the brushes 264.

As will be explained in more detail below, this camera system is controlled by 48 timing pulses. Such timing pulses are shown in FIG.
It is 7. This is no exception in the case of taking in film sensitivity data, and six timing pulses TBI to TB6 shown in FIG. 13 are used to input various setting data or setting conditions.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 12, the timing pulse TBI is connected to each brush 264 through a diode 265.
~TB6t- is applied, but in this configuration, the brush 2 to which the timing pulse is applied
64 is not in contact with the conductive part 266, the power supply Vcc
is applied to the inverter 263 through the resistor 261, so the inverter 263 outputs a low level, and when the brush 264 is in contact with the four conductive parts 266, the input to the inverter 2630 is connected to the four electric rings 256, the brush 26
4. Since it is pulled to a low level through the diode 265, the inverter 263i performs a high level output.

That is, a six-digit digital value corresponding to the apex value of the ASA sensitivity set by the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 is output from the inverter 263 as the timing pulse T.
The bits are sequentially output from the lower digit bits in synchronization with BI to TB6. The data of this 6-bit, °゛1''1'' bit is the data related to the lower 2 bits and 1, and as mentioned earlier, the lower 1 bit, ``1'', and 1'' are either ``1'' or 1 of the 2 bits. If it is set, the lower bit with the weight of ■ is set to 1", and the result is converted into 7-bit data including approximate data of λ" or "yo". As described above, the data Sv (apex value) regarding film sensitivity is finally taken in as 7-bit digital data of one stage.

Through the configuration described above, the first illustrated camera device captures the film sensitivity Sv of the photographic film used as a digital value corresponding to the apex value.

Furthermore, as described above, this camera device has a configuration for capturing the open aperture value AVo (apex value) of the photographic lens device 2 to be used as a digital value. This is because, as has been made clear in the explanation of FIG. It is provided with an open input pin 96 for detecting. This open input pin 96 is connected to a mechanism that detects the amount of movement thereof and takes in the open aperture value AVo of the lens device 2 as a digital value. The detailed structure of this mechanism is shown in FIG. 14, and the opening input pin 96 has one end in contact with the opening pin 90 and moves according to the amount of protrusion of the pin 90. The amount is replaced by the amount of swing of the swing lever 268 that abuts the other end of the open input pin 96 about the shaft 270. The amount of this oscillation is 4
A fan-shaped open aperture value detection plate 272 centered on an axis 270 is provided for this purpose. This open aperture value detection plate 27
2 has four concentric conductive rings 274 centered on an axis 270 corresponding to each bit of the digital data of the open aperture value AVo on an insulating substrate, and a conductive ring 274 arranged concentrically with respect to the rings 27.1. It is also connected to the power supply Vcc through a resistor 275, and further to an inverter 279! ! common ring 27
It consists of 6. Note that between each of the conductive rings 274 are data tracks corresponding to each bit of the open aperture value AVo data of the lens device 2, and for each track there are four data tracks provided at one end of the swing lever 268. brush 28
0 corresponds. The brush 280 has a common brush 28 that is juxtaposed with the brush 280 and is always in contact with the common ring 276.
2 is electrically connected to each other. The conductive ring 274
corresponds to the amount of rocking of the rocking lever 268, so as to form an electrically closed circuit with the brush 280 corresponding to the track corresponding to the one marked "■" in each bit of the open aperture value AVo of the lens. , a conductive portion 282 is extended to a portion of each track that contacts the brush 280, and the release pin 90 of the lens device 2 is set to be input through the release input bin 96 of the body 4. Aperture value AV.

The digital value corresponding to the apex value is the brush 280.
and selective contact of the conductive portion 282.

Note that the timing pulse shown in FIG. 13 is also involved in taking in the open aperture value A V o of this lens device 2. Four timing pulses TB3 to TB6 are used to capture the open aperture value AVo.

In the configuration shown in FIG.
~TB5 is applied, but in such a configuration, the conductive ring 27 to which the timing pulse is applied.
When the brush 280 is not in contact with the conductive part 282 extending from the conductive part 282, the power supply Vcc is applied to the inverter 279 through the resistor 275, so the inverter 279 outputs a low level, and the brush 280 is still connected to the conductive part 282. are in contact with each other, the input of the inverter 279 is the common ring 276, the common brush 283, the brush 280, and the conductive ring 2.
74, the inverter 279 outputs a low level because it is pulled to a low level through a diode 277. That is, from the inverter 279, the open pin 90
A four-digit digital value corresponding to the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 input through the maximum aperture input pin 92 is sequentially output from the upper bit in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to TB6. This 4-bit data is the most significant ``1''
The ``digit'' has a weight of 64, and the least significant digit has a weight of 100.

When importing data regarding the open aperture value AV o, the issue is the open aperture value AV of the open pin 90 provided in the lens device 2.

This is the difference in the amount of protrusion corresponding to . That is, in both the lens device 2 and the camera body 4, it is not possible to greatly change the amount of protrusion of the opening pin 90 for each open aperture value AVo due to space constraints. Since it has a removable structure, it is difficult to accurately read minute differences in the amount of protrusion. This is especially true for 2
When attempting to read the digital data of the decimal code from the open aperture value detection plate 272 as shown in FIG. If the brush 280 is located between the two positions, there is a risk of erroneous reading due to limitations on the accuracy of the brush 280. The erroneously read data at this time is never intermediate data with adjacent data, but is taken out as completely different data, so such erroneously read data poses a major problem in the operation of the system. Therefore, when reading the open aperture value AVo of the lens device 2 in use, a method was considered in which a gray code is used instead of a binary code. As is well known, the content of such a gray code differs by only one bit between adjacent digital proboscis data.Through a mechanism such as the structure shown in FIG. It can be applied very effectively when reading digital data. Therefore, in the camera system of this embodiment, a gray code is applied to the mechanism for taking in the open aperture value AVo of the lens device 2, and the binary value is used as data for processing such as calculation later. The structure is such that it is converted into a code.

To explain in more detail, the Gray code is the 15th
As shown in the comparison table in the figure, unlike normal binary codes, adjacent codes differ by only 1 bit;
The numbers correspond to decimal numbers and binary codes as shown. Now, when we think about the relationship between Gray code and binary code, we find that the two do not have a completely random relationship. That is, if we look at this binary code after making each digit Ic of the binary code correspond to each digit of the Gray code, we find that it corresponds to the "O" digit of the Gray code. It can be seen that the digit has the same content as the digit immediately above it, and the digit corresponding to the "1" digit of the Gray code has the inverted content with respect to the digit immediately above it.

Therefore, the Gray code data taken in from the upper digits in synchronization with timing pulses TB3 to TB6 can be obtained as data converted into binary code by taking it out through a circuit as shown in FIG. I can do it.

That is, a J-type 7-lip flop produces a Q output as shown in FIG. 17 when the input to J- is the same human power.

In other words, when both inputs to J- are "1"+7), the Q output is inverted in synchronization with the next clock pulse, and when both inputs to J- are "0", the Q output has the same content. Retained.

Therefore, if the Gray code is sequentially applied to the J- input terminal of the flip-flop J- from the most significant digits through a circuit as shown in Figure 16, the gray code will be sequentially obtained from its Q output terminal in synchronization with the clock pulse. The data is conversion data of the Gray code into a binary code.

As described above, the first illustrated camera device has the above-described configuration, and the maximum aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device used.
is imported as a digital value equivalent to the Apex value.

In this camera device, the lens device 2 can manually set its aperture, that is, use the aperture setting ring 8 to preset the aperture value desired by the photographer, and can also preset the aperture from the body 4 side. As mentioned above, there is provided a mechanism for transmitting to the body 4 the automatic state in which the mark 12 is selected by the aperture setting ring 8.

That is, an AE pin 92 that protrudes when the mark 12 is selected by the aperture setting ring 8 is provided on the lens device 2 side, and an AE pin 92 that faces the AE pin 92 is provided on the body 4 side. An AE detection section 100 is provided to detect that the bottle 92 has protruded.
is interlocked with switch 284 as shown in FIG.

This switch 284 is a normally closed contact, and one end is connected to the resistor 27.
5 to the power supply Vcc and the inverter 2
It is connected to the input end of 79, and the other end is connected to the diode 27.
7, a timing pulse TBI is applied. That is, the switch 284 switches the timing pulse T
Its state is sensed by B1, and in the closed state, the input of the inverter 279 is connected to the switch 284.
, through the diode 277, the inverter 279 outputs a high level, and in the open state, the input terminal of the inverter 279 has the following:
Since the power supply Vcc is applied through the resistor 275, the inverter 279 outputs a low level.

Therefore, when the AE bin 92 is not protruding, that is, in the manual state, the inverter 279 outputs a high level in synchronization with the timing pulse TBI, and when the AE bin is protruding, that is, in the automatic state. In this state, the inverter 279 outputs a low level output in synchronization with the timing pulse TBI.

Through the configuration as described above, the camera system of this embodiment is in a state where the aperture setting conditions are set by the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2, that is, the aperture presetting is performed on the lens side, or the aperture is preset on the body side. It incorporates the conditions for being in a state similar to that performed in . In the following explanation, the high level signal outputted from the inverter 279 in synchronization with the timing pulse TB1 will be referred to as M.
It is called the NAL signal.

The first illustrated camera device also includes a lens device 2 and a body 4.
As mentioned above, the configuration is such that the lens can be narrowed down by operating the side aperture lever 64, but this aperture lever 64 merely has the function of mechanically narrowing down the lens device 2. Not only the 14th
As shown in the figure, it is linked to a switch 286 for detecting that the lens device 2 is in the aperture state.

This switch 2 and 6 are normally open contacts, and one end is connected to the resistor 27.
5 to the power supply Vcc and the inverter 2
79. is connected to the input terminal of , and the other terminal is connected to diode 2.
77, a timing pulse TB2 is applied. That is, the switch 286 has its state sensed by the timing pulse TB2, and when it is in the open state, the resistor 27 is connected to the input terminal of the inverter 279.
Since the power supply Vcc is applied through 5f, the inverter 279 outputs a low level, and in the closed state, the input of the inverter 279 is connected to the switch 286,
Because it is pulled to a low level through diode 277,
The inverter 279 outputs a high level. Therefore, when the aperture lever 64 is operated to aperture the photographing lens 2, the inverter 279 outputs a high level in synchronization with the timing pulse TB2.

Through the configuration as described above, the camera system of this embodiment incorporates the condition regarding whether or not the lens device 2 is in the stopped-down state. In the following description, the no-i level signal outputted from the inverter 279 in synchronization with the timing pulse TB2 will be referred to as a 5PDW signal.

As is clear from the above description, from the inverter 279 shown in FIG. Data regarding the open aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 used is sequentially output from the high-order digit side in synchronization with the signals of pulses TB3 to TB6, and the output of the inverter 279 is synchronized with the timing pulses TBI to TB6.
They will be separated as appropriate according to TB6. Note that this configuration will be detailed later.

As described above, the first illustrated camera device includes a dial 34 on the front surface of the body 4 for setting the shutter speed or aperture value desired by the photographer. This dial 34 is
It is used to set and input the shutter speed TV (apex value) when using shutter priority shooting and the aperture value AV (apex value) when using aperture priority shooting.The specific configuration is as follows: ASA sensitivity setting The configuration is similar to the configuration for taking in the digital value of film sensitivity from the dial 40. That is, the dial 34 is configured to input digital data into the system according to the rotational position of the dial from a digital data setting plate 288 that is rotated together with the dial 34, as shown in FIG. The digital data setting plate 288 has a plurality of concentric conductive rings 292 corresponding to each bit of the digital value of the shutter speed TV or aperture value AV data on an insulating substrate, and a plurality of concentric conductive rings 292 extending in the radial direction of the data setting plate 288. conductor 298
A common ring 294 maintains electrical continuity with all of the conductive rings 292 through the common ring 294. The common ring 294 is always in contact with a brush 296, which is connected to the power supply Vcc through a resistor 297 and also to an inverter 299.

Note that between each conductive ring 292 there is a data track corresponding to each bit of digital data of shutter speed TV or aperture value AV, and for each track there are five brushes corresponding to each bit of data. 290 are in contact. The track has shutter speed TV or aperture value AV
Electrical contact is made between the brush 290 and the conductive ring 292 corresponding to each bit of the digital value of the setting data that is "1" in correspondence to each setting position of the dial 34 for setting the setting data. Therefore, a conductive portion 300 extending in the radial direction from the conductive ring 256 is disposed at a portion that comes into contact with each brush 290.

Note that from this configuration, the shutter speed TV or aperture value AV
Timing pulses are also involved in order to capture the information. In the configuration shown in FIG. 18, there are five brushes 29.
Among the timing pulses, TB2 to TB5 are applied to each of the timing pulses through a diode 301 at each of the timing pulses. If not, the power supply Vcc is applied to the inverter 299 through the resistor 297, so the inverter 263 outputs a low level, and if the brush 290 is in contact with the conductive part 300, the input of the inverter 299 is The inverter 299 is high because it is pulled to a low level through the ring 292, brush 29o1 diode 301.
Performs level output. That is, the inverter 299 outputs the shutter speed T set by the dial 34.
A five-digit digital value corresponding to the apex value of V or the aperture value AV is sequentially output from the lower digit bit in synchronization with the timing pulses TB2 to TB6. This is something that has weight.

By the way, depending on the setting of the dial 34, it is necessary to specify that the digital data obtained through the configuration described above is data related to the shutter speed TV or data related to the aperture value AV. A mode changeover switch 38 provided on the top surface of the body 4 is provided for differentiation. This mode changeover switch 38 is interlocked with a switch 302 which is closed when set to the aperture priority mode.

This switch 302 is a normally open contact, and one end is connected to the resistor 29.
When connected to the power supply vCC through 7, the two inverter 2
99, and the other end is connected to the diode 30.
1, a timing pulse TB1 is applied. That is, the switch 302 is connected to the timing pulse TB.
Its state is sensed by I, and when it is in the open state, the power supply Vcc is applied to the input terminal of the inverter 299 through the resistor 297, so the inverter 299 outputs a low level, and the inverter 299 is in the closed state. In this case, the input of the inverter 299 is connected to the switch 302 and the diode 3.
Since the inverter 299 is pulled to a low level through 01, the inverter 299 outputs a high level. Therefore, when the mode selector switch 38 is switched to the aperture priority mode, the inverter 299 outputs a noi level in synchronization with the timing pulse TB1, and the mode selector switch 38 is switched to the shutter priority mode. When the inverter 299 is switched to the side, the inverter 299 outputs a low level output.

Through the configuration described above, the present embodiment can be realized.

The camera system determines whether the data set by the dial 34 is related to the shutter speed TV or the aperture value. In the following description, the high level signal outputted from the inverter 299 in synchronization with the timing pulse TB1 will be referred to as the A8LC signal.

In this embodiment, the shutter speed TV is selected and set from values in one step increments using the dial 34, and the aperture value is selected and set from among values in government increments. It is structured like this. In other words, even though the shutter speed is set in 1 step increments, the dial 34 also needs to be used to set the aperture value, which includes government data. The shutter speed including the stage data will be set. In order to deal with this problem, in this embodiment, the data regarding the shutter speed is set by multiplying the necessary setting digital value by 100, and the digital data read out according to the setting position of the dial 34 is set. is later doubled to obtain the digital value equivalent to the apex value related to the shutter speed.
It is used as a data TV.

As mentioned above, the first illustrated camera device has an inverter 29
9, an AsLC signal is output in synchronization with the timing pulse TBI to determine whether the data set by the dial 34 is related to the shutter speed or the aperture value. Also, in synchronization with the timing pulses 'l' B 2 to 'l' k35, the data set by the dial 34 is output sequentially from the higher digit side, but the output of the inverter 299 is The timing pulse TBI~TB
They will be separated as appropriate according to 6. Note that this configuration will be detailed later.

Through the configuration as described above, the camera system of this embodiment captures the shutter speed TV or aperture value AV set by the photographer through the dial 34 as a digital value equivalent to the apex value.

Further, this Katara device has a configuration for detecting the minimum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 to be used. This is the second
As clarified in the explanation of the figures, the lens device 2 includes a minimum diameter pin 91 having a protrusion amount corresponding to the minimum diameter aperture of the lens, and the minimum diameter pin 91 has a protrusion amount corresponding to the minimum diameter aperture of the lens.
A minimum diameter input bin 97 for detecting a protrusion amount of 1 is provided.

This minimum aperture input bin 97 is connected to a mechanism that detects the amount of movement thereof and specifies to which value the minimum aperture value of the lens device 2 belongs among a plurality of predetermined aperture values. Ru.

The detailed configuration of such a mechanism is shown in FIG. 19, in which a minimum diameter input pin 97 has one end in contact with the minimum diameter pin 91 and moves according to the amount of protrusion of the pin 91. This amount of movement is replaced by the amount of swinging of the swinging lever 304, which comes into contact with the other end of the minimum diameter input bin 97, about the shaft 303. This amount of oscillation is F number
il, F16. F22. F32. A fan-shaped minimum aperture aperture detection plate 306 centered on the axis 303 is used for selecting one of the aperture values of F45° and F64. This minimum aperture aperture detection plate 3
06 is F-number Fil, F16.06 is the minimum aperture value on the insulation board. F22. F32. Six electrodes 308 are arranged in the circumferential direction of the detection plate so that the aperture value of F45° to F64 can be selected. The contact can be made selectively depending on the amount of rocking of 304. At the same time, the minimum diameter aperture detection plate 306 has a common electrode 310 extending in its circumferential direction, and the brush 305 is always in sliding contact with the common electrode 310 regardless of its swinging position. 308 and the common electrode 310
It is structured to bridge the gap between The common electrode 310 is connected to the power supply Vcc through a resistor 314 and to the input terminal of an inverter 316, and the six electrodes 308 are applied with timing pulses TB1 to TB6 through diodes 312, respectively. .

In this configuration, the protrusion amount of the minimum diameter pin 91 having a protrusion amount corresponding to the minimum aperture value of the lens device 2 is detected by the minimum diameter entry mold/97 on the body 4 side, and the brush 305 is According to the amount of movement of the minimum diameter input bin 97, one of the six electrodes 308 is selected and electrically connected to the common electrode 310. Now, a diode 312 is connected to the electrode 308 that is in contact with the brush 305.
If the corresponding timing pulse is not input through the inverter 316, the input terminal of the inverter 316 will be at a no level depending on the power supply Vcc, so its output will be at a low level. When the corresponding timing pulse is input, the input terminal of the inverter 316 becomes a low level, so its output becomes a no-i level. That is, the inverter 31
6, a high level output is performed in synchronization with the timing pulse corresponding to the detected minimum aperture value, and the output of the inverter 316 is divided based on the timing pulse TBI-TB6. The detected minimum aperture value is Fll depending on the F number.

F16. F22. F32. F45. It is possible to detect which value of F64 the value corresponds to.

As mentioned above, the first illustrated camera device can input the minimum aperture value AMAX of the photographic lens device 2 used, but in the following explanation, the output signal of the inverter 316 will be collectively referred to as AMAX. It is called AX'.

As is clear from the above explanation, the open aperture value data A of the photographic lens device using the set film sensitivity data Sv1
vo, manual state/automatic state discrimination signal MNAL
, lens device aperture signal 8PDW, shutter speed T
V or aperture value AV setting data, aperture priority mode selection signal ASLC, minimum aperture aperture detection signal AMA
- It is imported in synchronization with TB6.

That is, as shown in FIG.
In Fig.), data regarding the film sensitivity Sv is sequentially output from pit Sv- with a weight of "1" to pit Sv- with a weight of 4'8" in synchronization with timing pulses TB1 to TB6. As mentioned above, the data regarding the film sensitivity Sv is converted.In addition, the timing pulse TB is output from the inverter 279 (FIG. 14).
In synchronization with l, the MNAL signal indicating that the aperture is selected on the lens device 2 side is output, and in synchronization with the timing pulse, the S P DW signal indicating that the lens device 2 is in the aperture state is output. A signal is output, and in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to 'rUg, the gray t''-code data AV o G C regarding the open aperture value AVo of the lens device 2 in use has a weight of 100. The gray color related to the open aperture value A V o
The code data AVoGC is later converted to binary code data AVo, as described above. Furthermore, from the inverter 299 (Fig. 18), the timing signal is
In synchronization with pulse TB1, a signal ASLC indicating the aperture priority mode is output, and timing pulse T is still in effect.
In synchronization with B2 to TB6, the set shutter speed If
Data related to TV or aperture value AV is output! Sign. Note that the data output in synchronization with the timing pulse TB2 has a weight of i, and the data output in synchronization with the timing pulse TB3 has a full weight of 61''. The data output in synchronization with timing pulse TB6 has a weight of 2°', and the data output in synchronization with timing pulse TB6 has a weight of 4°'. The output data p has a weight of 8'', but this is based on the fact that the data is input at the aperture, l value AV, or one-stage integration. On the other hand, since the shutter speed input from the common dial 34 is set at a step density of 1", the shutter speed has a weight of "1" (Pi) TVI is synchronized with the timing pulse TB2. In synchronization with the timing pulse TB3, data with a weight of "1" and a bit with a weight of "2" and a bit Tv4/TV2 with a weight of "4" are synchronized with the timing pulse TB3. /i As data with a weight of II 2 II in synchronization with timing pulse TB4, pit TV8 with a weight of "8" is synchronized with timing pulse TB5 and as data with a weight of "4", '16 The bit TV16 with a weight of ``8'' is taken in as data with a weight of ``8'' in synchronization with the timing pulse TB6.In other words, the data related to the shutter speed TV is multiplied by 1, This is the same as setting with the common dial 34 after matching the accuracy of the aperture value data as a single data set.

Therefore, from the inverter 299 to the timing bus TB
When handling the data output in synchronization with TB2 to TB6 as shutter speed TV, it is doubled and used.

Furthermore, from the inverter 316 (Fig. 19), the minimum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 used is F number, Fil,
F16. F22. F32. F45. A signal AMAX' indicating which of the timing pulses TBt-TB6 is output is output, and the minimum aperture aperture value is determined depending on which of the timing pulses TBt-TB6 the output signal AMAX' of the inverter 316 is synchronized with. is determined.

The camera device shown in g1 has other switch mechanisms for setting various operating conditions, one of which is a switch mechanism that is linked to the shutter release button 18. This switch mechanism has a configuration as shown in FIG. 21. When the shutter relay button 18 is pressed, the switch S1 is closed, a high level output is made through the inverter 1, and the shutter is activated. This is to start the necessary camera operations after release. Note that these movements are caused by the lifting of the reflex mirror,
This includes operations such as narrowing down the lens device 2 to a preset position and starting to run the front curtain of a two-curtain running type, focal plane, and shutter. In the following description, this switch mechanism will be referred to as SW2, and its output signal will be referred to as SR.

The selector lever 22 is linked to two switch mechanisms. One is a switch mechanism for the AE lock, and this switch mechanism has a configuration as shown in FIG. 21. When the selector lever 22 is set to the position where the mark 26 is selected, the switch S1 is When it is closed, a high level output is made through the inverter 11, and the amount of photometry is held fixed based on this high level output. In the following explanation, this switch mechanism will be referred to as 5AELK,
The output signal is called AELK. The other one is a switch mechanism for setting the self-timer, and this switch mechanism has a configuration as shown in FIG. , switch S1 closes and inverter 1
A high level output is made through 1, and based on this high level output, the shutter is released after a certain period of time has elapsed after the shutter release button 18 is pressed, so-called self-timer photography is performed. It will be done. In the following explanation, this switch mechanism will be referred to as 5SELF.
.

The output signal is called 5ELF.

The first illustrated camera device also includes a switch or mechanism for determining the operating state of the species. First, an AE charge detection switch mechanism is provided to detect whether or not the AE lever 94 provided on the body 4 side is in the AE charge state. This switch mechanism has a configuration as shown in FIG. 21, and is configured such that when the AE lever 94 is in the AE charging state, the switch S closes the circuit and outputs "1" from the inverter 11. .

In the following explanation, this switch mechanism will be referred to as 5AE.
CG, and its output signal is called AECG.

Further, a winding completion detection switch mechanism is provided to detect whether or not winding of the film is completed. This switch mechanism has a 7-opening mechanism shown in FIG. 21, and when the winding lever 14 completes charging of the springs used to move the mechanical parts necessary for film winding and 7-shot release, The switch S1 is configured so that when the switch S1 is closed, an "l' output is produced from the inverter II.The switch S1 is configured to close the shutter
After the release, the required operations are performed in sequence, and the two-act running type
The rear curtain of the focal plane shutter remains closed until the end of its travel. In the following description, this switch mechanism will be referred to as 5WNLTP, and its output signal will be referred to as WNUP signal.

Furthermore, a leading curtain running detection switch mechanism is provided to detect whether or not the leading curtain of the focal plane shutter has started running. This switch mechanism has a configuration as shown in FIG. 22. When the front curtain starts running, switch S2, which had been closed until then, opens, and the "1" output that had been made until then changes to "0". ``It is configured so that it becomes an output. The output of this switch mechanism is used to time the shutter speed and control the travel start time of the trailing curtain.

In the following explanation, this switch mechanism will be referred to as 5CT.
ST, and its output signal is called CTST.

In addition, as mentioned above, the camera device shown in the first figure is equipped with a mechanism for presetting the aperture for controlling the lens device-2 from the body 4 side, but an outline of the operation of this mechanism is explained in FIG. already mentioned.

That is, in the state immediately before shutter release, the AE lever 94 is locked in the AE charge position, and the aperture presetting lever 84 on the lens device 2 side is
The lens device 2 is held at an open aperture 9 preset position. This locked state is released when the shutter is released, but due to the unlocking, the AE lever 94 releases its hold on the lever 84, which is biased toward the minimum aperture preset side. Start driving towards the preset side.

At the same time, by detecting the amount of movement of the lever 84 using pulse means, the preset number of aperture stages of the aperture caused by the moving lever 84 (this increases as the lever 84 moves) is known and the control is performed. By clamping the AE lever 94 when the number of aperture stages coincides with the number of aperture stages for control, the lever 84 is stopped at a position outside the number of aperture stages for control. Through the above operations, from the body 4 side, the lens device 2
What is shown in FIG. 23 is a mechanism for detecting the travel distance of the Reno-84 by converting it into pulses. The AE lever 94 is integrated with an arm 318, and this arm 318 is connected to the shaft 32.
It is rotatably held by a pin 324 on an arm 322 that can swing around zero. This configuration allows the AE lever 94 to move in the direction of arrow a or σ,
It is lightly biased in the direction of arrow δ by a spring (not shown). The lever 326 is rotatably supported by a shaft 327 and a portion thereof is rotatably connected to the arm 318 by a pin 328. It was created for the purpose of obtaining. The lever 326 has a brush 33 at its tip.
0, and swings about the shaft 327 in the direction of the arrow a or a with respect to the movement of the AE lever 94 in the direction of the arrow a or σ. The brush 330 is always in sliding contact with the fan-shaped pulse generating plate 322, a part of which is always in contact with a grounded common electrode 334, and the other part is a comb-shaped electrode 336 that protrudes in the radial direction of the sector. is facing.

The comb-shaped electrodes 336 are electrically connected to each other and are connected to the power supply Vcc through a resistor 338 and to the input terminal of an inverter 340. In this state, if the AE lever 94 moves in the direction of the arrow δ or σ, the brush 33
0 slides into contact with the pulse generating plate 332 and moves in the direction of arrow a. At this time, the brush 330 is
It moves while repeating contact and non-contact with the inverter 36, but when it is in contact, the inverter 3400Å force end is pulled to the ground side and becomes low level, and its output becomes high level. When in contact, the input terminal of the inverter 340 becomes high level depending on the power supply Vcc, and its output becomes the low fist level. Therefore, the AE lever 94
If the camera moves in the direction of the arrow σ according to the biasing force of the lever 84 on the lens device 2 side from the locked position in the AE charging state,
Naturally, the brush 330 also runs in the direction of arrow a, and a pulse signal corresponding to the amount of travel of the AE bar 94 is obtained from the signature inverter 340. Therefore, by counting the number of pulses of this pulse signal, the amount of travel of the AE lever 94, that is, the preset position of the number of aperture stages by the lever 84, is known, and the AE lever 94 is clamped when the desired number of aperture stages is reached. Depending on the situation, it is possible to preset the aperture via the lever 84 of the lens device 2.

Note that there is naturally a difference in operating time between mechanical operating means such as the AE lever mechanism and clamp mechanism, and electrical means for counting the output pulse signals of the inverter 340. Needless to say, the problem must be solved by mechanical or electrical correction based on empirical data.

Further, a pulse generating plate 33 having a configuration as shown in FIG.
The pulses obtained through a contact mechanism such as 2 are not necessarily shaped pulses suitable for counting, but when inverted through the inverter 340 they are distorted to some extent. However, if necessary, further waveform shaping may be performed using a waveform shaping means.

Through the above-mentioned black configuration, this camera system allows the aperture of the lens device 2 to be preset from the body side, and the lever for presetting the aperture can be controlled by digital means of counting the number of pulses. Since the clamp position is determined, extremely accurate aperture presetting is possible. In the following description, the pulse signal for detecting the position of the AE lever 94, including the output of the inverter 340, will be collectively referred to as FPC.

As mentioned above, the camera system of this embodiment automatically performs strobe photography when a strobe is inserted. explain. In the same figure, 342
is an automatic flash unit that controls the amount of light emitted according to the reflected light from the subject.The elements for controlling the amount of light are the film sensitivity information from the film sensitivity setting dial 106 and the information from the aperture setting dial 108. Aperture value information power; used.

The configuration of the strobe unit 342 is well known, so a detailed explanation will be omitted, but the strobe unit 342 will not be described in detail.
In order for the unit 342 to emit strobe light, a discharge compnocer 75 (not shown) must be charged to a required voltage. When the capacitor is fully charged, the strobe unit 342 becomes capable of emitting light, but in order to let the outside world know, a signal indicating that the discharging capacitor has been fully charged is output through the signal line 344. . This signal is introduced into the current circuit 346, and at this time, the current circuit 346 selects a first current amount signal as a fully automatic charge completion signal and a second current amount signal as a semi-automatic charge completion signal, depending on the state of the changeover switch 146. In addition, the first current amount or the second current amount flows from the control terminal 54 to the control contact 140. When the camera device detects this, the camera automatically switches to strobe shooting mode, and data is sent instead of analog information from a TTL metering system (not shown) built into the body 4. Analog information from terminal 56 A
- Switches to a circuit that converts to D and imports the data. As mentioned earlier, when the camera device switches to strobe photography mode in response to the first current amount (fully automatic charging completion signal), the shutter speed will be automatically activated regardless of what shutter speed is set on the body 4 side. When the camera device switches to strobe photography mode in response to the second current amount (semi-automatic charge completion signal), the current is controlled to 1/60th of a second.
Only when the shutter speed is set to 1/60th of a second or more, the shutter speed is automatically controlled to 1/60th of a second. −
The data terminal 56 receives analog information from the data contact 142 regarding the aperture value set by the aperture setting dial 108 on the strobe side through the level setting device 348 directly connected to the aperture setting dial 108. . This analog information is A-D converted, taken into the camera device as digital information, and used as data for aperture control.

In a camera device that has entered strobe shooting mode by receiving a fully automatic or semi-automatic charging completion signal from the strobe side, when the shutter release is performed, the flash unit 342 is connected to the body 4 through the synchronization contact 52.138. A flash command synchronized with the shutter movement is given, and the strobe unit 342 automatically adjusts the light, while the camera device releases the shutter at a shutter speed of 1/60th of a second or less (in the case of semi-automatic mode). At the same time, the aperture is controlled according to the aperture value set on the strobe side.

In the following explanation, the signal indicating the completion of fully automatic charging including the first current amount detected through the control terminal 54 will be referred to as the C8A1 signal, and the signal indicating the completion of semi-automatic charging including the second amount of current. is collectively referred to as the C8A2 signal, and these two signals indicating the completion of charging are collectively referred to as the C8A signal. Also,
Data related to the range value inputted through the data terminal 56 is collectively referred to as a VSA signal.

As mentioned above, the camera system of this embodiment is equipped with an external photometer to enable a wider range of exposure control.
The operation of the external photometer will be described in detail according to the illustrated block diagram of the external photometer.

In FIG. 25, 350 is a reflected light type photometer, which has a function of directly measuring the reflected light from an object without passing through a photographic lens or the like. This external light meter 350 is equipped with a current circuit 352 into which a third current amount as an external photometry mode signal can flow from a terminal 54 on the camera device side through a contact 146. On the side of the camera device, when the current can flow from the control terminal 54 to the contact 146 at the third current amount, it detects this and automatically switches to the external photometry mode. Instead of the analog information from the TTL fil+ optical system, a circuit is selected that converts the analog information from the data terminal 56 into A-Di and takes it in. At the same time, from the external photometer 350, subject brightness information obtained as a result of photometry is given as analog information from the data contact 148 to the data terminal 56, but this analog information is A-D converted and sent to the camera device as digital information. It is used as data for exposure control.

Further, in FIG. 26, 354 is an incident light type photometer, which has a function of directly measuring the illuminance of the subject area. This external photometer 354, like the photometer shown in FIG. 25, is equipped with a current circuit 356 into which a third current amount as an external photometry mode signal can flow from the control terminal '54 on the camera device side through the contact 166. On the side of the camera device equipped with this incident light type photometer, when the current of the third current amount can flow from the control terminal 54 to the contact 166, it detects this and automatically switches to the external photometry mode, In place of the analog information from a TTL photometry system (not shown) built into the body 4, a circuit is selected that converts analog information from the data terminal 56 into digital data. At the same time, from the external photometer 354, illuminance information obtained as a result of photometry is given as analog information from the data contact 168 to the data terminal 56.
This analog information is A-D converted and input into the camera device as digital information, and is used as data for exposure control. At this time, the data imported into the camera device is illuminance information measured using the incident light method.
No particular problem will arise if the information is converted in advance into a format that can be treated equivalently to object brightness information measured using the reflected light method.

As is clear from the above explanation, external photometers can be treated equally whether they are of the reflected light type or the incident light type, but the difference in particular with respect to the incident light type is that It has an AE lock function for the camera device.

That is, the incident light type photometer 354 is configured to perform photometry and output photometry data to the terminal 168 only while the photometry button 174 is pressed. Therefore, the metering button 17
4 is not pressed and no photometric data is output to the terminal 168, it is desirable that the camera device be in the AE lock state. Therefore, the photometry button 174 is linked to a normally closed switch (not shown), and the switch is connected in parallel with the kE lock switch 5AELK built into the body 2 via the contact 170 and the AE lock terminal 58. Ru.

As mentioned above, the camera system of this embodiment can be applied with a reflected light type or an incident light type external photometer. A signal indicating the external photometry mode including the current amount of
These signals are collectively referred to as LM signals, and data related to the photometric amount inputted through the data terminal 56 are referred to as OB double signals.

This OB double signal apex value is equivalent to the subject brightness BV.

Through the mechanical configuration described in detail above, the camera system of this embodiment takes in various input data, setting data, and information regarding the operating state of setting conditions.

As is clear from the above explanation, the camera system of this embodiment takes in data necessary for exposure control, operating conditions, and information regarding the operating state through various means, and these input information are Processed by the digital control system described.

As explained previously, the camera system of this embodiment is
It performs operation control that organically connects the overall system, simplifies adjustment during manufacturing with its small size and high precision, and performs the most rational operation development based on a large number of input information. In order to make this possible, a digital control system is being applied as the control system.

An example of a digital control system applied to the camera system of the present invention will be described below. The system has not been deployed. The reason is that the camera device mechanism applied to this embodiment has not reached the point where it has an ideal configuration that is a huge leap forward from the concept of a conventionally known camera mechanism, and the camera system of this embodiment also does not have an ideal configuration. This is because it cannot exceed that. FIG. 27 is a schematic block diagram of a digital control system adopted for the camera device shown in FIG. 1 to satisfy the various performances described above. 3 for a mechanism section 358 that includes various mechanisms, such as a shutter travel mechanism, aperture mechanism, mirror up mechanism, quick return mechanism, etc., as well as a function for setting various numerical data or operating conditions, and a function for determining the operating state of each mechanism. Divided into two large blocks. These three large blocks are an input control section 360, a central control section 362, and an output control section 364, and each control section is connected by one bus line 366. The mechanism section 358 includes various exposure control mechanisms, various display mechanisms, etc., in addition to the information input section described above, that is, a photometry section, various data setting sections, various condition setting sections, various operating state determination sections, etc. Equipped with

The input control section 360 receives photometric analog data, various condition setting signals, and operation state determination signals from the mechanical section 358 through an input system 368. It is converted to digital information and transferred to central control unit 362 via input bus line 370.

The central control section 362 receives various setting data, various condition setting signals, etc. from the mechanical section 358 through the input system 372, and here the data, signals, etc. are converted into an optimal form for information processing. Necessary arithmetic processing is added to the digital information from the input control section 360, and after the calculation is completed, the output bus is used as information necessary for controlling various exposure control mechanisms and various display mechanisms included in the mechanism section 358. The signal is transmitted to the output control section 364 through a line 374. - 10,000, the central control unit 362 controls the timing
Through a line 376, timing signals for capturing various setting data and various condition setting signals and timing signals for dynamic driving of various display mechanisms are supplied to the mechanism section 358.

The output control section 364 controls various exposure control mechanisms of the mechanism section 358 based on various condition setting signals and various operation state determination signals input from the mechanism section 358 and control information input from the central control section 362. It provides control signals and causes various display mechanisms to display necessary information.

The functional configuration of the mechanical parts of the camera shown in FIG. 27 will be explained in more detail with reference to the schematic configuration diagram in FIG. 28.

This mechanical part 358 is involved in all operations related to input/output and control display of the camera device, including various setting switches or detection switches or measurement devices for input, various switches and lines for output, and control. It is equipped with various power plungers for display purposes, various display mechanisms for display purposes, etc.

In the same figure, 378 is the previously explained TTL photometry means, and its output signal is logarithmically compressed through means not shown, so that in the case of open photometry, BVo2HV -AVo -AVc, and in the case of narrow-down photometry, BVs = HV -AV -AV//
It will be output as an analog value equivalent to Apex C. The output analog signal of the TTL photometry means 378 is applied to the A-D converter 382 through the signal switching circuit 380 of the input control section 360, where it is converted into digital data and then taken into the system. It should be noted that the signal switching circuit 380 is connected to photometering means other than the TTL photometer 378, that is, the reflected light type photometer 3501 and the human radiation type photometer 354.
This is provided so that the A-D converter 382 can be used in common when converting analog data from the strobe device 384 into digital values.

A simple block diagram of the strobe device 384 is shown in FIG. 24. When this strobe device 384 is inserted into the camera device body 4, the data contact 1 of the strobe device 384
42, control contact 140. The synchronization contact 138 contacts each of the data terminal 56, control terminal 54, and synchronization contact 52 provided on the accessory shoe 50 of the body 4. In this state, when the power switch 132 (FIG. 5) of the strobe device 384 is turned on, data VSA regarding the aperture value set by the aperture setting dial 108 is input from the data contact 142 through the data terminal 56, and the input control section 360 signal switching circuit 380. In this state, if the strobe device 384 has not completed charging for strobe light emission, the signal C8A indicating charging completion is not input, and therefore the data VSA is input regulated by the signal switching circuit 380. Become.

When charging of the strobe device 384 is completed, 'control terminal 5
4 through the data contact 140 on the strobe device 384 side, current can flow into the charging completion detection surface path 386. That is, a signal C8A indicating the completion of charging is input from the strobe device 384 through the data contact 140 and the control terminal 54 in the form of a negative current signal, and this signal C8A is detected by the current detector 386 provided in the input control section 360. This will result in

When a current flows out from the control terminal 54, the current detector 386 supplies a control signal to the signal switching circuit 380 to switch the analog signal input from the terminal 56 in place of the analog signal from the TTL photometry means 378. A-D converter 3
82, and a function of detecting the magnitude of the current and determining the control signal included in the amount of current. Therefore, when the signal C8A indicating the completion of charging is input from the strobe device 384, the signal switching circuit 3
Since data 80 regarding the aperture value input as an analog value from the terminal 54 is input to the VSAiA-D converter 382, the data VIA regarding the aperture value is converted into digital data and then taken into the system. becomes.

On the other hand, the current detector 386 detects the C8A signal and generates a charge completion signal CG to set the system to strobe photography mode.
The C8A is selectively given two levels of current by a charging completion detection circuit 346 that outputs UP and also has the function of switching the current amount of a charge completion signal into two levels using a changeover switch 146. According to the amount of current of the signal,
The current detector 386 determines whether this strobe photography mode is fully automatic or semi-automatic, and outputs a fully automatic signal FAT when it is fully automatic. Therefore,
Charge completion signal CGU which is the output of the current detector 386
Depending on the input of P and the presence or absence of the fully automatic signal FAT, the thread is placed in fully automatic or semi-automatic strobe photography mode.

Note that the flash emission trigger of the strobe device 384 for strobe photography is performed by a synchro switch 388 provided on the mechanism portion 358 side, and the strobe device 384 is triggered by the synchro switch 388 provided on the mechanism portion 358 side.
connected to. As is well known, in the case of a two-curtain running type focal plane shutter, this synchro switch 388 is turned on and off by a member 390 that detects that the front curtain has finished running. .

This synchro switch 388 is connected to the accessory shoe 50i1 of the body 4 to configure the camera system of this embodiment. : It is used not only to synchronize the strobe device 384 to be monitored, but also to other general strobe or flash devices;
is also connected.

A simple block diagram of the reflected light type photometer 350 is shown in FIG.
When mounted on the photometer 350, the contacts 148 and 146 of the photometer 350 come into contact with the data terminal 56 and the control terminal 54 provided on the accessory shoe 50 of the body 4, respectively. At this time, the contact 146 from the control terminal 54 to the photometer 350 side
Current can flow into. That is, a signal OLM indicating that an external photometer is attached is input from the photometer 350 through the contact 146 and the control terminal 54 in the form of a negative current signal, and this signal OLM is input to the current detector provided in the input control section 360. 3
86. Therefore, a control signal is given from this current detector 386 to the signal switching circuit 380, and the data OB regarding the photometric amount input as an analog value from the data terminal 56 instead of the analog signal from the TTL photometry means 378 is changed to A- is input to the D converter 382,
The data is converted into OBi digital data and then input into the system. What, this photometric amount data O
Since B is not obtained by photometry through a photographic lens device, various corrections are unnecessary, and the obtained signal directly corresponds to the subject brightness BV. −
The current detector 386 determines the OLM signal from its current amount and outputs a control signal OLM to put the system into external photometry mode. In response to the input of the control signal OLM, the system performs various operations based on external photometry data.

A simple block diagram of the incident light type photometer 354 is shown in FIG.
Each of the 56 contacts 168, 166, and 170 connects to the data terminal 5 provided on the accessory shoe 50 of the body 4.
6. Contact with each of the control terminal 54 and the AE lock terminal 58. At this time, current can flow from the control terminal 54 to the contact 166 on the photometer 354 side.

That is, a signal OLM indicating that an external photometer is attached is input from the photometer 354 through the contact 166 and the control terminal 54 in the form of a negative current signal, and this signal OLM is input to the current detection provided in the input control section 36o. It will be detected by the device 386. Therefore, the signal switching time w! from this current detector 386! A control signal is applied to the r380, and the data terminal 56 replaces the analog signal from the TTL photometry means 378.
Data OB regarding the photometric amount input as an analog value from
can be input to the A-D converter 382.

Note that this incident light type photometer 354 has a normally closed AE lock.
Equipped with a switch 392, when the turnip 5-156 is attached to the accessory shoe 50 of the body 4, the contact point of the coupler 156 is 170°A of the accessory shoe 50.
Through the E-lock terminal 58, the AE lock switch 392 short-circuits the regular AE lock switch SAI (LK) included in this mechanism part 358, so that the camera device is placed in the AE lock state. The AE lock switch 392 is linked with the photometry button 174 for making the photometer 354 perform photometry, and is opened by operating this button, so when photometry starts on the photometer 354 side, The camera device is released from the AE lock state.

At this time, data OB regarding the amount of photometry is output from the photometer 354 to the contact 168 as an analog value, and this data O
B is connected to A from the data terminal 56 through the signal switching circuit 380.
The data is input to the -D converter 382, converted into digital data, and then input into the system.

Note that this photometric amount data OB is not obtained by photometry using the reflected light method, so the subject and brightness information B
Although this is data regarding illuminance that is completely different from V, 1. Since the handling in the Apex calculation formula is exactly the same as the subject brightness information BV, by appropriately adjusting the output analog value of the photometer 354, the obtained photometric amount data OB directly corresponds to the subject brightness BV. I can do it. on the other hand,
The current detector 386 determines the OL hi multiplied signal from its current amount and outputs a control signal OLM to put the system into external photometry mode. The system performs various operations based on external photometry data in response to the input of the control signal OL M, which is exactly the same as when using a reflected light type photometer.

In other words, with this camera system, regardless of whether you use a reflected light meter or an incident light meter as an external metering adapter, the system will work perfectly, except for the presence of AE lock and usability issues. It performs the same operation.

As is clear from the above explanation, the meaning of the output digital signal of the A-D converter 382 is determined by the output signals CGUP, FAT, and OLM from the current detector 386, and the system also The operation is changed to a desired mode of operation depending on the output of the detector 386. In the following explanation, the output digital signal of the A/D converter 382 will be collectively referred to as DD.

Note that this input control section 360 detects and imports various conditions and operating states set in the mechanism section 358, and includes a 5AELK having a switch configuration similar to that shown in FIG. 21. Switch 5WNUP
, through the AE charge detection switch 5AECG, the AE
AE LK double signal for locking Winding completion detection switch WNUP% AE lever 94 receives ABCQ signal etc. indicating that it is in the AE charging state.

Incidentally, the AE lock switch 5AELK is linked to a selector lever 22 provided on the top surface of the body 4, the switch 5WNUP is linked to a mechanism operated by a winding lever 14, and the switch AECG is linked to a mechanism linked to an AE lever 94. and make it work.

The data and condition setting signals taken into the input control section 360 as described above are sent to the central control section 360 via the input bus line 370 after being appropriately time-aligned.
will be forwarded to.

The central control section 362 takes in various setting data and setting conditions from the mechanism section 358. This central control section 362 outputs a timing pulse as shown in FIG. 13 through a timing line 394, and in synchronization with this timing pulse, data sv' regarding the film sensitivity Sv, the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device, etc. Data related to AVo AVo (gray code), signal M indicating that the aperture of the photographic lens device is set on the lens device side
NAL, signal 5PDW indicating that the photographic lens device is stopped down, data related to the set aperture value AV or shutter speed TV, signal ASLC indicating that this data is related to the aperture value AV, minimum value of the photographic lens device A signal such as AMAX indicating the aperture value is taken in.

The various data, setting conditions, and other signals described above are taken in through the configurations shown in FIGS. 12 to 19, and the details are as already described.

In this central control section 362, various arithmetic and control operations are performed, and data signals for controlling each exposure side frame of the camera mechanism section 358 and data signals for display are outputted through an output bus line 374. The control unit 364 is provided with the following information.

This output control unit 364 includes shutter release control for starting the operation of the camera device, aperture control for controlling the aperture value of the lens device to a set or calculated aperture, and shutter control for controlling the shutter speed to a set or calculated speed. It has various control functions such as speed control and display control for displaying necessary information, and includes a shutter release means 396, an aperture control means 398, a shutter speed control means 400, a digital display means 402, and A control signal for the blinking display means 404 is output. -This output control section 364 detects various setting conditions and operating states of the mechanical section 358 and takes in those signals, and is a self-timer set having a switch configuration similar to that shown in FIG.・Switch 5SELF, shutter release switch SW2, front curtain running start switch 5 having the same switch configuration as shown in FIG.
CTST indicates that the self-timer is set -i 5ELF signal, shutter release SR signal to start camera operation after shutter release, first curtain of two-curtain running focal plane shutter A CTST signal indicating that the vehicle is running is applied. Furthermore, the output control section 364 has the configuration shown in FIG.
It also captures an FPC signal obtained by converting the distance traveled by the AE lever 94 from the AE charge position into pulses.

The switch 5SELF is connected to the selector lever 22 provided on the top surface of the body 4, the shutter release switch SW2 is connected to the shutter release button 18, and the switch 5CTS'r is connected to the front curtain travel start detection member 40.
6 respectively.

The mechanical part 358 of this camera device is a mechanical sequence control mechanism and an electrical control mechanism using an electromagnetic solenoid, including the shutter release means 396, aperture control means 398, and shutter speed control means. 4
00 is a part related to electrical control.

The shutter release means 396 provides a trigger for starting the mechanical sequence of the camera device, and performs the required operation using an extremely small electromagnetic solenoid. The operation of the shutter release means 396 is controlled by the shutter release signal sR and self-timer set signal 5ELF input to the input control section 360.
It is also closely related to the winding completion signal WNUP, etc. input to the output control section 364.

In the mechanical sequence that starts running due to the operation of the shutter release means 396, the AE lever 94
This also includes the operation of moving the vehicle from the charging position. This A
As mentioned before, the E lever 94 moves from the charging position to
It has a function of presetting the aperture value of the lens device 2 by being clamped at an appropriate position while traveling toward the discharge position, and this clamp position is determined by the AE of the AE lever 94. This is the distance traveled from the charging position.

In other words, as is clear from the explanation of FIG.
Therefore, while detecting the traveling distance of the AE lever 94, when the detected amount reaches a value corresponding to the number of control aperture stages, the AE lever 94 is clamped. By maintaining the amount of travel at that time, the aperture can be preset in the lens device 2.

During this operation, an EPC signal is input to the output control section in response to the amount of travel of the AE lever 94. This FPC signal is a pulse signal whose number corresponds to the travel distance of the AE lever 94. Therefore, by counting this FPC signal with a counter or the like, the lever 94 can be easily
You can make ink to know the distance traveled.

The aperture control means 398 controls the A when the odometer from the AE charge position of the AE lever 94 reaches an amount corresponding to the number of aperture control stages given from the central control section 362.
It operates a mechanism for clamping the E-bar 94, and this also uses a small electromagnetic solenoid to perform the required operation.

The mechanical sequence started by the operation of the shutter release means 396 includes, in addition to the operation of moving the AE lever 94 from the charging position, the lifting of the mirror and the preset aperture of the photographic lens device 2. It also includes operations such as narrowing down the image and starting the front curtain of a two-curtain running type focal plane shutter.

In general, shutter speed control using a two-curtain running type focal brain shutter is performed by controlling the time from the time when the front curtain starts running until the time when the second curtain starts running, but this camera device also Not an exception. That is, after the front curtain of the shutter starts running, time is measured while regulating the running of the rear curtain, and after the time corresponding to the shutter speed given from the central control unit 362 has elapsed, the rear curtain is started. The objective is to obtain the required shutter speed by starting the movement. Of course, this camera device relies on electrical means to measure time.

When the front curtain of the shutter starts running, the mechanism part 358
, signals CTS and T indicating this are output. The output control unit 364 that receives this CTST signal measures time based on the shutter speed data given from the central control unit 362, and after the time corresponding to the shutter speed has elapsed, the output control unit 364 runs the shutter trailing curtain. For this purpose, a shutter speed control means 400 is provided, which is also configured to perform the required operation using a small electromagnetic solenoid.

As mentioned above, the shutter release means 396
, the aperture control means 398, and the shutter speed control means 400 are the parts in this camera system in which the electrical control system is directly involved in controlling exposure, and they occupy an extremely important position.

Note that even while the electrical control means is in operation, the mechanical sequence of the camera device itself continues to operate.
A mechanical control mechanism is involved in the quick return of the mirror after the shutter trailing curtain has finished running, the cancellation of the aperture drive of the lens device, and the like.

Another function of the output control section 346 is a display function that presents information necessary for photographing to the photographer. 1st
As mentioned above, the camera device shown in the figure is equipped with a display device in the viewfinder 13 that displays the data necessary for photographing.
8 and is indicated by 402. The data display 402 receives information regarding data to be displayed, that is, a decode signal for display, from the output control section 364, and also receives a timing signal for dynamic display driving from the central control section 362 via a timing line 394. Uke is taking it. This dynamic display drive is a well-known display method that provides common display information that changes over time to all the display units that make up the display, and also controls the display units based on timing signals. This is a display method in which desired data is displayed on a desired display unit by selective driving, and it is widely used because it has features such as a simplified circuit configuration and reduced power consumption. This dynamic display drive is particularly advantageous in cases such as camera devices where space is limited and a large capacity power source cannot be incorporated.

There is still an LED on the top of the camera device body 4 shown in the first figure.
The function of this LED lamp 32 is also important. One is a function that lights up when checking the battery to indicate that there is sufficient battery power, and the other is a function that lights up when the self-timer is used to take pictures. This function indicates that the self-timer is in operation. A control signal is also given to this LED lamp 32 from the output control section 364.

As mentioned above, the mechanism portion 358 is the input control section 3.
601 Central control unit 362 and output control unit 364 are closely linked to photometric data, external input data, setting data, setting conditions, input conditions such as discrimination status, control and display of shutter release, aperture, shutter speed, etc. There is.

Next is the motor drive device whose details are shown in FIG.
It is represented by 5. This motor drive device 405 is connected from its contact 210 to the switch 5WNUP through a contact 216 of the body 4. Said switch 5WNU
In P, after the film winding is completed in the camera device, the shutter release is performed and shirt 1 is released.
As mentioned above, the trailing curtain remains on until the end of its run in the evening, so it is possible to obtain the WNUP signal which remains at a high level during the above-mentioned period through the inverter. The motor drive device receives the WNUP signal before passing through the inverter, that is, the WNUP
Controlled by receiving signals. This WNUP signal is at a high level during a period other than the above-mentioned period in the camera operation cycle, that is, from the end of the shutter trailing curtain until the film winding is completed. drives the film winding motor based on this WNUP signal. That is, according to this motor drive device, after the shutter release, the film winding operation starts immediately when the shutter trailing curtain finishes traveling, and stops the film winding operation when the film winding is completed. , there is no risk of malfunction,
Also, rapid film winding operation is possible.

As shown in FIG. 8, this motor drive device 405 is equipped with a shutter release device 220 that can remotely release the shutter of a camera device. It has no electrical circuit connection with the drive device 405. - The operation button 228 provided on the shutter release 220 is linked to the shutter release 9 switch SW2 of the mechanism part 358 and the switch R8W2 which is connected in parallel in a circuit through the contacts 212 and 218, Functionally, it is exactly the same as the shutter/release button 18 provided on the top surface of the body 4.

Now, the input control section 360, the central control section 362, and the output control section 364 share various functions as described above, but their operations are related by a path line 366, and the functional parts Together with 358, it forms a rational system.

The main operation of this system is to perform calculations based on external conditions (photometry data, etc.) according to data or conditions set by the photographer, derive control data necessary for exposure control, and The camera apparatus displays necessary control data to notify the photographer and performs exposure control based on the control data.The operations of this camera apparatus in various modes will be outlined below.

Now, the data DD digitally converted and outputted to the A-D converter 382 of the input control section 360 are photometry data BVo based on open photometry and photometry data B based on stop-down photometry.
Vs, aperture control data VSA from the strobe device 384
These correspond to any of the external photometry data OB from the external photometry adapters 350 and 354, and these correspond to the charge completion signal CG which is the output of the current detector 386.
UP, the external photometry mode control signal OLM, and the aperture signal 5PDW, which is the output of the switch 286 linked to the aperture lever 64, and the like, and the corresponding processes are performed.

Now, the strobe device 384 and external photometry adapter 350, 354 are attached to the accessory shoe 50 of the camera device body 4.
Consider the case where the camera is not installed, in which case the camera device can take five shooting modes (excluding pulp shooting).

These five modes depend on the state of the mode selector 38 provided on the top surface of the body 4, the aperture lever 64 provided on the front surface of the body 4, and the state of the aperture setting/g of the lens device 2. You can select the following shooting modes: aperture priority AB shooting mode, aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, and aperture focus metering aperture priority AE shooting mode. , as shown in Fig. 11, especially when performing data calculation processing, the aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode is the same as each AE shooting mode of aperture priority or shutter priority, so the necessary calculations are Routines are roughly divided into four types.

Now, when the mode selector 38 is set to the aperture priority side 1, the aperture lever 64 is set to the open side, and the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is set to the mark 12, the system performs aperture priority AE shooting. mode. At this time, the photometering lid B related to the subject brightness obtained as a result of photometry
V.

As mentioned above, includes the open aperture value AVo of the lens device 2 and the bending error AVc, and the relationship BvO2BV-AVo-AVc with respect to the actual subject brightness data BV is as follows ( This is also shown in equation 3). on the other hand,
On the mechanism part 358 side, data S regarding film sensitivity is stored.
Data AVO1 regarding the open aperture value of V1 zoom/zoom device 2
The aperture value AV, etc. desired by the photographer is set, and data A V c related to the bending error A V c is also derived from the open aperture value data AVo.

The derivation of this bending error AVc, which will be described in detail later, does not depend on any particular calculation, but is performed by selecting the maximum aperture value A of the photographic lens device 2 from among a plurality of preset bending error data.
It relies on a structure that selects and derives those corresponding to Vo.

Prior to starting calculations for exposure control, this camera system makes sure that the aperture value AV set using the dial 34 is greater than or equal to the maximum aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 in use and less than or equal to the maximum aperture value AMAX. Compare and calculate certain things 0 If 1 As a result of the comparison calculation, if the aperture value AV set with the dial 34 is smaller than the open aperture value AVo, the open aperture value AVo is replaced as the set aperture value AV, and vice versa. If the aperture value AV set with the dial 34 is larger than the maximum aperture value AMAX, an operation is performed to replace the maximum aperture value AMAX as the set aperture value AV.

This is because, as mentioned earlier, the aperture value AV is set not on the lens device 2 side but on the dial 34 side, so the setting value sometimes exceeds the controllable range depending on the photographic lens device 2 used. This is because there may be cases where the upper limit or lower limit aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 is
Or, this is to apply AMAX as the aperture value AV for control.

Note that the TTL photometry means 3 provided in the first mechanism part 358
78, the BVo is further introduced into the central control unit 362 through the A/D converter 382, and is subjected to the following arithmetic processing.

First, film sensitivity data S■ is added to the photometric data BVo captured as described above.

That is, BVo +SV = BV +SV -AVo -AV
The calculation c ・−・=−・(8) is performed, and this equation is derived from the above equation (2) as follows: BVo +SV = EV −A~'o −AVc −
--(This corresponds to 91. Next, the open aperture value data AVo and the bending error data AVc of the lens device 2 are added to the above calculation result.

That is, BVo + SV + AVo + AVc = EV
--.-00), and through the above calculations, an appropriate exposure amount EV for the film used is calculated based on the photometric data.

As mentioned above, if the arithmetic register overflows due to the digital arithmetic operation, the maximum capacity of this arithmetic register is used as the result of the arithmetic operation.

Next, the aperture value data AV set using the dial 34 is subtracted from the exposure amount EV obtained as described above, and as is clear from equation (1), the result is EV - AV TV ・ ・ ・ ・ ・・ −
(11), and the shutter speed TV required to obtain proper exposure for the set aperture value AV can be found.

Note that the shutter speed TV obtained in this way is control data for satisfying the exposure amount EV of the αω formula for the set aperture value AV, but sometimes this calculation result is different from that of the camera device. There is a risk that the shutter speed limit given to the body 4 will be exceeded, and in such a case, it is necessary to notify the photographer of this to prevent erroneous operation.

Therefore, in this camera system, the shutter speed TV obtained as a result of calculation is the maximum shutter speed TMAX of the shutter mechanism built into the body 4 of the camera device.
A comparison calculation is made to determine whether or not the printer speed is equal to or greater than the minimum printer speed TMIN.

If, as a result of such comparison calculation, the shutter speed TV obtained as a result of the calculation exceeds the limit of the maximum gloss speed TMAX or minimum shutter speed TMIN, the limit value TMAX or TMIN is Shutter speed TV is used for control instead of speed TV, but it goes without saying that at the same time an operation is performed to notify the photographer of this fact.

Next, the aperture value data AVo of the photographing/zoom device 2 is subtracted from the aperture value data AV for control, and AV - AVo = AV s . . .
-(12) The number of aperture stages AVs for aperture control is calculated. The reason why this camera system controls the number of stages of aperture reduction A Vs for aperture control is because the control mechanism of the photographic lens device 2 shown in FIG. 2 employs a number of stages control mechanism. be.

Through the RO calculation operations described above, the shutter speed TV and the control aperture stage number A V s based on the set aperture value AV
will be derived.

The photographer can check the result of the above calculation in the viewfinder 13, but the display at this time is shown in Figure 10 (a).
), the aperture value set with the dial 34 and the shutter speed obtained as a result of calculation are displayed together. Incidentally, the format of this display is as already explained.

Based on the above calculation results, the camera device performs exposure control after shutter release, but the lens device 2 has its aperture setting ring 8 selecting the mark 22, so the aperture setting is performed from the body 4 side. Preset control of the number of stages A V s is performed.

Note that the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is marked 22.
If 8. is not selected, it is impossible to preset the aperture stage number A Vs of the lens device 2 from the body 4 side. ! l) During actual exposure control, the lens device 2 is stopped down to the aperture position preset by the aperture setting ring 8. Therefore, in this camera system, in such a case, the aperture value displayed in the viewfinder 13,
That is, based on the aperture value set by the dial 34 on the body 4 side, nine aperture values are preset using the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side, and the calculated shutter speed and preset values are preset. Exposure can be controlled using aperture values. In addition, in such an open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, the image shown in Fig. 10(a) is displayed in the viewfinder 13.
- As shown in (Ill), an "M" character is displayed in addition to the aperture value set with the dial 34 and the calculated shutter speed, and it is necessary to manually set the aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 according to the display. As explained earlier, the photographer is made aware of the fact that there is a situation. Note that this manual exposure adjustment photographing mode can be said to have an aperture-priority character since the aperture value is first set using the dial 34. What is particularly interesting is that in this manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, care is taken to ensure that the aperture value preset or aperture set on the lens device 2 and the aperture value set using the dial 34 are always the same value. By adding this, this camera device performs aperture-priority AE shooting operation.

Now, when the mode selector 38 is set to the shutter speed priority side, the bar 64 is set to the open side, and the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is set to the position that selects the mark 12, the system sets the shutter speed. It becomes priority AE shooting mode.

At this time, the photometric amount BVo related to the subject brightness obtained as a result of photometry is as described above, but the maximum aperture value A of the lens device 2 is
Since Vo and the bending error A V c are included, for the actual subject brightness data BV, BVo = BV - AVo - AV
There are 6 things in the relationship that I mentioned earlier. On the other hand, in the mechanism part 358, data regarding the film sensitivity SV, data regarding the open aperture value of the Luns device 2, A V
o.

The shutter speed TV, etc. desired by the photographer is set, and the data AVc regarding the bending error AVc is also derived from the previous open aperture data AVo, as in the case of aperture priority.

Now, the input control section 36 from the TTL optical means 378 provided in the mechanism section 358 passes through the A-D converter 382.
The photometric data BVo taken into 0 is further sent to the central control unit 3.
62 and undergoes the following arithmetic processing.

First, the film sensitivity data SV is completely added to the photometric data BVo taken in as described above.

That is, BTo +SV = BV +S -AVo -A
The calculation Vc is performed, and from the above equation (2), this formula is BVo +SV = EV -AVo-A
Regarding the value corresponding to Vc, it is the same as in the case of aperture priority. Next, the aperture value data AVo and bending error data AV of the lens device 2 are added to the above calculation results.
Add c. That is, BVo +SV+AVo +AV
The calculation c=EV is performed, and through the above calculation, the appropriate exposure amount EV for the film used is calculated based on the photometric data.

As mentioned above, this operation is a digital operation, but if the operation register overflows due to the above series of operations, the maximum capacity of this operation register will be used as the operation result. .

Next, the shutter speed data TV set by the dial 34 is subtracted from the exposure amount Ev obtained as described above, and the result is EV - TV as is clear from equation (1): AV・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
(13), and the aperture value AV required to obtain proper exposure for the set shutter speed TV can be found.

Note that the aperture value AV obtained in this way is control data for satisfying the exposure amount EV calculated for the set shutter speed TV, but sometimes this calculation result is used in the lens device 2. There is a risk that the limit of the aperture value that can be controlled by the camera may be exceeded, and in such a case, it is necessary to notify the photographer of this to prevent erroneous operation. Therefore, in this camera system, the aperture value AV obtained as a result of calculation is the maximum aperture value AMAX that can be controlled by the lens device 2.
A comparison calculation is made to determine whether the aperture value is equal to or less than the minimum aperture value A V o or not. If, as a result of such comparison calculation, the aperture value AV obtained as a result of the calculation exceeds the limit of the maximum aperture value AMAX or the minimum aperture value AVo, then the limit value A
Instead of the aperture value AV found as a result of the MAX or AV of f calculation, the aperture value AV is used for control purposes, but of course an operation is also performed to notify the photographer of this fact. .

Next, from the aperture value data AV for control, the open aperture value data A V o of the photographic lens device 2 is subtracted AV - AV
o Two AV s are performed, and the number of diaphragm stages AV s for diaphragm control is calculated. The reason why this camera system performs aperture stage number A V s control for aperture control is that the control mechanism of the photographic lens device 2 shown in FIG. 2 employs a stage number control mechanism. As mentioned before.

Through the arithmetic operations as described above, the number of control aperture stages - AVs is derived based on the set shutter speed TV.

The photographer can check the result of the above calculation in the viewfinder 13, but the display at this time is shown in Figure 10 (a).
As shown in FIG. 3, the aperture value obtained as a result of calculation with the shutter speed set by the dial 34 is also displayed.The format of this display has already been described.

Based on the above calculation results, the camera device performs exposure control after shutter release, but the lens device 2
Since the aperture setting ring selects the mark 22, the preset control of the aperture stage number AVs is performed from the body 4 side.

Note that the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is marked 22.
Since this is selected, the number of aperture stages AVs from the body 4 side
Preset control is performed.

Note that the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is marked 22.
is not selected, it is impossible to preset the aperture stage number AVs of the lens device 2 from the body 4 side, and during actual exposure control, the lens device 2 will move to the aperture position preset by the aperture setting ring 8. It will be narrowed down to. Therefore, in this camera system, such a case is set as an open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, and the lens device 2 By presetting the aperture value using the side aperture setting ring 8, exposure control can be performed using the set shutter speed and the aperture value preset by the lens device 2.

In addition, in such an open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, the images shown in Figs. 10(a)-(1) are displayed in the viewfinder 13.
As shown in , an "M" character is displayed and the photographing lens device 2
As previously explained, the photographer is informed of the need to manually set the aperture value according to the display. Note that this manual exposure adjustment photographing mode can be said to have the character of giving priority to the shutter speed, since the shutter speed is first set using the dial 34.

Next, when the mode selector 38 is set to the aperture priority side, the aperture lever 64 is set to the aperture side, and the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is set to a position that presets a specific aperture value, the system operates. Aperture priority AE
Exit shooting mode. At this time, the photometric amount BVs related to the subject brightness obtained as a result of photometry includes the aperture stop value AV of the lens device 2 and the bending error AVc' as elements, as described above, but in this system, In this case, since it does not have a means to take in the aperture p value AV, it is impossible to determine the bending error, and therefore the bending error AVc' is ignored. Therefore, the photometric amount BVs has the relationship BVs = BV - AV with respect to the actual subject brightness data BV, as shown in the previous equation (5)◇
On the other hand, on the mechanism portion 358 side, data Sv regarding film sensitivity is set.

TTL photometry means 378 provided in the mechanism portion 358
The focused photometric data BVs inputted into the input control section 360 through the A/D converter 382 is further introduced into the central control section 362 and subjected to the following arithmetic processing.

First, film sensitivity data Sv is added to the photometric data BVs imported as described above.

That is, BVs + SV = BV - AV + SV...
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・α
This means that the operation a is performed, and this formula is the above-mentioned (
1) From equation (2), BVs + SV = EV - AV = TV...
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ a
Corresponds to ω, and through such calculation, the appropriate exposure EV
It is possible to derive the shutter speed TV required to obtain .

Note that the shutter speed TV obtained in this way is control data for satisfying the exposure amount Ev of formula 09 with respect to the aperture value AV of the lens device 2, which is stopped down. The result of the calculation is power.

There is a risk that the limit of the shutter speed ' given to the body 4 of the camera apparatus will be exceeded, and in such a case, it is necessary to notify the photographer of this to prevent erroneous operation. Therefore, in this camera system, the shutter speed TV calculated as a result of calculation is less than or equal to the maximum shutter speed TMAX of the Nyatta mechanism built into the body 4 of the camera device.
A comparison calculation is made to determine whether or not the shutter speed is greater than or equal to the minimum shutter speed TMIN. If, as a result of such comparison calculation, the shutter speed TV obtained as a result of the calculation exceeds the limit of the maximum shutter speed TMAX and the minimum shutter speed TMIN, the limit value TMAX or TMIN is changed to the shutter speed TV calculated as the result of the calculation. In place of this, the shutter speed TV is used for control, but it goes without saying that at the same time an operation is performed to notify the photographer of this fact.

Incidentally, in this shooting mode, the aperture value set using the dial 34 is completely ignored.

Through the arithmetic operations as described above, the shutter speed based on the aperture value of the photographing lens device 2 is derived.

The photographer can check the result of the above calculation in the viewfinder 13, but the display at this time is shown in Figure 10 (at
The format of this display is as shown in ITJ.The format of this display has already been explained.

Based on the above calculation results, the camera device performs exposure control after shutter release, but the shutter is
The aperture of the lens device 2 is controlled by the shutter speed TV on the side, and the aperture of the lens device 2 is held at the manually set aperture position in the stopped-down state.

Next, when the mode selector 38 is set to the shutter speed priority side, the aperture lever 64 is set to the aperture side, and the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is set to a position that presets a specific aperture value, the system operates. The mode is aperture metering and manual exposure adjustment shooting mode. At this time, the measured light amount BVs related to the subject brightness obtained as a result of photometry includes the aperture tightening aperture value AV of the lens device 2 and a bending error, and in this system, , since there is no means to input the aperture value AV, bending errors are ignored. As stated above, the photometric amount BVs has the relationship BVS = BV - AV with respect to the actual subject brightness data BV. On the other hand, the mechanism part 358
On the side, data Sv regarding film sensitivity, shutter speed TV desired by the photographer, etc. are set.

The focused photometry data BVs input from the TTL photometry means 378 provided in the front mechanism section 358 to the input control section 360 via the A-D converter 382 is further transmitted to the central control section 3.
62 and undergoes the following arithmetic processing.

First, film sensitivity data Sv is added to the photometric data BVs captured as described above.

In other words, BVS + 5V = BV - AV + SV Null operation is performed, but as mentioned earlier, this formula is KBV
s + 5V = EV - AV = TVK.Through this calculation, the shutter speed TV required to obtain the appropriate exposure EV can be derived.

Note that the shutter speed TV obtained in this way is calculated data for satisfying the exposure amount EV with respect to the aperture value AV of the lens device 2, but this calculated data does not necessarily depend on the camera device body. It is not the same as the shutter speed TV' for control set by the dial 34 of No. 4.

Therefore, if the photographer wants to achieve a proper exposure Ev, he or she must operate the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 to adjust the aperture so that the calculation data TV becomes equal to the setting data TV', or adjust the aperture to make the calculated data TV equal to the setting data TV'. It is necessary to adjust the shutter speed by changing the data of the speed TV' so that it becomes equal to the calculated data TV.

In this camera system, a permissible error range of 10Kl,'-(K2-Kl) is set for the calculation data TV obtained as a result of the calculation, and the shutter speed TV' set by the dial 34 is within the permissible error range. The configuration is such that the photographer is instructed to perform manual operations such as entering the camera through a display inside the finder 13.

The calculation operation will not be explained below, but first a constant of 1 is added to the shutter speed data, TV, obtained as a result of the calculation. If 1 in the data TV+ obtained as a result of this addition overflows the capacity of the operation register,
The maximum capacity of this calculation register is taken as the calculation result.

Next, the shutter speed data TV set from 1 to the data TV+ obtained as described above using the dial 34 is set.
If carry is found as a result of subtraction, this indicates that the set shutter speed data TV' is not within the allowable error range. It operates to give an instruction to reduce the amount of aperture, that is, to adjust the aperture to the open side or to reduce the setting data of the shutter speed data TV'. In addition, if no carry is obtained as a result of this subtraction, then the result of the subtraction TV 1 K 1- TV' is further reduced to a constant 2
Subtract TV0 to 1-TV'- to 2=TV-(K2
-Kl) -TV'・・・・・・・・・・・・06) Obtain the result. , if a carry appears as a result of this subtraction, it is assumed that the set shutter speed data W' is within the tolerance range of 1 to 1 - (1 to K2 -) with respect to the calculated shutter speed TV. If the carry does not come out, this indicates that the set shutter speed TV' is not within the allowable error range, and this camera system does not notify the photographer. It operates to give an instruction to increase the 2σ aperture of the lens device, that is, to adjust the aperture to a smaller aperture side, or to increase the setting data of the shutter speed data TV'.

Through the arithmetic operations as described above, it is determined whether or not the aperture amount of the photographic lens device 2 is appropriate for the set shutter speed TV', or conversely, the set shutter speed for the aperture amount of the photographic lens device 2 that has been apertured. The suitability of W' will be determined.

The photographer can check the results of the above discrimination in the viewfinder 13, but the display at this time is shown in Figure 10fa')
The format shown in (V) is adopted. The format of this display has already been explained, and based on this display, the photographer can adjust the optimal combination of shutter speed TV and aperture amount of the lens device 2 to obtain the proper exposure. .

In this mode, the camera device operates its shutter at the shutter speed TV' set by the photographer using the dial 34.
The aperture of the lens device 2 is controlled on the body 4 side based on
The aperture is held at the manually set aperture position by the photographer who is in the aperture-down state.

It should be noted that the display and manual operation by the photographer regarding this stop-down manual exposure adjustment photography have been described previously, so detailed explanations will be omitted here.

The above-mentioned modes of aperture-priority AE shooting, shutter-priority AE shooting, aperture metering with manual exposure adjustment, aperture-priority AE shooting with aperture priority, and manual exposure adjustment with aperture metering are all
It operates based on the amount of photometry from the TTL photometry means 378 provided in the mechanism section 358. However, as mentioned earlier, this camera system can be applied with an external photometry adapter. Next, the accessory shoe 50 of the camera device body 4
Consider the case where an external photometry adapter such as a reflected light photometer 350 or an incident light photometer 354 is attached to the camera. At this time, the camera device adopts three shooting modes (excluding pulp shooting). I can do things.

These three modes can be set to aperture priority AE or
You can select from shooting mode, shutter priority AE shooting mode, and external metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode.

Each of the above modes will be explained below, but they are not essentially different from the case where the TTL photometry means 378 is applied. However, at this time, it is especially important to keep in mind that the photometric amount obtained when the external photometric adapter is applied is completely different in nature from the photometric amount obtained through the TTL photometric means 378; In other words, the amount of photometry measured by the external photometer 350, 354, even if the photometry method is based on the reflected light method, will require special calculation operations.
Even if it is based on the incident light method, it is given as data corresponding to the subject brightness BV. Therefore, the maximum aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 used and the bending error AV are calculated based on the amount of photometry.
Since it does not include elements related to c etc., the subject brightness BV
There is no need for the process of calculating .

When shooting using this external metering adapter, the mode selector 38 is set to the aperture priority side, the aperture lever 64 is set to the open side, and the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is set to the manifold 1 side.
2, the system enters the external metering aperture priority AE shooting mode. At this time,
The photometric amount obtained as a result of photometry is the subject brightness Bv.
Therefore, there is no need to add the open aperture value AVo or the song 9 error AVc.

Other than this point, the subsequent calculation operations are exactly the same as in the aperture priority AE shooting mode described above. Furthermore, the display of the calculation results is exactly the same as in the aperture priority AE shooting mode, and is as shown in FIG. 10 (al-(Ill)).

Note that the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is marked 12.
If not selected, it is impossible to preset the aperture stage number AVs of the lens device 2 from the body 4 side, and during actual exposure control, the aperture is set by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side. controlled by the specified value. This means that it is necessary to manually set the same aperture value on the lens device 2 as set on the dial 34 of the body 4.

In this case, since the photometric amount is measured through an external photometric adapter, the same operation can be applied regardless of whether the lens device 2 is in an open or stopped-down state. Therefore, in this camera system, the lens device 2
If the aperture setting ring 8 on the side does not select YARK 12, the external metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode is set regardless of whether the lens device 2 is open or stopped, and the aperture value displayed in the viewfinder 13, that is, the body Based on the aperture value set using the dial 34 on the lens device 2 side, the aperture value is preset or aperture setting is performed using the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side, and the calculated shutter speed and preset are set. Otherwise, exposure control can be performed using a set aperture value. In addition, in this external metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, just as in the case of the open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, settings are made using the dial 34 in the viewfinder 13 as shown in FIG. 10 (al-). M" is displayed indicating that it is necessary to manually set the aperture value, the calculated shutter speed, and the lens device 2.

Also, when shooting using this external metering adapter,
When the mode selector 38 is set to the shutter speed priority side, the aperture lever 64 is set to the open side, and the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is set to the position where mark 12 is selected, the Nostem is set to external photometry shutter speed priority AE. The camera enters shooting mode. At this time, the photometric amount obtained as a result of photometry is
Since it directly corresponds to the subject brightness BV, there is no need to add the open aperture value AVo or the bending error AVc. Other than this point, the subsequent calculation operations are exactly the same as in the shutter speed priority AE photography mode described above. Furthermore, the display of the calculation results is exactly the same as in the shirt voice speed priority AE photographing mode, as shown in FIG. 10(a)-(1).

Note that the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is marked 12.
If not selected, it is impossible to preset the aperture stage number AVs of the lens device 2 from the body 4 side, and during actual exposure control, the aperture is set by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side. controlled by the specified value. This means that it is necessary to manually set the aperture value calculated based on the shutter speed, photometry amount, etc. set on the dial 34 on the lens device 2 side. In this case, since the photometric amount is measured through an external photometric adapter, the same operation can be applied regardless of whether the lens device 2 is in an open or stopped-down state. Therefore, in this camera system, if the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side does not select the mark 12, regardless of the open or aperture state of the lens device 2, external photometry manual exposure adjustment shooting is possible. mode, finder 1
Based on the aperture value displayed in 3, that is, the aperture value derived as a result of calculation, the aperture value is preset or narrowed down using the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side. Exposure can be controlled using the shutter speed calculated and the aperture value calculated.In this external metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, the exposure control in the viewfinder 13 is exactly the same as in the open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode. As shown in FIG. 10(a)-(1), the shutter speed set by the dial 34 and the calculated aperture value are displayed, along with the "M" display indicating that it is necessary to manually set the lens device 2. will be done.

Note that this external metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode also has an aperture-priority character or a shutter speed-priority mode depending on whether the mode selector 38 is set to aperture priority or shutter speed priority. It can be divided into two types with different characteristics, but there is no essential difference between them. However, if the mode selector 38 is set to the aperture priority side, the aperture value preset or aperture setting in the lens device 2 and the aperture value set by the dial 34 should always be the same value. As far as I can tell, this camera device performs aperture-priority AE shooting operation.

As mentioned above, when taking pictures using an external metering adapter, the calculation routine is T
This is the same as in the case of photographing using the TL photometry means.

The explanatory diagram of FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the photographing modes based on TTL photometry and external photometry and the calculation routines corresponding thereto, as described above. The figure shows the state of the mode selector 38, the state of the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2, the state of the aperture lever 64, the difference in light metering methods, etc.6, the shooting modes adopted by this camera system, and the four calculation routines. It shows. It has already been explained that when the mark 12 is selected with the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 and the aperture lever 64 is in the state where the aperture position of the lens device 2 is selected, the handling warning lock is activated as an erroneous operation. That's exactly what I did.

On the other hand, as previously mentioned, this camera system has the function of operating in close cooperation with an intransitive optical strobe.
Let's consider a case where 4 is applied to photography. This strobe device 384 can be used as an accessory for the camera device body 4.
After the strobe device 384 is attached to the shoe 50 and electrically connected to the body 4, when the strobe device 384 is ready to emit light, that is, when charging for emitting light is completed, the camera device enters the strobe photography mode. Switch.

At this time, as already explained, 16 shooting modes can be taken depending on how to set each condition of the camera device and strobe device. The operations performed are roughly divided into four routines.

These four calculation routines include the aperture setting dial 108 of the strobe device 384, the changeover switch 1. ．． 46. In particular, for various factors set on the camera device side, each control system determines and operates a corresponding mode.

The operating mode of this system depending on the settings of each part of the strobe device 384 and camera device is also shown in Figure xi (5), but the four calculation routines described above are , fully automatic, automatic dimming, automatic mode and semi-automatic mode, automatic mode, automatic dimming, automatic mode, fully automatic, full flash, manual mode, and semi-automatic, full flash, manual mode. The operations are also summarized into operations based on the calculation results of the four calculation routines.

Now, in the case of fully automatic/automatic light control/automatic mode, the strobe device 384 is in a state where it can automatically control light emission according to the aperture value and film sensitivity set by the aperture setting dial 108 and film sensitivity setting dial 106. On the other hand, on the camera device side, analog signal data VSA corresponding to the aperture value set by the aperture setting dial 108 is provided.
is given, and a charging completion signal 0. SA is given. This charge completion signal C8A includes a control signal that depends on the amount of current for fully automatic/semi-automatic mode, but as mentioned earlier, this charge completion signal C8A is in full automatic mode.
8A includes a control signal for the fully automatic mode, or the mode selector 38 on the camera device side is set to aperture priority.

The aperture value data taken into the camera device side is converted into a digital value by an A-D converter 382 and then sent to the central control unit 36.
2, but data regarding this aperture value VSA
is biased by a constant 08T2 with respect to the aperture value AV actually used for control. This is because the data VSA regarding the aperture value is imported as an analog value, and this analog value has a large number of stages.
Since there is a risk of incorrect input in the minute voltage range, it is necessary to apply an appropriate bias, and the digital conversion data DD is also adjusted by the amount corresponding to the bias with respect to the aperture value data AV actually used. This is because the data is large. Therefore, first VSA-O8T2=AV ・・・・・・・・・・・・
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ Perform the calculation αη to derive the control data AV regarding the aperture input from the strobe side 0 Obtained in this way The aperture value AV corresponds to the aperture setting dial 108 on the strobe device 384 side, but it is possible that the result of the aperture calculation may sometimes exceed the limit of the aperture value that can be controlled by the lens device 2. In such a case, it is necessary to notify the photographer of this fact to prevent erroneous operation. For this purpose, this camera system compares whether the aperture value AV set on the strobe device 384 side is less than the maximum aperture value AMAX that can be controlled by the lens device 2, and is greater than the minimum aperture value AVo. calculate. If, as a result of such comparison calculation, the aperture value AV exceeds the limit of the maximum aperture value AMAX or the minimum aperture value AVo, the limit value AMA
X or AVo is replaced with the aperture value AV set on the strobe device 384 side and is used as the aperture value AY for control, but of course an operation is performed to notify the photographer of this at the same time. be.

Next, the maximum aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 is subtracted from the aperture value data AV for control, AV - AV.

= AVs is performed and the number of aperture stages A for aperture control
Vs is calculated.

Note that the above calculations are performed in exactly the same way in the fully automatic, automatic light control, and manual modes. However, in this mode, data regarding the number of control aperture reduction stages AVs is not used for aperture control.

The photographer can check the result of the above calculation in the fender 13, but the display at this time or as shown in FIG. For example, the shutter speed is 1/60th of a second, the strobe device 384 is fully charged, and 'EF' is displayed to indicate that it is in strobe photography mode, and the aperture value AV used for control is displayed. In addition, in the case of manual mode, the aperture value AV displayed in the finder 13 must be manually set by the photographer on the lens device 2 side.
Therefore, "M" indicating this is also displayed as shown in FIG. 10 (C1 (ml).

The operations of the camera device and strobe device 384 in the fully automatic, automatic light control/automatic mode, and fully automatic/automatic light control/manual mode have already been described above.

Next, in the case of semi-automatic/automatic light control/automatic mode (the flash device 384 is in a state where it can automatically control light emission according to the aperture value and film sensitivity set by the aperture setting dial 108 and film sensitivity setting dial 106). However, on the camera device side, analog signal data V corresponding to the aperture value set by the aperture setting dial 108 is stored.
SA is applied, and a charge completion signal C8A is also applied. This charging completion signal C8A includes a control signal that depends on the amount of current related to fully automatic/semi-automatic, but in semi-automatic mode, as explained earlier, this charging completion signal C8A includes a control signal for semi-automatic mode. is included, and the mode selector 38 on the camera device side is set to give priority to shutter speed.

In this case, first, a comparison calculation is performed to determine which of the strobe synchronized shutter speed TSYN of the camera device body 4 and the shutter speed TV set by the dial 34 of the body 4 is greater. As a result of this comparison calculation, one of the lower shutter speeds is set as the shutter speed TV for control.

Next, a constant C3T2 corresponding to the bias is subtracted from the aperture value data VSA which has been input into the camera device from the strobe device 384 and converted into digital data.VSA-C8T
2=AV is performed to derive control data AV regarding the aperture input from the strobe side. Note that the aperture value AV obtained in this way corresponds to the aperture setting dial 108 on the strobe device 384 side, but sometimes this calculation result can be used to determine the aperture value υ that can be controlled by the lens device 2. The limit may be exceeded, and in such cases, it is necessary to notify the photographer of this to prevent erroneous operation. For this purpose, this camera system performs a comparison calculation to determine whether the aperture value AV set on the strobe device 384 side is less than the maximum aperture value AMAX that can be controlled by the lens device 2, and is greater than or equal to the minimum aperture value AVo. . If, as a result of such comparison calculation, the aperture value AV exceeds the limit of the maximum aperture value AMAX or the minimum aperture value AVo, the limit value AMA
X or AVo is replaced with the aperture value AV set on the strobe device 384 side and is used as the aperture value AV for control, but it goes without saying that at the same time an operation is performed to notify the photographer of this fact. .

Next, the maximum aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 is subtracted from the aperture value data AV for control, AV - AV.

= AVs is performed and the number of aperture stages A for aperture control
Vs is calculated.

Note that the above calculations are performed in exactly the same way in the semi-automatic, automatic light control, and manual modes. However, in this mode, data regarding the number of control aperture stages AVs is not used for aperture control.

The photographer can check the result of the above calculation in the viewfinder 13, but the display at this time is (V
), as shown in (Vl), which indicates that the selected shutter speed TV for control as a result of the previous comparison calculation and charging of the strobe device 384 have been completed and the flash photography mode is set. "EF" and the aperture value AV used for control are displayed. In addition, in the case of manual mode, the aperture value AV displayed in the viewfinder tick 13 must be manually set by the photographer on the lens device 2 side.
Therefore, as shown in (VT) in FIG. 10(C), an "M" indicating this is also displayed.

The operations of the camera device and the strobe device 384 in the semi-automatic/automatic light control/automatic mode and the semi-automatic/automatic light control/manual mode have already been described above.

Next, in the case of fully automatic/full flash/manual mode, the strobe device 384 is in a state where it can emit full flash without setting a special aperture value with the aperture setting dial 108; Then, analog signal data VSA at a level indicating that no aperture value is set is applied to the setting dial 108, and a charging completion signal O8A is also applied. This charging completion signal O8A includes a control signal that depends on the amount of current related to fully automatic/semi-automatic, but as mentioned earlier, the fully automatic mode is set in this charging completion signal C8A. This is the case when a control signal is included or the mode selector 38 on the camera side is set to aperture priority.

Note that the data VSA imported into the camera device side is analog data that overflows as a result of A-D conversion at the A-D converter 382, to indicate that no aperture value has been set on the strobe side. amount is set. Therefore, in the strobe photography mode, the A-D converter 38
2 overflows, this is taken into the camera device side as a signal indicating the full emission mode, and at this time, the aperture of the lens device 2 is not preset controlled from the body 4 side of the camera device.

Therefore, in such a case, it is necessary to manually preset the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side.

Such a control routine is carried out in exactly the same way in the fully automatic/full-power emission/minimum aperture mode.

However, in this mode, since the mark 12 is selected by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side,
The lens device 2 is in a state equivalent to being preset to the minimum aperture position, and its aperture is eventually controlled to the minimum aperture.

The photographer can check the state of the mode set by the above-mentioned discrimination operation in the viewfinder 13, but the display at this time is (+), (I) in Fig. 10(d).
As shown in I), the strobe synchronization speed TSYN,
For example, a shutter speed of 1/60th of a second and a strobe device 3
84 is completed and "EF" is displayed indicating that the camera is in strobe photography mode. In the case of manual mode, the "M" display indicating that the photographer needs to manually preset the aperture value of the lens device 2 is shown in Figure 10 (dl). However, in the case of the minimum aperture mode, the aperture of the lens device 2 is not set. No information is displayed.

The operations of the camera device and strobe device 384 in the fully automatic, full flash, and manual modes, as well as the fully automatic, full flash, and minimum aperture modes, have already been explained previously, so a more detailed explanation will be omitted. Don't do it.

Next, in the case of semi-automatic/full flash/manual mode, the strobe device 384 does not need to specially set the aperture value with the aperture setting dial 108, that is, the manual mode display 110
By setting the aperture setting dial 108, the camera device becomes fully capable of emitting light, but on the other hand, analog signal data VSA at a level indicating that no aperture value is set on the aperture setting dial 108 is given to the camera device, and charging is completed. Signal O8A is provided. This charging completion signal C8A includes a control signal that depends on the amount of current related to full automatic mode and semi-automatic mode, but in semi-automatic mode, as explained earlier, this charging completion signal C8A includes a control signal for semi-automatic mode. is included, and the mode selector 38 on the camera device side is set to give priority to shutter speed.

In this case, first, a comparison calculation is performed to determine which of the strobe synchronized shutter speed T8YN of the camera device body 4 and the shutter speed TV set by the dial 34 of the body 4 is thicker. As a result of this comparison operation, the lower speed 7
The shutter speed is used as the shutter speed TV for control.

Next, the data VSA imported from the strobe device 384 to the camera device side indicates that no aperture value has been set on the strobe side, as a result of A-D conversion by the A-D converter 382.・The analog quantity is set such that it flows. Therefore, when the A-D converter 382 overflows in the strobe photography mode, this is taken into the camera device as a signal indicating the full emission mode. At this time, the aperture reset control of the lens device 2 is not performed from the body 4 side of the camera device.

Therefore, in such a case, it is necessary to manually preset the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side.

Incidentally, such a control routine is performed in exactly the same manner in the semi-automatic, full-power emission, and minimum aperture modes. However, in this mode, the mark 12 is selected by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side, so the lens device 2 is in a state equivalent to being preset to the minimum aperture position, and eventually The aperture will be controlled to the maximum diameter.

The photographer can check the state of the mode set by the above-mentioned discrimination operation in the viewfinder 13, and the display at this time is
As shown in FIG.
``BF'' is displayed to indicate that charging has been completed and the camera is in strobe photography mode. In addition, in the case of manual mode, "M" is displayed to indicate that the photographer needs to manually preset the aperture value of the lens device 2, as shown in (I+1) in Fig. 10(d). However, in the case of the minimum aperture mode, the aperture of the lens device 2 is not set, so in order to inform the photographer of this,
As shown in (1) of FIG. 10(d), no information regarding the aperture is displayed.

The operations of the camera device and strobe device 384 in the semi-automatic, full-volume, and manual modes, as well as the semi-automatic, full-volume, and minimum aperture modes, have already been described, and therefore will not be described in further detail.

In addition, if the bulb is selected on the body 4 side of the camera device in the strobe photography mode, the control regarding fully automatic or semi-automatic in each strobe photography mode described above, that is, the automatic speed regarding the shutter speed. Bulb photography becomes possible with priority over decision control.

Therefore, in the bulb flash photography mode, no special calculation is performed, and the same calculation control as in each strobe photography mode described above is performed only to control the aperture of the photographic lens device. It happens.

Therefore, in this camera system, there are 4 routines for calculations for exposure control based on photometry results, 4 routines for calculations for exposure control based on strobe photography, and a total of 8 general calculation control routines. Various photographic modes are realized by irregularly applying these eight general calculation control routines.

This camera system, which includes the calculation routines described above, takes in setting input data, setting conditions, and operating conditions, and performs calculations and controls each mechanism based on comprehensive judgment, and is applicable to such a system. The control system that will be used will need to be arranged efficiently based on rational considerations.

In other words, the eight calculation routines mentioned above are the center of the system, and in response to the demands of the various shooting modes desired by the photographer, data input from the outside is automatically determined and input into the system, and the data input from the outside is automatically determined and incorporated into the system. This function detects incorrect settings or incorrect operations associated with various mechanical constraints, and notifies the photographer of the situation, and displays information necessary for various types of shooting, and has an effect on the mechanical operation of the camera mechanism. There is a need to realize a control system that makes it possible to set control signals and control sequences that are consistent with each other.

From this point of view, a control circuit as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 30 was constructed.
64 is shown more specifically.

This system is basically controlled by clock pulses CP, and for this purpose a clock pulse generator 542 is provided in the central control section 362. Although this clock pulse CP is distributed throughout the system, this clock pulse generator 542 can be specifically realized through a configuration as shown in FIG. 31. The clock period of this clock pulse CP is extremely important for measuring real time, which will be explained later.
1. It is necessary to sufficiently adjust and set the variable resistor 542A shown in the figure.

This clock pulse CP is introduced into a system pulse generator 544, which generates a system pulse as shown in FIG. 32 based on the clock pulse CP. . The system pulses are composed of force 1 counter pulses OTI~OT4 and timing pulses TBO''~TB7, etc., and various operations of this camera system are controlled by the system pulses OTI~OT4 and timing pulses TBO''~TB7.
It is done on a pulse basis. In addition, in this system,
The period between timing pulses TBO to TB7 is defined as one word time.

The specific configuration of this system pulse generator 544 is shown in FIG. 33, and the system pulse generator 544 has counter pulses OTI, OT2 . CD402 to generate OT4
9 (manufactured by ROA) is used, and a timing pulse TB is used.
0D4t)28 (BOA
0, which uses a decoder using integrated circuit elements manufactured by
The integrated circuit element CD4029, whose detailed logic diagram is shown in FIG. 34, is functionally an up/down counter; Advancement
It is used as a counter. With this configuration, by inputting the clock pulse CP to the clock pulse terminal CLK, the third
Counter pulses CTI to CT4 as shown in FIG. 2 can be obtained, respectively.

Further, the integrated circuit element CD4028, whose detailed logic diagram is shown in FIG. 35, functionally constitutes a binary value decoder. In this system, by inputting the counter pulses OTI, OT2°CT4 to the A to C terminals of this element, the timing pulses TBO to TBO as shown in FIG. 32 are output from the output terminals QO to Q7. It is possible to obtain TB7.

The timing obtained as described above... Kurusu TBI~
TB6 is given to the dry nozzle circuit 546, from which it is given to the display means 402 through the timing line 394 as a digit pulse for dynamically driving the timing display means 402, and the film sensitivity input mechanism 518, Open aperture/MNA
L and 5 PDW signal setting input mechanism 522, AV/TV
Also, the ASLO setting mechanism 528 and the maximum aperture setting mechanism 53
6 is applied to each of the mechanisms through a timing line 394 as a timing pulse for data acquisition.

Here, the film sensitivity input mechanism 518 has a configuration as shown in FIG. 12, and the film sensitivity Sv' can be sequentially extracted from the lower digits in synchronization with the timing pulses TBI to TB6.

The details have already been described above. The data S■ regarding the film sensitivity is input by closely matching data set with 1/3 step precision with 1/8 step precision. That is, initially from the film sensitivity input mechanism 518, 1" is set to the bit with the weight of 14 steps for the weight of 14 steps, and the bit with the weight of b step for the weight of % step, respectively. It has already been mentioned that data Sv' related to the film sensitivity is taken into the camera system by this method.However, as it is, it does not become an approximation data for the h-stage stacking degree, so the bit corresponding to the weight of the b-stage or 14 stages is The data S' relating to the film sensitivity that is captured by setting "1" to "1" is transferred to the camera system as data approximated by the b-stage weight by unconditionally setting "1" to the bit corresponding to the weight of the h-stage. We have already mentioned what needs to be incorporated into the formula.This is just an approximation of equations (6) and (7) as is.

Here, the role of setting "1" in the bit with the weight of h stage of data Sv' regarding film sensitivity S■ and converting it to the desired film sensitivity data S■ of h stage stacking degree is as follows.
This is a set circuit 520. This set circuit 520 receives data Sv' related to film sensitivity, which are sequentially input from the lower digits in synchronization with timing pulses TBI to TB6.
If "1" is detected in a bit with a weight of 4, that is, a bit input in synchronization with TBI, or a bit with a false weight, in other words, a bit input in synchronization with TB2, the TBO of the next word time Set "1" at the timing of
It is possible to obtain film sensitivity data S■ of h stage stacking degree synchronized with TBO to TB6.

The detailed circuit diagram of the set circuit 520 is shown in FIG. 36, and as is clear from the figure, the signals are sequentially input from the lower digits in synchronization with the timing pulses TB1 to TB6. Data regarding film sensitivity
The lower two digits of V', that is, the bits with 14-stage weights synchronized with TBl or the bits with %-stage weights synchronized with TB2, are set to ``1''.
, 1 by the timing pulse TBI or TB2 inputted through the AND gate), and by making the output of the AND gate AND 1 the input signal of the J input terminal of the flip-flop F1. , detects that "1" is set in a bit having a weight of 1 or 7 in the input data SV', and stores it. At this time, the Q output of the flip-flop F1 becomes 1'', and this "1" output is read out through AND2 in synchronization with the first timing pulse TBO of the next word time. The output of &-IAND2 is
Or Game) Through OR2, film sensitivity data SV
The timing pulse Tβ is a bit of the h-stage weight of
Since it is output in synchronization with O, the film sensitivity Sv is eventually taken out as h-stage stack data synchronized with timing pulse TBO to TB6.

In the following explanation, the output (2) of the OR gate OR2 will be referred to as film sensitivity setting data DTSV.

In addition, the aperture value/MNAL, 5PDW setting mechanism 5
22 has a configuration as shown in FIG. 14, and outputs the MNAL signal in synchronization with the timing pulse TBI, the 5PDW signal in synchronization with the timing pulse TB2, and the MNAL signal in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to TB6. and lens device 2
Data regarding the open aperture value AVo (gray/
code) can be extracted sequentially from the high-order digits.The details are as described above.

The open aperture value data AVo is the gray code equivalent data AVo (gray code) is the open aperture value MN.
It has already been mentioned that the AL, 5 PDW setting mechanism 522 sequentially inputs from the upper digits in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to TB6, but the information input from the setting mechanism 522 includes the MNAL signal. Ya 5
Since the PDW signal is also included, open aperture value A is selected from this.
It is necessary to separate only data AVo' (gray code) related to Vo. The signal separation circuit 524 serves as the key to this purpose. This signal separation circuit 524 receives data AVo (gray code) regarding the open aperture value AVo that is input in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to T86.
The data AVo (
Gray code) is the following Gray code binary -
Open aperture value data AV through code converter 526.

is converted to As already mentioned above, it is necessary to set the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 to be used in accordance with the Gray code, but this Gray code binary code converter 526 is similar to that shown in FIG. The data AVo (gray code) regarding the open aperture value AVo, which is input sequentially from the upper digits in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to TB6, is a binary code.
code and timing pulses TB2 to TB
It is possible to obtain data AVo of each stage precision synchronized with 5.

The detailed circuit diagram of the signal separation circuit 524 and the Gray code/binary code converter 526 is shown in FIG. 37, and as is clear from the figure, the timing pulses TB3 to TB6 are The data AVo (gray code) regarding the open aperture value AVo, which is input sequentially from the upper digits in synchronization with the timing pulse T
MN is determined by the AND gate AND3 receiving the output of the NOR gate NOR,1 inputted with BI and TB2.
Separated from AL signal, 5PDW signal, etc., 4-bit parallel input parallel output shift register CD4035
(made by RCA) directly to the J terminal, and the inverter I to the K terminal.
Granted through NVI.

This integrated circuit element CD4035 has a detailed logic circuit configuration diagram shown in FIG. 38, and the logic configuration of the transmission gate shown in the figure is shown in FIG. 39.

This CD4035 operates as a serial shift register when "0" is input to the P/s terminal, and "0" is input to the P/s terminal.
1" input, it is configured to operate as a parallel shift register, and these 5 terminals include a flip 70 which receives timing pulse TB2 at the J input terminal and receives timing pulse TB6 at the J input terminal. Tsugu F2's Q
Output is input. That is, this flip-flop F2 is set in synchronization with the rising edge of the clock pulse CP- following the rising edge of the timing pulse TB2, that is, the rising edge of TB3, and is set in synchronization with the rising edge of the clock pulse CP- after the timing pulse TB2 rises, and is set in synchronization with the rising edge of the clock pulse CP- after the rising edge of the timing pulse TB2. It is reset in synchronization with the rising edge of pulse CP, that is, the falling edge of TB6, and TB3 to TB3 to which data AVo (gray code) regarding the open aperture value AVo is input.
During TB6, a "0" input is applied to the s terminal of the CD4035, causing the CD4035 to operate as a serial shift register.

Now, the integrated circuit element 0D4035 is a serial type shifter.
While operating as a register, if serial data of mutually inverted Gray codes are input to the terminal of J, sequentially from the upper digits, this means that the same serial data is input to the terminal of J. Corresponding to input, gray code serial data is converted to binary code serial data and stored. This operation is performed while timing pulses TB3 to TB6 are being generated to which data AVo (gray code) regarding the open aperture value AVo is input.

After the above operation, when the timing of timing pulse TB7 is reached, the clip-flop F2 is reset and its Q output becomes "L", so the CD4035, which receives this Q output at its 5 terminal, is a parallel type shifter.・It will operate as a register, but this C! D40.35 is its Q
3 output is given to D2 human power, Q2 output is given to D1 human power, and Q1 output is given to DO human power, so this CD4035
is while "1" input is given to terminal 5, that is
It will operate as a register in series between B7 and TB2. At this time, from the QO terminal, the open aperture value data AVo, which has been binary-converted and stored in this register from the higher digits, is sequentially transmitted from the lower digits to the timing pulse T.
This data AVo, which is to be output in synchronization with B7 to TB2, is taken out through the AND gate AND4, which receives the Q output of the flip-flop F2, which is in the reset state during the timing pulses TB7 to TB2. , this data AVo differs from other data in the correspondence between the weight of each bit and the timing/passage.

Therefore, after providing a delay time of 3 bits through flip-flops F3 to F5,
From the Q output terminal of 5, timing pulses TB2 to T
Data synchronized with B6 will be extracted. In this way, the open aperture value AYo is taken out as η stage stacking data synchronized with the timing pulses TB2 to TB6.

In the following explanation, the Q output (2) of the flip-flop F5 will be referred to as open aperture value data DTAO.

The open aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 used, obtained as described above, has a close relationship with the curvature error AVc during open metering, and calculations for the exposure side leg depending on open metering are performed. In this case, it is necessary to consider this bending error AMc. This bending error AVc is the maximum aperture value AV of the photographic lens device 2 used.

However, in the system of this embodiment, the maximum aperture value AVo that is considered to be input is
For each of the above, the corresponding bending error data AV
c is prepared in advance, and the curve error data AVc corresponding to the input aperture value AVo is selected and imported. Such bending error data AVc is stored in fixed data RO, M528, and is selected as appropriate in accordance with the input aperture value AVo, and is stored in the lower digits as five-stage stack data synchronized with timing pulses TBO to TB3. It is output sequentially from .

The detailed configuration for capturing the bending error as described above is shown in FIG.
28, the output Q2 of this decoder
- Q9 is set to output "1". The output of the decoder is applied to a ROM which stores a plurality of bending errors AVc in advance, and outputs 4-bit bending error data AVc written in an address corresponding to the decoder output. The output of these R, OM is the timing buffer CD
4042 each DI.

It is applied to the D2, D3, and D4 input terminals. This timing buffer OD4042 is an integrated circuit element manufactured by RcA, and a block diagram thereof is shown in FIG. 40. This timing buffer has ■cc applied to its Pol terminal, and therefore has the function of taking in the output of the ROM at the timing of TB7 and storing and outputting it at a timing other than TB7. It is at the rising edge of TB7 that the OD 4035 converts the open aperture value AVo into binary and completes the capture, and at this point the register OD 403
5 QO, Ql, Q2. What begins to be output in parallel from the Q3 terminal is the binary-converted open aperture value AVo.
Therefore, it is at the timing of TB7 that the output of the ROM becomes the aperture error AVc corresponding to the input aperture value AVo, and therefore, the output at this time is taken in at the timing of TB7. Therefore, the required bending error AVc
This is to obtain.

゛As described above, the timing buffer CD40
The bending error data AVc stored in 42 are QO, Ql,
Q2. X of the integrated circuit element MC14539 (manufactured by Motorola) that is output from the Q3 terminal and then converted to serial data.
They are input to the O, XI, X2° and X3 terminals, respectively. The block diagram of this integrated circuit element MC14539 is shown in FIG. 41, the truth table is shown in FIG. 42, and the specific logic diagram is shown in FIG. 43.
2. The bending error data AVc that is input in parallel through the It is output from the Z terminal as In this way, the bending error AVc is calculated from the integrated circuit element MC1453 as h-stage stacking data synchronized with the timing pulses TBO to TB3.
It will be taken out from the Z terminal of 9.

In the following description, the integrated circuit element MC1
The Z terminal output of 4539 is the bending error data DTAC.
It is called.

Further, the TV/AV/ASLO setting mechanism 528
The ASLC signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TB1, and the shutter speed TV or aperture value AV set by the dial 34 is synchronized with the timing pulses TB2 to TB6. Each can be taken out. The details have already been described.

The data such as the shutter speed TV and aperture value AV set by the dial 34 is AV-TV.

Timing pulse T through ASLO setting mechanism 528
As mentioned above, the data from the setting mechanism 528 is taken in in synchronization with B2 to TB6, but the data from the setting mechanism 528 corresponds to the shutter speed TV and the aperture value AV. There is no distinction between However, whether this data is captured as shutter speed TV or aperture value depends on the aperture setting signal A that is captured in synchronization with the timing pulse of TBl.
It is determined by SLC. Note that the data is taken in from the AV-TV and ASLC setting mechanism 528 together with the aperture setting signal ASLO, and from among the output signals of the setting mechanism 528, the timing pulses 17 to TB6 are
The signal separating circuit 53'2 separates the data taken in in synchronization with the data. The data separated by the signal separation circuit 532 can be used as is as data AV related to the aperture value, but in order to use this data as data related to the shutter speed TV, as already mentioned above, You need to double it. This is because the minimum unit for setting the aperture value AV using the dial 34 is 1 or 7 steps, whereas the minimum unit for the shutter speed TV set through the common dial 34 is 1 step. The TV is set so that the aperture value AV and the minimum unit of data match each other, and when this data is later used as a shutter speed, it is multiplied by two. To achieve this purpose, the
The data is output through the doubling circuit 530 as data T-■ regarding the shutter speed. Note that the action of this doubling circuit 5300 is
0 or more in that it gives data a delay of one timing pulse so that data input in synchronization with pulses T82 to TB6 is output as data synchronized with timing pulses TB3 to TB7. , as described above, the data TV regarding the set shutter speed is stored in the timing nodes TB3 to TB7.
The data AV related to the set aperture value will be input as data for the b-stage density in synchronization with the timings TB2 to TB6. It will be done.

The specific circuit configuration diagram of the signal separation circuit 532 and the doubling circuit 530 described above is as shown in FIG.
・AV, ASLC! The output of the setting mechanism 528 is inputted with the timing pulse TBI through the inverter INV2, and the gate AND4 separates only the signals related to TV-AV that are synchronized with the timing pulses TB2 to TB6. If you want to use the data separated in this way as information about the aperture value, you can leave it as is, but
In order to obtain data related to shutter speed, flip
At the flop F6, the data is delayed by one clock time and taken out as one-stage stack data synchronized with the timing pulses TB3 to TB7.

In addition, in the following explanation, the above-mentioned "and"'f-I
The output (2) of the AND4 is referred to as edge setting data DTAV, and the Q output (2) of the flip-flop F6 is referred to as shutter speed setting data DTTV.

Further, the maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536 has a configuration as shown in FIG.
Maximum aperture value A of photographic lens device 2 used in synchronization with TB6
It is possible to extract data AMAX regarding MAX, which has already been mentioned.

This maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536 does not generate the maximum aperture value data AMAX by itself, but generates the required maximum aperture value data A M from among a large number of fixed data stored in the fixed data FtOM534. This is to selectively output AX. That is, the maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536
As shown in FIG.
l, F16. F22. F32. Timing pulses TBI to TB6 correspond to each of F45° and F64, so data is introduced and accumulated in series from the maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536 to the serial manual-parallel output register 538, and then the data is input to the register 538. Looking at which bit is outputting "1", we can see that the maximum aperture value AMAX of the photographic lens device 2 used is Fil, F16°F22. F32
．． F45. It becomes clear which one is F64. Therefore, the parallel output of the register 538 is transferred to the fixed data ROM 5.
34, and when a signal specifying the maximum aperture value AMAX is input from the instruction ROM 504 (described later) to the fixed data ROM 534, the maximum aperture value AMAX specified by the register 538 is output.

In addition, the maximum aperture value AMAX is fixed data R, OL153.
A specific configuration for deriving from 4 will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, the aperture value/MNAL, 5PDW setting mechanism 5
The M N A L signal and the 5PDW signal inputted from 22 in synchronization with the timing pulses TB1 and TB2 are introduced into the condition signal storage circuit 548, where the two signals are separated based on the timing pulses and stored. . the result,
From the condition signal storage circuit 548, MNAL to M
It is possible to obtain a NAL signal and a 5PDW or 5PDW signal.

The condition signal storage circuit 548, whose detailed configuration is shown in FIG. and 5P
Of the DW signals, the MNA L signal is the timing pulse T.
The 5PDW signal is detected and stored by the flip-flop FIO which has B2 as its clock input, and the 5PDW signal is detected and stored by the flip-flop FIL which has the timing pulse TB3 as its clock input.

As a result, the MNAL signal is output from the Q output terminal of the flip-flop F10, and the MNAL signal is output from the Q output terminal of the flip-flop F10.
Also, an 8PDW signal is output from the Q output terminal of the clip-flop Fil, and a 5PDW signal is output from the mutual output terminal.

Furthermore, the ASLO signal inputted from the TV-AV-A SLO setting mechanism 528 in synchronization with the timing pulse TB1 is introduced into the condition signal storage circuit 548, and is inputted based on the timing pulse. Separated and stored. As a result, an ASLC signal or an ASLC signal can be obtained from the condition signal storage circuit 548.

Regarding the details of this, as shown in FIG. 45, the TV, AV, ASLO setting mechanism 528φ\ etc. The AsLO signal inputted in synchronization with the timing signal TBI clocks the timing pulse TB2. The signal is detected and stored by the input flip-flop F9, so that the A8LO signal is output from the Q output terminal of the flip-flop F9, and the ASLC signal is output from the output terminal of the flip-flop F9.

On the other hand, the condition signal storage circuit 548 takes in the data separated by the signal separation circuit 532 in synchronization with the timing pulses TB2 to TB6, but this is not possible depending on the dial 34 (when the valve mode is This is to determine when the selection is made.In other words, in this system, all bits of the data set by the dial 34 are 0.
'' is considered to be the pulp mode. Therefore, if only a ``0'' signal is input during the timing pulses TB2 to TB6, the valve mode is determined by detecting this fact.

That is, the condition signal storage circuit 548 has the function of detecting and storing when there is no "1" output from the output terminal of the signal discriminating circuit 532 during the timing pulses TB2 to TB6.

This storage signal is output from the condition signal storage circuit 548 as a BLB signal or a reverse BLB signal indicating that the shutter speed is in the pulp mode button.

Note that the details are also shown in FIG. 45. Data input from the TV, AV, and ASLO setting mechanism 528 in synchronization with the timing pulses TBI to TB6 is inputted to the timing pulse TB1 through the inverter INV3. After the ASLC signal synchronized with the timing pulse TBI is removed by the input AND5, the ASLC signal is input to the J input terminal of the clip flop F7. The flip-flop F7 receives the clock pulse CP as its clock input, and also receives the timing pulse TBI at its input terminal. The Q output of this flip-flop F7 is further connected to another J- flip-flop F8.
However, the Q output is given to the J input terminal. Note that a clock pulse TBO is input to the J- as a clock input of the flip-flop F8.

In this configuration, when the timing pulse TBI is input to the input terminal of the flip-flop F7,
Flip-flop F7 is temporarily placed in a reset state in synchronization with the rise of the next clock pulse CP. At this time, the timing pulse T is output from the AND gate AND5.
If there is even one "1" output between BI and TB6, this flip-flop F7 enters a set state and its Q output becomes "1". This “■” output is a clip
Since it is a terminal input to flop F8, even if TBO is input as a clock input to this flip-flop F8,
Flip-flop F8 is in the reset state, so its Q output is held at 0.
Timing pulse TBI~T B 6 (7
) If there is no 1" output during K, this flip-flop F7 holds the reset state and its output also remains "1". This "1" output
Since it becomes the J terminal input of the flip-flop F8, when TBO is input as the clock input of the flip-flop F8, the flip-flop F8 becomes set state and its Q output is held at "1". This state is AND gate A
At least one from ND5 to TB2 to TB6.”
1" is output, it is canceled at the next TBO time. As described above, the BLB signal is output from the Q output terminal of the flip-flop F8, and the BL signal is output from the Q output terminal of the flip-flop F8.
The B signal will be output.

Through the configuration described above, the condition signal storage circuit 5
From 48, the MNAL signal is generated depending on the settings of various conditions in the mechanism section 358.

A signal will be output.

On the other hand, various data, condition setting signals, state determination signals, etc. are also input from the mechanism section 358 to the input control section 360.

Analog output from TTL photometry means 378 or terminal 56
The analog signal input from the signal switching circuit 380 is controlled by the current h++ current detector 386.
is selectively input to the A-D converter through
-D converter includes reference level generation means 550, A-D conversion control circuit 552. Integrator 554. Integrator control means 55
5', comparator 556° counter 558. It consists of a flip-flop 560° 562 and a buffer register 564.

A-D converters with dual lamp A-D
A well-known A-D converter called converter,
The input analog data is integrated in the positive direction for a certain period of time to obtain an integration level proportional to the input analog data, and then, from the integration level, it is integrated in the negative direction based on a predetermined constant level signal. Then, the initially input analog data is made to correspond to the time from the start to the end of this integration in the negative direction, and the reference pulse signal is counted during that time. The digital converter is configured to obtain a digital conversion value of the input analog data.

In the A-D converter having such a configuration, the integrator 554 is used to integrate the input analog data in the positive direction and the reference level signal in the negative direction, and also integrates the reference level signal in the negative direction. Means 550 is for generating said reference level signal and said integrator control means 55.
In order to clear the residual integral value of 5, the A-D conversion control circuit 552 also controls the signal input to the integrator 554,
That is, in order to switch between the analog data and the reference level signal and to switch the integrator 554 between positive and negative ramps, the comparator 556 connects the output of the integrator 55.4 and the reference level signal (in this implementation). In order to detect the completion of negative integration by comparing the ground level (in the example), the counter 558 measures a certain time when the input analog data is integrated in the positive direction for a certain period of time, and also outputs a reference level signal. In order to measure the integration time when integrating in the opposite direction,
The buffer register 564 is used to capture and store the contents of the counter 558 when the integrator 554 finishes integrating the reference level signal in the opposite direction. The integrator 55 is input through the A-D conversion control circuit 552.
In order to generate a signal for switching the signal applied to 4 and switching the integration direction of the integrator 554, that is, switching the ramp, the flip-flop 562 also operates when the counter 558 is over 70 as a result of the A/D conversion. - They are each used to output a detection command signal for detecting an event.

The comparator 556 is configured to output "1" when there is an input integral value, and output "0" when the input integral value falls below a certain level.

When starting A-D conversion in such a configuration,
Initially, the A/D conversion control circuit 552 takes in analog data input from its a input terminal and supplies it to the integrator 554. At this time, the clip 70 tube 560 is still in the reset state, and therefore the integrator 554 is set to integrate in the positive direction, so the input analog data is integrated in the positive direction by the integrator 554. be done. At the same time, counter 558 begins counting in synchronization with clock pulse CP. As mentioned above, the counter 558 is used for time control and acquisition of A/D conversion data, and divides the input clock pulse CP appropriately to create a reference time. The configuration is such that a reference time is counted.

After the counting operation as described above, when the counter 558 overflows, that is, after a certain period of time has passed after the start of counting, the contents of the counter 558 become all "0" and at the same time, the flip-flop 560 is set. be done. (1) The fact that the clip flop 560 is set indicates that a certain period of time has elapsed since the counter 558 started counting, and this fact still depends on the integrator 554. This means that the input analog data has been integrated for a certain period of time. It goes without saying that the output of the integrator 554 at this time is proportional to the input analog data.

The output of the flip-flop 560 is given to an A-D conversion control circuit 552, and the input given to the integrator 554 is sent from a reference level generation means 550 connected to the b terminal side of the A-D conversion control circuit 552. By setting the integrator 554 to integrate in the negative direction at the same time as switching to the reference voltage signal, the integrator 554 integrates the reference voltage signal in the opposite direction. Therefore, based on the reference voltage from the b input terminal, the data stored in the integrator 554 as a result of the previous data integration is inversely integrated. On the other hand, it overflows first and its contents are all “0”.
”, the counter 558 continues counting.

At this time, it is obvious that the amount counted by the counter 558 and the amount of inverse integration by the integrator 554 are in a proportional relationship. As a result of this inverse integration, when the output of this integrator 554 reaches a certain value, that is, when the inverse integration corresponding to the amount of integration of the analog data previously integrated for a certain period of time is completed, the output of the comparator 556 becomes " This is detected because it changes from "1" to "0", but at this time, the buffer register 564 immediately receives and stores the counted quantity of the counter 558 based on the change in the output of the comparator 556. do. At this time, the counted amount of the counter 558 stored in the buffer register 564 corresponds to the amount of inverse integration by the integrator 554, that is, the analog data that was previously integrated for a certain period of time by the integrator 554. It is. In the system of this embodiment, after such operation, the buffer register 564
The counted amount of the counter 558 introduced and stored in the input analog data is used as digital conversion data corresponding to the input analog data.

Note that even after the above operation, the counter 558 continues counting, and as a result of this counting, if the counter 558 overflows again, the contents of the counter 558 are all "
0'', and at the same time, the flip-flop 560 is reset and the flip-flop 562 is set. By resetting the flip-flop 560, the A-D conversion control circuit 552 temporarily controls the integrator. After clearing the integrator 554 through the means 555, the analog data input from the a input terminal is taken in and applied to the integrator 554, and the analog data is integrated again. Since this A-D converter repeats the same operation thereafter, the system of this embodiment always repeats new analog data, A-D converts it, and takes in the buffer register 564. The contents are constantly updated with digital data corresponding to new input analog data.

Note that the operating state of this AD converter must always be detected by the system, and a logic circuit 566 is provided for this purpose. This logic circuit 566 is
an INT signal that captures the output signal of the comparator 556 flip-flop 560, 562 and indicates that the input analog data is being integrated by the integrator 554;
The ADOB signal indicates that the A-D conversion has been completed and it is possible to transfer and read the A-D converted data.As a result of the A-D conversion, the input analog data is too large and the counter 55
Outputs an ADOF signal indicating that 8 has overflowed.

As described above, the analog data introduced from the mechanism section 358 to the input control section 360 is stored in the buffer register 564 as digital conversion data DD, but this data DD is transferred through the signal switching circuit 568. , based on the command from the logic circuit 566, a digital signal synchronized with the timing pulses TB0-TB7.
Input bus line 370 as data, starting from the lower digit
and transferred to the central control unit 362.

On the other hand, the INT signal output from the logic circuit 566 is placed on the bus line 366 as a signal synchronized with the timing pulse TB7, and the ADOB signal is sent as a signal synchronized with the timing pulse TB6.

Note that the details will be explained later.

The terminal 54 of the mechanical part 358 receives a strobe charging completion signal 08A and a signal OLM indicating the external light metering adapter mode.
As mentioned earlier, these signals include the CGUP signal, which indicates whether or not the strobe charging is completed by the current detector 386, and the shutter speed when shooting with the strobe, which is fully automatic. The FAT signal indicates that the external photometry adapter is applied, and the OLM signal indicates that the external photometry adapter is applied. These signals are further converted into two signals CU and AO by the encoder 570.0 This OU and AO flaw signal.As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 47, when the OU multiplied signal is "0", the system At this time, if the AO flaw signal is "0", it will instruct TTL photometry shooting mode, and "1" will be used.
”, it will instruct the external metering shooting mode. If the OU multiplication signal is “1”, it will instruct the system to flash shooting mode, and if the AO multiplication signal is “0”, the shutter will be activated. Instructs to control the speed semi-automatically, and selects “1
”, this is an instruction to control the shutter speed fully automatically. These signals OU and AO are applied to terminals a and b of the multiplexer 572, respectively.

The multiplexer 572 has input terminals a to f, and input signals from the input terminals to a timing pulse T.
It is configured to convert into a serial signal and output it in synchronization with BI to TB6. The c, d, and e terminals of this multiplexer 572 are provided with an AE lock signal AELK and an AE charge signal AECG, respectively.

The winding completion signal WNUP is given, and the f terminal
A signal ADOF indicating an AD conversion overflow is applied from the logic circuit 566 to the logic circuit 566. As a result, from this multiplexer 572, timing pulses T, B
In synchronization with each of 1 to TB6, the ADOF signal and AE
LK signal, ABCG signal, WNUP signal, AO double signal C
A signal multiplied by U is output, and this serial signal is outputted from the signal switching circuit 568 as timing pulses TBI to TBI.
In synchronization with B6, the signals are sequentially placed on the input bus line 370 and transferred to the central control unit 362.

Note that this signal switching circuit 568 is similar to the logic circuit 566.
The output of the buffer register 564 is transferred to the input bus when the A-D conversion of the input analog data is completed and the A-D converted data can be transferred. line 370; in other conditions, the serial output signal of multiplexer 572 is applied to input bus line 370.

The detailed block diagram of the input control section 360 described above is shown in FIG. 48. In the same figure, 5
Reference numeral 57 denotes a frequency division counter which divides the clock pulse CP by 32 to generate a reference clock for timekeeping, and generates the reference clock from its Q4 terminal. This reference clock is input to the counter 558 through the inverter INV4.
Therefore, this counter 558 divides and counts the reference clock and calculates its Q.
Outputs 8-bit count data from the O-Q7 terminal. Note that the most significant bit Q of the output data of the counter 558
7 is applied to the clock terminal of flip-flop 560 through inverter INV5. This flip
Flosive 560 uses its Q output as its D input,
substantially one extension of the most significant bit of said counter 558
This is what makes up the bit. Further, the inverter I
The output of NV5 is introduced into a NAND gate (NAND1) which receives the Q output of the flip-flop 560 at one input terminal, and the output of this NAND gate NAND1 is:
Provided to the clock terminal of flip knob 562. This flip-flop 562 also has the flip-flop 70
Similarly, the knob 560 uses its output as its D input, and essentially constitutes one bit of the counter 558 and flip-flop 560.

That is, as is clear from the above explanation, the frequency division counter 577, the counter 558, and the flip-flop 560
, 562 constitute a 15-bit frequency division counter as a whole. In this embodiment, two integrated circuit elements MCI4520 (manufactured by Motorola) were used to realize such a 15-bit frequency division counter.

This integrated circuit element MC14520 is a dual up counter including two 4-pit counters, as shown in the block diagram of FIG. It has the configuration as shown.

Therefore, by combining the integrated circuit elements MC14520 as shown in FIG. 51, the 15-bit counter described above can be realized.

This configuration is realized by connecting four 4-bit counters in series, and the counter configured in this way can distinguish from the least significant bit to the fifth bit. It is used as a lap counter 557, and the 6th bit to the 13th bit are still allocated to an 8-bit counter, that is, the counter 558.
Flip-flop 560562 for each 5th bit
It is appropriated as The counter having the above-mentioned configuration is reset immediately when a signal is input to the direct reset terminal.

In FIG. 48, the buffer register 564 is composed of a parallel control-parallel out type register,
The input terminal D is synchronized with the rising edge of the clock terminal C input.
Capture and store the data input to O~D7,
It is output to the QO to Q7 terminals. This buffer register 564 receives the QO-Q7 terminal outputs of the counter 558 at its DO-D7 terminals, respectively, and inputs each of the QO-Q7 terminal outputs to the is applied to the terminal.

Also, the clock terminal C of this buffer register 564
is supplied with the output of comparator 556 through inverter INV8, and therefore this buffer register 5
64 takes in the count data of the counter 558 when the output of the comparator 556 falls from "1" to "0", that is, when the constant integration in the negative direction by the integrator 554 is completed.

The buffer register 564 is specifically a 4-bit parallel-in/parallel-out type shift register integrated circuit element 0D40 shown in FIG.
35 (manufactured by RCA), which can be easily realized by arranging two of them side by side as shown in FIG.

The signal switching circuit 568 and the multiplexer 572 are basically multiplexers having the same configuration, and both can be configured using an integrated circuit element MC14512 (manufactured by Motorola).

This integrated circuit element MCl-4512 has a configuration as shown in the logic diagram of FIG. 53 and characteristics as shown in the truth table of FIG. 54. This integrated circuit element MC14
512 has 8 pits of parallel data input from the XO to X7 terminals, and when a "0" signal is applied to the DIS terminal, A.

When counter pulses as shown in FIG. 32 are applied from the B and C terminals, the input data of the XO to X7 terminals is sequentially transferred to the switching circuit 568 from the Z terminal in synchronization with the timing pulses TBO to TB7. For each terminal from XO to X7,
It receives the input of each output signal of the buffer registers QO to Q7, and the A, B, C! Counter pulses OTI, CT2, and CT4 are input to each terminal, respectively. Furthermore, the ADOF signal indicating that the counter 558 has overflowed as a result of AD conversion is sent to the X1 terminal of the multiplexer 572, the AELK signal to the X2 terminal, the AECG signal to the X3 terminal, and the AECG signal to the X4 terminal. is WN
The UP signal is the AO double signal on the X5 terminal, and the O signal is on the X6 terminal.
Each U-fold signal is input, and the A, B, and O terminals receive counter pulses OTI and CT2°C, respectively.
T4 is input. Note that the output terminal Z of the switching circuit 568 and the output terminal Z of the multiplexer 572 are wired-OR coupled to each other, and the input bus line 370
is connected to. In this configuration, the same signal as the switching control signal inputted to the DIS terminal of the multi-preg+572 is applied to the DIS terminal of the signal switching circuit 568 via INV9, so that the input The bus line 370 receives data input from Xo-X7 of the signal switching circuit 568 or Xo-X of the multiplexer 572, depending on the state of the switching control signal.
One of the various signals inputted from X7 will be output in synchronization with the timing pulses TB0-TB7.

Further, the output of the flip-flop 560 is input to the D terminal of the flip-flop F14 synchronized with the clock pulse CP through the inverter INV7, and the ζ output of the flip-flop F14 is input to the D terminal of the flip-flop F14 synchronized with the timing pulse TBO. - Input to the D terminal of the flop F15. Furthermore, this flip-flop F15
The ζ output is a timing pulse TBO synchronized flip signal.
The ζ output of this flip-flop F16 is input to the D terminal of a flip-flop F17 synchronized with the timing pulse TBO.

In the configuration as described above, the flip 7otsu 7"
The operations of F14 to F17 will be explained with reference to the timing chart of FIG. Now flip flop 56
When the output of the inverter INV7 changes from "1" to "O", that is, when the output of the inverter INV7 changes from "0" to "1", the flip-flop F14 changes in synchronization with the immediately following clock pulse CP. Set and flip
A 1" signal is input to the D terminal of the flop F15. Therefore, since the clip flop F15 is set in synchronization with the rising edge of the next timing pulse TBO, its ζ
The output becomes "1". The ζ output of this flip-flop F15 is input to the D terminal of the flip-flop F16, so the flip-flop F16 is input to the next timing.
Since it is set in synchronization with the rising edge of pulse TBO, its ζ output becomes °1". In other words, through the above operations,
By taking the AND condition of the ζ output of the clip-flop F15 and the ζ output of the flip-flop F16, the 1-word time immediately after the output of the comparator 556 changes from "0" to "1" is calculated. You can get it. The one word time obtained in this way is the AD
This is the basis for obtaining the CE signal. Note that the "1" output from the ζ output terminal of the flip-flop F16 is further input to the D terminal of the flip-flop F17, so the flip-flop F17 is synchronized with the rising edge of the next timing pulse TBO. is set, and its ζ output becomes 1''.

Through the above operations, flip-flop F1
By adopting the AND condition of the ζ output of F6 and the four outputs of flip-flop F17, the output of the comparator 556 becomes "
The second 1-word time can be obtained after changing from "0" to "1".

The 1-word time obtained in this way is that the A-D conversion data is stored in the 1-word time immediately after the 1-word time when the ADCE signal indicating the completion of the A-D conversion is output. It is used to transfer.

Note that the ζ output of the flip-flop F15 and the output of the flip-flop F16 are the timing pulse T.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 55, one word time immediately after the ζ output of the flip-flop 560 changes from "1" to "0". A signal is output from the AND gate AND9 at the timing of TB6, and this signal is the A-D conversion end signal AD indicating that the A-D conversion has been completed.
(or game as CE) Pass line 3 through OR4
It will be put on the 66. That is, the flip-flop 56
The fact that the ζ output of 0 changed from '1' to '0' means that
This is because it indicates that the lamp of the integrator 554, which had been performing definite integration in the negative direction, has been switched, that is, that the A/D conversion has been completely completed. Note that this will be explained in detail later.

Further, the ζ output of the flip-flop F16 and the ζ output of the flip-flop F17 are connected to an AND gate AN
As a result, as shown in FIG.
A signal that becomes a level is output from the AND gate.

The output signal of the AND gate λNDIO is applied as a control signal for data transfer to the DIS terminal of the signal switching circuit 568 through the inverter INV9, and also directly to the DIS terminal of the multiplexer 572. As a result, only one word after the ADCE signal is output.

The data in the buffer register 564, that is, the digital data obtained by A-reconversion, is sent from two terminals of the signal switching circuit 568 to timing pulses TBO to TB.
7, the lower digits are sequentially output to the input bus line 370.

Meanwhile, since the "1" signal is input from the AND gate AND10 to the DIS terminal of the multiplexer 572, the output from those two terminals is regulated. That is, under normal conditions, input bus 3
70, AE from the Z terminal of multiplexer 572 in synchronization with timing pulses TBI-TB6.
L.K.

Signals such as AECG, WNUP, AO, and CU are output, but when the ADCE signal is output after the A-D conversion is completed, the signal is sent to the buffer register 564 through the signal switching circuit 568 only during the next word time. A stored in
-D converted digital data DD is output.

On the other hand, the Q output of the clip-flop 560 is input through an inverter NVIO to an AND gate AND8 receiving the timing pulse TB7. That is, while the Q output of the flip-flop 560 is "0", the AND gate AND8 outputs a signal synchronized with the timing pulse TB7. The output signal of this AND gate AND8 is passed through the OR gate OR4 as a NT signal indicating that the integrator 554 is integrating the input analog data in the positive direction.
It is placed on line 366. That is, the fact that the Q output of the flip-flop 560 is "0" indicates that the integrator 554 is integrating the input analog data in the positive direction. Note that this will be explained in detail later.

On the other hand, the output of the comparator 556 is the clock pulse C
It is input to the D terminal of the P-synchronized clip-flop F13. Further, the Q output of the flip-flop F13 is input to the D terminal of the flip-flop F12 which is also synchronized with the clock pulse CP. The flip
Q output of flop F13 and said flip-flop F
The ◇ output of 12 is given to an AND gate AND7, and the output of this AND gate AND7 is passed through an OR gate OR3 to a frequency division counter 557. counter 558
, 0 applied to the direct reset terminals R of each of flip-flops 560, 562, which means that if the integrator 554 is switched after definite integration in the negative direction, integration in the positive direction begins. There is some delay time until a positive output is obtained from the comparator 556 once reset (this is completely due to the integrator 556).
This is provided so that the operation start time of the counter 558 does not differ from the time when a positive output starts to be output from the comparator 556, and when a positive output starts to appear from the comparator 556, For one clock period immediately thereafter, the frequency division counter 557. A direct reset is applied to the counter 558 and flip-flops 560 and 562,
This configuration is configured to match the counting start time of the counter 558 with the output start time of the comparator 556.

1. The Q output of the flip-flop 562 is the flip-flop whose D input terminal receives the output signal of the comparator 556.
It is input to the clock terminal of the flop F18, and while the integrator 554 is performing definite integration in the negative direction, the comparator 55
If the counter 558 overflows even though the output of 6 has not been inverted from "1" to "0", that is, even though the A/D conversion has not been completed, the flip-flop 562 1'' output from the Q terminal of the flip-flop F18 which uses the Q terminal output as a clock. The Q output signal of this flip-flop F18 is the result of A-D conversion,
AD indicating that counter 558 has automatically flowed
It is applied to the X1 terminal of the multiplexer 572 as an OF signal.

The operation of the input control section 360 having the above-described configuration will be explained in more detail below with reference to the operation characteristic diagrams shown in FIGS. 56 and 57.

Incidentally, Fig. 56 shows the case where the A-D conversion was performed smoothly, and Fig. 57 shows the result of the A-D conversion.

Each shows a case in which an overflow occurs.

First, when the power is turned on, a clear signal PUC is output from a power-up/clear circuit (not shown), and the frequency division counter 557. counter 558° flip-flop 560,
562. F14°F15. F16. Clear/reset F17. In this state, the Q of 7 lip-flops 560
The output is “0”, so the A-D conversion control circuit 552
ramps the integrator 554 in the positive direction and simultaneously provides input analog data to the integrator 554. At this time, the output of the comparator 5'56 becomes "1", and the counter 558 starts counting up the output pulses of the frequency division counter 557 almost at the same time. While this integration is being performed, the "0" output of slip-flop 560 is connected to inverter INVI.
is given to the AND gate AND8 through O,
Therefore, from this AND gate AND8 to OR gate O
On bus line 366 through R4, an integrator 554 outputs an input analog signal in synchronization with timing pulse TB7.
An INT signal indicating that data is being integrated is output.

When the counter 558 overflows during the integration operation as described above, the output of the flip-flop 560 becomes "1" and at the same time, the frequency division counter 557. The contents of the counter 558 become "0" for all the pits, and counting starts again from "9".
makes the ramp of the integrator 554 negative, and at the same time the reference level signal from the reference level generating means 550 is applied to the integrator 554.
4 days ago. At the point when this negative integration begins, the integral value of the integrator 554 is proportional to the input analog data. While this integration in the negative direction is being performed, the flip-flop 560 continues to output "1", and since the output of the AND gates 1-AND8 is regulated, the INT signal is of course not output.

As a result of the integration in the negative direction by the integrator 554 described above, when the output signal of the integrator 554 falls to a certain level, that is, when the integration is completed, the output of the comparator 556 becomes "1".
" to "0". As a result, the comparator 55
At that point, the buffer register 564, which receives the output signal of No. 6 at the clock terminal C through the inverter INV8, takes in and stores the count data counted by the counter 558 and output from the QO-Q7 terminals. In this way, Buffer Regis.

The count data captured by the input 564 is a digital value corresponding to the input analog data, as described above.

Note that even after the above operation, the counter 558 continues counting operation, and when the counter 558 overflows, the flip-flop 560 is reset and its Q output becomes "0", and the clip-flop 562 is set. The Q output of the flip-flop 562 is given to the clock terminal of the clip-flop F18.
Since the output of the comparator 556, which provides an output to the D terminal of 18, is already "0", it is naturally not set.

On the other hand, since the Q output of the flip-flop 560 provides a "1" input to the D terminal of the flip-flop F14 through the inverter INV7, as is clear from the timing pulse in FIG. During one word starting from the first timing bus TBO after the output becomes “0”, the AND gate AN
AD synchronized from D9 to timing bus TB6
CE signal is applied to bus line 366 through OR gate OR4. In this system, counter 558 continues counting during and after definite integration in the negative direction by integrator 554. The A-D conversion ends at the point of overflow, and therefore,
As described above, the end of the AD conversion is detected at the time when the Q output of the flip-flop 560 changes from "1" to "0".

Furthermore, at the next word time after the ADCE signal is output, as shown in FIG.
A "1" output is made for one word from and, and the "1" output from and is given to the DIS terminal of the multiplexer 572, regulating the signal output from the two terminals of the multiplexer 572, At the same time, it is applied to the DIS terminal of the signal switching circuit 568 as a "0° signal through the inverter INV9, and this "
Only during one word during which the 1" signal is output, the A-D conversion data DD stored in the buffer register 564 is sent from the lower digits through the 2 output terminals in synchronization with the timing pulses TBO to TB7. Sequential input bus, line 37
0.

On the other hand, the Q output of flip-flop 560 reset by the overflow of counter 558 is A-D.
The A-D conversion control circuit 552 that receives the Q output once clears the integrator 55'4, switches its ramp in the positive direction, and converts the input analog data to the Input to integrator 554.

Integrator 554 with switched ramp from negative direction to positive direction
does not start integration immediately; due to the characteristics of the element,
Since integration is started after a certain delay time, the output of the integrator 554 exceeds a certain level, and the output of the comparator 55
It takes a certain amount of time until 6 starts outputting "1".

On the other hand, since the counter 558 immediately starts the next counting operation from the state where all bits are "0" after the counter 558 overflows, the integrator 554 cannot accurately integrate the input analog data. There is a risk that it will not be carried out. To prevent this, a flip-flop F12. F13. and gate AND 7
When the comparator 556 starts outputting "1" during integration in the positive direction, this is detected and the frequency division counter 557 . Counter 558. Once the flip-flops 560 and 562 are
This clears and resets the data to start counting anew from a state where all bits are "0".

The above-mentioned operation is repeated, and every A-D conversion cycle, the AD signal indicating the end of A-D conversion is
A CE signal and A-D converted digital data DD are output. As mentioned earlier, the input bus line 370 receives the A-D converted digital signal.
Except for the word time when data DD is output, AEL
K signal, AECG signal, WNUP signal, AO double signal CU
It is repeatedly output in synchronization with the double signal timing pulses TBI to T and B6.

Note that after obtaining the integral value corresponding to the input analog data by the integration in the positive direction by the integrator 554, when performing the integration in the negative direction by the integrator 554, the integrator 554 If the counter 558 overflows and the flip-flop 562 is set before the output of the comparator 556 falls below a certain level, i.e., while the output of the comparator 556 remains 1'', the comparator Clip-flop F18, which has the output of 556 as its D input, is set, and its Q output terminal outputs an ADOF signal indicating that the A-D conversion result has overflowed, and the ADOF signal is sent to the X1 terminal of multiplexer 572. On the other hand, at the same time as the counter 558 overflows, the flip
Since the flop 560 is reset, the A/D conversion control circuit 552 receiving its Q output clears the integrator 554, so at this point the output of the comparator 554 falls from 1'' to 0''.

Therefore, the output of the comparator 554 is connected to the inverter INV8.
The buffer register 564, which is applied to the clock terminal through The data taken into the buffer register 564 is data with all bits "0".

In addition, as described above, the results of A- and -D conversion are
- Even if the flip-flop 560
Based on the output of the ADCE and INT signals, the bus,
sent out on line 366.

By the way, the overflow as a result of A-D conversion during strobe photography is a signal indicating that it is necessary to manually set the aperture on the camera device side.
This is the case when an analog signal for diaphragm control is given from A/D converter 84 in such a quantity that the A/D converter 382 overflows.

Therefore, at this time, the data of all pids 0" taken into the buffer register 564 is naturally ignored by the system.

As described above, from the mechanism section 358 to the input control section 3
Analog data and various conditions or state determination signals taken into the input bus line 370 are given to the central control unit 362, and signals ADCE and I'NT indicating the status of A-D conversion are sent to the bus line 370. It is placed on line 366.

Here, we will return to the central control unit 362 again to continue the explanation.

In central control 362, bus line 366 is coupled to input bus selector 578. The input bus selector 578 detects the ADCE signal input to the bus line 366 in synchronization with the timing pulse TB6, and selects the signal coming on the input bus line 370.
It determines whether the signal is a condition signal or A/D conversion data DD, and outputs a signal instructing processing of the input signal from the input bus line 370.

On the other hand, the input bus line 370 is connected to the central control unit 36.
The signal switching circuit 576 normally acts as a circulation circuit for the D register 516 for storing AD conversion data.

The condition register 574 is connected to the input bus selector 31.
When a signal commanding condition import is input from 8,
The signals are taken in and stored in accordance with the ADOF signal, AELK signal, AECG signal, WNUP signal, AO multiplication signal and CU multiplication signal timing pulses TBI to TB6 on the input bus line 370.

Further, the signal switching circuit 576 normally includes the D register 5
The contents DR of 16 are circulated, but when a signal instructing data fetching is input from the input bus selector 578, the contents DR on the input bus line 370 are circulated.
-D conversion data DD as timing pulse TBO-TB
7 and store it.

Therefore, the condition register 574 and the D register 516
is constantly repeatedly input with new setting conditions or operating conditions and A-D conversion data DD through the input bus line 370 and stores them. This is the same as the A-D conversion period of the D converter. The signal switching circuit 576 receives the AELK signal from the condition register 574, and when this AELK signal is input, even if the input bus
Even if a signal instructing data capture is input from the selector 578, the data DR in the D register 516 continues to circulate and new A-D conversion data is not captured.

This camera system provides AE locking through such a configuration.

The configuration for inputting the condition signal and AD conversion data DD from the input path line 370 to the central control unit 362 will be described in more detail below.

Now, if the input control unit 360 has completed the A-D conversion and the signal ADCE indicating this is put on the bus line 366 in synchronization with the timing pulse TB6, the ADCE
input bus line 3 at the next word time the signal is output.
As already mentioned, in 70, the A-D conversion data DD is output sequentially from the lower digits in synchronization with the timing pulses TBO to TB7. - At the next word time after detecting the ADCE signal synchronized with pulse TB6, input bus line 3 is synchronized with timing pulses TBO to TB7.
70 into the D register 516, the D
A/D conversion data DD can be stored in the register 516. In addition, at word times other than those mentioned above, those on the input bus line 370 from the input control section 360 are:
Various signals and therefore, based on timing pulses, the signal on the input bus line 370 is routed to the condition register 5.
74.

Therefore, the input bus selector 578 takes in the signal on the bus line 366 and outputs the signal from the ADC at the timing of TB6.
The configuration may be such that it detects that the E signal has been input and instructs the reception of AD converted data from the input bus line 370 for the next one word period.

From this point of view, in this embodiment, a configuration as shown in FIG. 58 is applied to the input bus selector 578. That is, as is clear from the figure, the bus line 366 is introduced to the D terminal of the flip-flop F18 synchronized with the timing pulse TB7, and the Q output of this flip-flop F18 is synchronized with the timing pulse TBO. flip 1
- It is given to the D terminal of the flop F19.

In such a configuration, each flip-flop F18. F
19 performs the operation shown in FIG. In other words, the flip-flop F synchronized with the timing pulse TB7
18 will not be set unless its D terminal input is shifted by at least 1° at the timing of TB6, that is, unless there is an ADCE signal on bus line 366. At this time, the Q output of the flip-flop F18 is "0", and therefore the 7-lip flop F19, which is synchronized with the timing pulse TBO and which receives this "0° output at its D terminal, is in a reset state and its 4 outputs is "1". This (2) signal is applied to the condition register 574 and causes the condition register 574 to take in the contents of the input bus line 370.

The detailed configuration of the condition register 574 is shown in FIG. 60, and as is clear from the figure, the shift register S
It is composed of RI and a latch L that captures data in synchronization with the falling edge of the clock.

The shift register SRI has its D terminal as an input hash.
Connected to line 370, the clock pulse CP
The data on the input bus line 370 is taken in in synchronization with the input bus line 370. In such a configuration, input bus line 370
The signal placed on each clock pulse CP is
All signals are sequentially input into this shift register SRI, and output from output terminals QO to Q5 in synchronization with each clock pulse CP. Therefore, in this state, the output data from the QO to Q5 output terminals of the shift register SRI are all uncertain data, but during the time when the A-D conversion data DD is not on the input bus line 370, That is, at the time of timing pulse TB7, except for the next one word time after the ADCE signal is sent on bus line 336, the QO of shift register SRI is
~Q5 output terminal outputs CU times signal AO times signal W
The NUP signal, AECG signal; AELK signal and ADOF signal are output. This is the CU multiplication signal timing pulse TB6, the AO multiplication signal timing pulse TBS, and the WNUP signal is the timing pulse TB6.
4, the AECG signal is applied to the timing pulse TB3, A
ECG signal to TB2, AELK signal to TBI, AD
This becomes clear when it is considered that the OF signals are placed on the respective input bus lines 366 in synchronization with the TBO. Therefore, the outputs from the QO-Q5 output terminals of the shift register SRI are received at the DO-D5 terminals, respectively, and fall only while the timing pulse TB7 is being output to the latch L synchronized with the falling edge of the clock. By applying signals to the latch L, CU, AO, WNUP, A
It is possible to capture and store ECG, AELK, and ADOF signals. In this embodiment, the AND bus receiving the output signal ■ from the input bus selector 578 is
By inputting the timing pulse TB7 to the gate AND11, a signal synchronized with the timing pulse TB7 whose output is regulated is obtained only for the next one word period after the output of the ADCE signal, and this signal is further clocked.・A signal synchronized with the clock pulse CP, that is, a signal that performs a falling operation during the timing pulse TB7, is obtained by feeding it to the AND gate AND12 which receives the input of the pulse CP, and this signal is taken in. It is applied as a signal to the clock terminal of the latch L.

Through the above-described configuration, the parallel in and parallel out registers forming the latch L have each input signal except for the next one word time when the ADCE signal is placed on the bus line 366. A signal regarding a new setting condition or operating state is input and updated every one word time. Note that the QO terminal of the parallel-in/parallel-out register BRI forming the latch L receives the CU multiplied signal, the qO terminal receives the AO multiplied signal, the Q1 terminal receives the AO multiplied signal, and the Q1 terminal receives the AO multiplied signal. %Q2
The WNUP signal is sent from the Q2 terminal, the AECG signal is sent from the Q3 terminal, the AECG signal is sent from the Q3 terminal, the AELK signal is sent from the Q4 terminal, and the AELK signal is sent from the Page τ terminal. The ADOF signal is output from the Q5 terminal.
An ADOF signal is output from each terminal.

Note that this condition register 574 can be specifically realized by a circuit configuration as shown in FIG. 61. As is clear from the figure, the 60th illustrated shift register SRI
is an integrated circuit element CD401''5, and the latch L is constructed using two integrated circuit elements CD4042.

The integrated circuit element CD4015 (manufactured by RCA) is a dual 4-pit static shift register whose logic diagram is shown in FIG. 62, and its Q31 output is given as the D2 terminal input. It consists of an 8-bit shift register. In this embodiment, 6 bits of some are shifted to shift register SR.
Used as I. Further, the integrated circuit element CD4042
As already shown in the logic diagram in Fig. 40, is a 4-pit latch that takes in data in parallel in synchronization with the falling edge of its clock input, and while the clock input is “0”. It has a configuration that holds data. It is obvious that an 8-bit latch can be constructed by using two latch CDs 4042 in parallel, but in this embodiment, 6 bits of them are used as the latch L.

On the other hand, if a 1'' signal is applied to the D terminal of the flip-flop F18 shown in the figure 58 at the timing of TB6 from the bus line 366, that is, if there is an AECE signal,
The clip-flop F18 is set at the timing of TB7 and makes its Q output 1". Therefore, the flip-flop F19 synchronized with the timing pulse TBO receiving the Q output is set at the beginning of the next word time. It is set in synchronization with the rising edge of the timing pulse TBO, and its Q output is set to 1''. It should be noted that since the flip-flop F18 holds its state after being set until the next rising edge of the timing pulse TB7, the D input of the flip-flop F19 will be the next one after this flip-flop is set. timing pulse T
At the time when BO rises, it immediately becomes "0". Therefore, the flip-flop F19 is kept set for one word time from the rise of TBO to the next rise of TBO, and its Q output ■ is also held for this one word time.
1”.

The ■ signal is applied to the signal switching circuit 576, but upon receiving the ■ signal, the signal switching circuit 576 stops the circulation of the contents of the D register 516 and switches the input bus.
The data on line 370 is introduced into D register 516 for one word from TBO to TB7. Note that the data introduced during this one word is A-D conversion data DD that is placed on the input bus line 370 for this one word on the input control section 360 side. It should be noted that the data thus D and fetched into the register 516 will be circulated through the signal switching circuit 576 until the next data fetch.

The detailed configuration of the signal switching circuit 576 and the D register 516 is as shown in the circuit diagram of FIG. 63, but the D register 516 is an integrated 8-bit shift register as shown in the block diagram of FIG. A circuit element CD4021 (manufactured by RCA) is used.

In the configuration shown in Fig. 63, the Q output ■ of the flip-flop F19 shown in Fig. 58 and the QO output AELK of the switch L shown in Fig. 60 are applied to the AND gate AND13. No, that is AELK
When the signal is 1" and the signal 2 that commands data capture is 0, the output of ANDl3 is
0''. Therefore, at this time, the AND gate AND
AND gate AND14 directly receiving the output of 13
has its output regulated, and the ANDl 3
Since the AND15 whose output is input through the inverter INV9 becomes conductive, the contents DR of the D-register 516 are circulated through the Q8 terminal, the AND gate AND15, and the OR gate OR5.

On the other hand, even when the Q output (■) of the flip-flop F19, that is, the signal instructing data capture is "1", the A
When in the E-lock state, the AELK signal becomes "0", and therefore the output of the AND gate A role D13 becomes "0", so the D register 516 receives the A-D conversion data from the input bus line 370. is not performed, and the content D is passed through the AND gate AND15 and the OR gate OR5.
R, that is, the previously fetched A-D conversion data DD is cyclically held.

On the other hand, if it is not in the AE lock state, that is, the AELK
The signal is "1", and the Q output of the flip-flop F19, that is, the signal instructing data capture is "1".
“Then, the output of this ANDl3 is”
1”, therefore, at this time, the AND gate AND1
AND14 receiving the output of AND13 is not conductive, and the output of AND13 is connected to the AND gate A which is input through the inverter INV9.
The output of ND15 is regulated. Therefore, the A-D conversion data DD, which is carried on the input bus line 370 only while the Q output of the flip-flop F19 is "1", is transferred to the input bus through the ANDl4.
The data are sequentially fetched into the register 516 from the lower digits in synchronization with the timing pulses TBO to TB7.

Through the configuration described above, the input control section 360
The A-D conversion data DD and various conditions or status signals obtained in the above are taken into the central control section 362.

Now, in FIG. 30, 500 is an arithmetic circuit configured to execute a required arithmetic operation between the data AR of the A register 510 and the data specified by the data selector 502 according to the arithmetic instruction from the instruction ROM 504. be done.

Note that the calculation instructions outputted from the instruction ROM 504 at this time include the eight calculation control routines described above, and one calculation control routine is selectively executed depending on each photographing mode.

The arithmetic circuit 500 cooperates with auxiliary registers such as a B register 512 and a C register 514 in addition to the A register 510. Note that 506 circulates the data BR of the B register 512, or circulates the data A from the A register 510.
A gate 508 is used to write R, and a gate 508 is used to circulate data CR in the C register 514 and write data in the A register 5.
This is a gate for writing data AR from 10.

The data selector 502 selects % a, bl eVd
+ et fy gt ht One of the data input from the nine terminals of 1 is sent to the instruction RO
The arithmetic circuit 50 selectively operates according to instructions from M504.
It is configured so that it is given to 0.

The data, film sensitivity data DTSV is sent from terminal a of the selector 502, and open aperture value data DT is sent from terminal b of the selector 502.
The curvature error data DTAC is input from the C terminal, the shutter speed data DTTV is input from the d terminal, and the aperture value data DTAV is input from the i terminal.These data, DTSV, DTAO, DTAC, DTTV,
How DTAV is obtained has already been described.

Further, from the terminal f of the data selector 502, data specified by the instruction ROM 504 is taken in from among several pieces of fixed data stored in the fixed data ROM 534.

The data stored in the fixed data ROM 534 is C3TC, which represents C3TO and other specific data in which all bits of the data are "0".

C3TF in which all bits of C3TD and C3TE data are "1"; data TMIN representing the minimum shutter speed that can be controlled by body 4; stator TMAX representing the maximum shutter speed that can be controlled by body 4.
, TSYN, which represents the shutter speed that can be synchronized with the strobe for flash photography.

Constants C3TI, C3T2 . These data, such as the maximum aperture value AMAX of the photographic lens device 2 used, are selectively given to the terminal f of the data selector 502 based on commands from the instruction ROM 504.

Regarding the data AMAX regarding the maximum aperture value, a plurality of data are stored in the fixed data ROM 534, and these aperture values are stored in the data AMAX' regarding the maximum aperture value taken from the lens device 2 to the body 4 side. It is selected and output as appropriate based on the above information.

Incidentally, the fixed data written in the fixed data ROM 534 includes constants for various calculations and the lens device 2.
and the mechanical constraints imposed by the body 4, such as the upper and lower limits of the shutter speed, and are set as appropriate depending on the performance of the lens device 2 and the body 4, the calculation method, or the data setting and restriction method. It is something.

Also, the terminal g of the data selector 502.

D registers 516.h and i respectively. B register 5
12. The respective contents of C register 514, DD, BR
, CR will be selectively captured.

It should be noted that among the terminals a to i of the data selector 502, which terminal is used to input data to the arithmetic circuit is determined by a command from the instruction ROM 504. Therefore, all the selected data are introduced into the arithmetic circuit 500.
The arithmetic circuit 500 is connected to the instruction ROM 5.
04, the data selected by the data selector 502 is loaded into the A register 510, or the data AR in the A register 510 is combined with the data selected by the data selector 502. Perform the necessary operations between the two and store the results in the A register 510.
or when a carry or borrow occurs as a result of the operation, the carry flip-flop 540 is set and the contents AR of the A register 510 and the contents BR of the B register 512 or the contents CR of the C register 514 are stored.
It performs arithmetic control operations such as exchanging with

Now, the instruction ROM 504 that provides arithmetic control instructions to the arithmetic circuit 500 will be explained.

Instruction RO provided in the central control unit 362
As mentioned above, the M504 includes eight arithmetic control routines, and these eight routines are based on the 5PDW signal and ASLC signal output from the condition signal storage circuit 548, as well as the AO multiplication signal output from the condition register 574. and C
It is selected depending on the U-fold signal state. the 5PDW signal;
The program selector 580 determines the arithmetic control routine of the instruction head 504 according to the ASLC signal, AO multiplication signal, and CU multiplication signal states.

The instruction ROM 504 is configured to execute a routine selected and set by the program selector 580 and output a control signal to the system. - Counter 582. This program counter 582 has a latch 584 connected to its inhibit terminal.
This is provided to regulate the counting operation of the program counter 582 so that the program counter 582 does not start unless the input bus selector 578 detects the first ADCE signal. At the same time, the restriction is canceled and the program counter 5
82 counting operation is started.

The program counter 582 is timing.

This system is configured to count up by one for each pulse TBO, and in this system, substantially, the number of pulses is counted up by one for each pulse TBO to TB7.
One step of arithmetic control operation is performed by the instruction ROM 504.

From then on, the program counter 582 repeatedly performs counting operations, and outputs a signal indicating this every time the counting operation progresses to a certain step. This signal indicates that the instruction ROM 504 has completed the arithmetic control of one routine, and is applied to the logic circuit 598. This signal is transmitted to the logic circuit 598.
One is the CALE signal that is put on the bus line 366 in synchronization with the timing bus TB5 to indicate that the calculation has ended, and the other is the output of the CALE signal. It is outputted from the next timing pulse TBO that is generated, and is outputted as an R8ND signal for carrying transfer data on the output bus line 374.

As mentioned above, the program selector 580° program counter 582. Instruction ROM50
4 will be described in detail below. FIG. 65 shows a block diagram of the control system and logic circuit 598, latch circuit 584, program selector 580, and program counter 582 of the instruction ROM 504.

In the figure, a program selector 580 is an integrated circuit element C.
It is composed of D4019 (manufactured by RCA),
This integrated circuit element CD 4019 is an AND-OR select gate whose logic diagram is shown in FIG.

Additionally, the program counter 582 is integrated circuit element CD4.
024 (manufactured by RCA), this integrated circuit element CD4024 is shown in FIG.
It is a ripple counter as shown in the diagram.

The program selector 580 sends a signal to its KA terminal, which is the output of the condition register 574, and a Kn
When the CU double signal is input to the terminal and it is not in strobe photography mode, each input signal of the A1 and A2 terminals is input to DI and B2.
Outputs to each output terminal of
.

It is configured to output each input signal of the B2 terminal to each of the DI and B2 output terminals. The program selector 580
The output of the AND gate AND16 is given to the 0A1 terminal, and this AND gate AND16 is 5PDW.
■The signal obtained through the signal and the AO multiplied signal inverter and the evening INVIO is input. Further, the ADOF signal is input to the B1 terminal of the selector 58, the ASLC signal is input to the A2 terminal, and the AO multiplied signal and the ASLC signal are input to the B2 terminal through an OR gate OR6.

In such a configuration, the program selector 580
When the W signal is "1", that is, when not in strobe photography mode, the four calculation control programs are also activated by the CU double signal "
1 degree, that is, in the strobe photography mode, each of the four arithmetic control programs can be selected, and in total, the eight arithmetic control routines described above can be specified.

The instruction ROM 504 has 28 (= 256
) step instructions can be executed, but the system of this embodiment is configured to execute eight routines consisting of 32 steps, depending on the combination of inputs from the A5 to A7 terminals. The eight arithmetic control routines are executed according to the input from the AO-A4 terminal.
It executes each step routine. This instruction ROM 504 has a CU multiplied signal applied to its A7 input terminal, and A6. Each DI of the program selector 580 is connected to each input terminal of A5.
, receives signal input from the D2 output terminal. Further, input terminals AO to A4 of the ROM 504 receive outputs from Q1 to Q5 of the program counter 582.

The program counter 582 is configured to count up by one in synchronization with each falling edge of the timing pulse TBO. In order for the instruction ROM 504 to start incrementing as the program counter 582 counts up, it is necessary that some A-D conversion data DD has been stored in the D register 516 as a result of the first A-D conversion, and the power switch is turned on. If the post-AD conversion is not completed and the program counter 582 counts up without any AD conversion data DD being stored in the D register 516, a malfunction will occur. Therefore, in this system, A
The configuration is such that the program counter 582 starts counting up only after the A-D conversion is completed on the input control section 360 side in the absence of an E-flop. That is, the flip-flop F19 (
Figure 58) Q output ■ and the AND game) A receiving the AELK signal indicating that the system is not in the AE lock state.
By introducing the output of ND21 to the J terminal of a J- type clip-flop F20, when the first ADCE signal is placed on bus line 366 in the absence of an AE-flop, said flip-flop F20 is Set it and
Let the Q output be "1". Therefore, the Q terminal output of the clip-flop F20 is connected to the direct reset terminal' through the inverter Nv11, OR7.
The program counter 582 input to R8T has its direct reset terminal R8T input set to "0" at the same time as flip-flop F20 is set, and starts counting up in synchronization with the falling edge of timing pulse TB7. do.

The instruction ROM 504 is equipped with eight output terminals OPO to OP7, and the instruction code is composed of the 3-bit output of OP7 to OP5.
The operand code is constructed in the pit.

In this embodiment, an integrated circuit element 1702A (manufactured by Intel) whose block diagram is shown in FIG. 68 is used as the instruction ROM 504.

The output code of this instruction ROM 504 has a meaning as shown in the code explanatory diagram of FIG. 69.

Now, the instruction code will be explained.

That is, O20 determines whether this instruction is related to calculation or data exchange.
When O20 is "0", it commands calculation, and when it is "1", it commands data exchange.

When O20 is “O”, that is, when a calculation command is issued, OF2
indicates the content of the operation; when OF2 is "0", addition is commanded, and when OF2 is "1", subtraction is commanded.

Also, at this time, OF2 instructs processing of the calculation result, and when OF2 is 0'', the calculation result is sent to the A register 5.
10, and when OF2 is "1", it instructs to record the calculation result in the A register 510.

Conversely, when O20 is "1", that is, a data exchange command is issued, +OP6 commands the data exchange conditions, and when -OP6 is "0", carry, flip,
It is invalid when flop 540 is in the reset state, and O
When F2 is 1”, carry flip-flop 54
Valid when 0 is in the reset state.

At this time, O20 also commands the data exchange conditions; when O20 is "0", it is invalid when the carry flip-flop 540 is in the set state, and when O20 is "1", it is invalid. , is valid when carry flip-flop 540 is in the set state.

Comprehensively considering the above and considering them individually, OF2 is “
0", when OF2 is "0" and OR5 is 0°, the contents AR of A register 510 and the data specified by the operand code are added, and the result is added to A register 5.
Since no data is written to 10, nothing is done after all. In the following explanation, this instruction will be referred to as N0OP.

When OF2 is “O”, OF2 is “0” and O20 is 111
At 0 o'clock, the contents AR of the A register 510 and the operand
This instructs so-called addition in which the data specified by the code is added and the result is written into the A register 510.

In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as ADD.

When OF2 is “0”, OF2 is “1” and O20 is “0”.
”, the data specified by the operand code is subtracted from the content AR of the A register 510, but the result is not written to the A register 510, but this operation is based on the operation rather than the operation result. As a result, Carrie
This is to check whether the flip-flop 540 is set or not, and ultimately it is to compare the contents of the A register 510 with the data specified by the operand code. In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as LT.

When OF2 is “0”, OF2 is “12” and O20 is “1”.
", the command subtracts the data specified by the operand code from the content AR of the A register 510, and then writes the result to the A register 510, a so-called subtraction command."
This is what we are doing. In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as S.
It is called UB.

When OF2 is “1”, OF2 is °0” and O20 is °0.
” indicates that the exchange of data specified by the contents AR of the A register 510 and the operand code is invalid whether the carry flip-flop 540 is reset or set. In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as N0OP2.

When OF2 is “1°”, OF2 is “0” and O20 is “1”.
", the exchange of data specified by the contents AR of the A register 510 and the operand code is invalid when the carry flip-flop 540 is reset, but is valid when it is set. In the end, the carry flip-flop 540
This instructs data to be exchanged only when is set. In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as SWC.
It is called.

When OF2 is 1°, OF2 is “1” and O20 is 0”
In this case, the exchange of the contents AR of the A register 510 and the data specified by the operand code is a carry, flip,
When the flop 540 is reset, it is valid, but when it is set, it is invalid.In the end, data exchange is performed only when the carry flip-flop 540 is reset. It is giving instructions on what to do.

In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as SWN.0 When P7 is "1", OF2 is "1" and O20 is "1".
In this case, the exchange of data commanded by the contents AR of the A register 510 and the operand code is carried-clip.
This command is valid whether the flop 540 is reset or set, and after all, it commands that data be exchanged regardless of the state of the carry flip-flop 540. be. In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as SWU.

In addition, in the case of the data exchange explained above, the A register 51
If the operand with which data is exchanged with 0 is the B register 512 or the C register 514, the A register 51
The contents AR of 0 can be written to the operand, but if the operand is fixed data or setting data, the contents AR of the A register 510 cannot be written to the operand. Therefore, in this case, the operand data is unilaterally written to the A register 510 rather than data exchange, which is a so-called data read operation, but the system of this embodiment does not distinguish between data exchange commands and data read commands; This data exchange instruction acts as a data exchange instruction only when the operand is a register, and acts as a data read instruction when the operand is other than a register.

As mentioned above, this instruction “Traction ROM504
has the eight instruction systems described above.

Next, the operand code will be explained.

OF2 distinguishes whether the operand is fixed data or variable data, and when OF2 is 'O', the operand is fixed data (fixed data).ROM5
34 to OP3 to OPO. Also, when OF2 is '0',
The operand is variable data, and the data selector 5
It specifies the variable data input from each input terminal a-i of 02.

When OF2 is 'O', that is, regarding fixed data, O
The data specified by P3 to OPO is OF2. OF
2. When OPI and OPO are “oooo”, all bits are “0”
C3TO data of "0010", "1110000"
0" C3TC data, '0100', 11010
C3TD data of "000", "000" when "0110"
C3TE data of “11111”, C3TF data of all bits “1” when “0111”, and OF2.OF
2. O.P.I.

When the OPO is 1000", the lowest shutter speed that can be controlled by the camera device body 4 is TMIN, "1001".
When the maximum aperture value that can be controlled by the lens device 2 is AMA4, when the maximum aperture value that can be controlled by the lens device 2 is ``1010'', the maximum aperture value that can be controlled by the lens device 2 is TMA4, and when the maximum aperture value that can be controlled by the camera device body 4 is ``1011'', the strobe synchronized shutter speed TSY that can be controlled by the camera device body 4.
First constant CAT for calculation when N, 1100”
1 and "1101" are the respective data of the second constant 08T2 for calculation.

When OF2 is 1”, that is, when it comes to variable data, it is OP.
3~The data specified by OPO is OF2. OF2
．． When OPI and OPO are 1000'', the contents of the D register 516 are DJ, that is, DTDR1''1, which is AD conversion data DD.
DTSv when “001”, D T when “1010” (7)
TV, "1011" + 7) DTA/V, 110
DTAO when 0” (7), DTAO when ”1101”
When the value is ``1110'', the content of the B register is BR, which is DTBR, and when the value is ``1111'', the content of the C register is CR, which is DTcR.

A comparison table of the addresses of the instruction ROM 504, instructions, and operand codes is shown in FIG. 70(a).
” Shown in (h).

What is shown in FIG. 70(a) is the instruction R
This is a routine that is selected when the A7 to A5 terminal inputs of the OM504 are all '0'. This is a routine that is applied when not in flash photography mode, when shutter speed priority is given and the aperture is not stopped down, or when in external metering mode. This corresponds to the third routine shown in FIG.

Also, shown in FIG. 70 is A7. of the instruction ROM 504. This is a routine that is selected when the A6 terminal input is O" and the A5 terminal input is 1", and it is a routine that is applied when the flash photography mode is not set, aperture priority is set, and the aperture is not stopped down, or when the external metering mode is set. . This corresponds to the first routine shown in FIG.

Also, shown in FIG. 70(C) is A7. of instruction R, 0M504. A5 terminal input is O”, A
This routine is selected when the 6-terminal input is "1", and is applied when the flash photography mode is not set, aperture priority is set, the aperture is stopped down, and the external metering mode is not set. This corresponds to the second routine shown in FIG.

Also, as shown in FIG. 70 (6), the A7 terminal input of the instruction ROM 504 is 10", and the A6.A5
This is a routine that is selected when the terminal input is 1", and is applied when not in flash photography mode, shutter priority, aperture is narrowed down, and not in external metering mode. This is shown in Figure 29. However, this corresponds to the fourth routine.

Also, FIG. 70(e) shows a routine that is selected when the A7 terminal input of the instruction ROM 504 is 1" and the A6.A5 terminal input is 0", and the strobe has completed charging and is in flash photography mode. This routine is applied when the aperture value of the lens device 2 is set on the strobe device side and the shutter speed on the camera device side is semi-automatically controlled at the same time. In the following description, this routine will be referred to as the fifth routine.

In addition, FIG. 70 (0 shows the instruction R
A7 of OM504. In this routine, which is selected when the A5 terminal input is '1'' and the A6 terminal input is 0'', the aperture value of lens device 2 is set on the strobe device side, and at the same time the shutter speed on the camera device side is fully automatically controlled. This is a routine that is applied when In the following explanation, this routine will be referred to as the sixth
This is called the routine.

Also, shown in FIG. 70(g) is A7. of the instruction ROM 504. In this routine that is selected when the A6 terminal input is 1" and the A5 terminal input is 'O", the aperture value of lens device 2 is set on the camera device side, and at the same time the shutter speed on the camera device side is semi-automatically controlled. This is a routine that is applied at times. In the following description, this routine will be referred to as the seventh routine.

Also shown in FIG. 70(h) is A7. of the instruction ROM 504. A6. This routine is selected when the A5 terminal input is l'', and is applied when the aperture value of the lens device 2 is set on the camera device side, and at the same time, the shutter speed on the camera device side is fully automatically controlled.

In the following description, this routine will be referred to as the eighth routine.

Incidentally, when photographing using an external photometry adapter, the first or third routine is adopted depending on the state of the ASLC signal, but in that case, unnecessary calculation steps are not executed. That is, in the case of photometry using an external photometry adapter, there is no need to consider the open aperture value AVo and bending error AVc of the photographing lens device 2 during photometry compared to TTL photometry, and therefore the first or third routine is executed. The step of performing correction calculations for the open aperture value AVo and the bending error kVc may be ignored. By the way, the first and third
This step in the routine of FIG. 70(a), (
As is clear from b), the 8th step ADD-DTAO
and ADD-DTAC in the ninth step.

Also, especially when executing the 5th to 8th routines,
If the A-D converter overflows, the signal ADOF indicating this fact acts as a signal indicating that it is necessary to manually set the aperture value of the lens device 2 during strobe photography. , if the A-D converter 382 overflows while executing the first to eighth routines, the signal ADOF indicating this will indicate that the data obtained as a result of photometry is too large. be. Therefore, in that case, it is necessary to issue some kind of warning, and furthermore, it is necessary to set the contents of the register whose contents have become unknown due to overflow to the maximum capacity of that register, that is, all bits "l"'. This operation adds film sensitivity Sv to the photometry result BVo.
It can be handled completely equivalently to the overflow of the A register 51-00 when the 1-open aperture value AVo, the bending error AVc, etc. are added. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the A-D converter 382 overflows when not in the strobe photography mode, during the step of executing the first to fourth calculation routines, the step after the above-mentioned addition step is performed. That is, in the A-th step, a direct set signal is applied to the carry flip-flop 540, and the carry clip-flop 540 is set.

Furthermore, the aperture value or shutter speed obtained as a result of the calculation when executing the first to fourth routines is the maximum or minimum aperture value limit of the lens device 2 or a shutter that can be controlled by the body 4. If the speed limit is exceeded, a warning must be given to indicate this.

This can be easily achieved by blinking the aperture value or shutter speed displayed on the digital display 402. This operation is a step of determining whether or not the aperture value or shutter speed is within the limit value of the aperture value or shutter speed after the aperture value or shutter speed is derived as a result of the calculation. Based on the reset state, it is sufficient to generate the aperture value display blinking signal AVFL or the shutter speed display blinking signal TVFL.
All the outputs of the carry flip-flop 540 in step and G-th step are sufficient.

As mentioned above, there are overflows that occur as a result of A-D conversion, overflows that occur as a result of adding various data to photometric data, and overflows that occur as a result of adding various data to photometric data, as well as the aperture value or shutter speed obtained as a result of calculation. The logic circuit 5° 86 generates a signal for blinking the aperture position display or shutter speed display on the digital display 402 when the control limit value is exceeded.

The logic circuit 586 is connected to the carry flip-flop 5.
40 and the output of the program selector 580, the output of the carry flip-flop 540 is determined by a specific address designated by the program selector 580, and the output is displayed on the digital display 402. A signal is sent to flash the shack speed or aperture value.

The shutter speed flashing signal TVFL output from the logic circuit 586 is temporarily stored in a flip-flop 588 and then applied to a multiplexer 594, and the aperture flashing signal AVF is temporarily stored in a flip-flop 590. is applied to multiplexer 594.

The conditions for blinking the shutter speed or aperture value displayed on the digital display 402 have been described previously, so the explanation will be omitted here, but under what conditions will such a blinking signal occur in this system? will be detailed later.

Note that this logic circuit 586 is connected to R from the logic circuit 598.
'8ND signal is received, and the flip-flops 588 and 590 are reset by the R8ND signal.

As mentioned above, when using an external photometry adapter, the 8th,
It is possible to generate a signal to ignore the 9th step, to directly set the gear leave 1 nop flop 540 depending on the ADOF signal generated when not in flash photography mode, and to set the AD conversion flow and various other functions. If the aperture value or shutter speed obtained as a result of calculation or calculation exceeds the limit value, an aperture signal is given to the digital display 402. All logic is program selector 58
It has a close relationship with the output of 0.

A circuit configuration diagram for realizing such logic is shown in FIG. 71, in which 600 is an integrated circuit element MC14.
514 (manufactured by Motorola) is a 4-bit latch-16 line coder. This integrated circuit element MC14514 has a configuration as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 72 and the logic diagram of FIG. The decoding signal is configured to be decoded and output to 16 output lines of 815.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 71, program selector 580
Of the outputs Ql-Q5, Ql-Q4 is input to the DI-D and i terminals of the decoder 600. AND27 in the same figure indicates the first or third
This is for detecting the 8th and 9th steps in the loop f7 and outputting the program execution control signal ■. In addition to receiving the input of the signal indicating the photometry mode, the inverted signal of the Q5 output of the program selector 580 by the inverter INV12 and the outputs 88 and 89 of the decoder 600 are OR-gamed.
) It receives a signal obtained through OR9, and is an AND between a signal indicating that the system is in external photometry mode and a signal indicating that the output of the program selector 58o is in the eighth or ninth step. It is constructed so as to output a signal (2) according to logic.

Furthermore, the AND gate AND28 detects the 10th step in the 1st to 4th routines when the result of A-D conversion by the A-D converter 382 overflows when not in the strobe photography mode. This is to neutralize the set signal (■) for directly setting the carry flip-flop 540, and when not in strobe photography mode, which can be obtained by applying the CU double signal ADOF signal to AND29. It receives a signal indicating that the A/D converter 382 has overflowed, and also receives an inverted signal from the inverter INV12 of the Q5 output of the program selector 580 and the decoder 60.
It receives the input of the output SlO of 0, and outputs the signal ■ according to the AND logic of the ADOF signal when the system is not in strobe photography mode and the signal indicating that the output of the program selector 580 is in the 10th step. It is constructed in such a way that

AND gate AND25, digital display 402
This is to give an input to the J terminal of the flip-flop 59Q which outputs the signal AVFL for blinking the displayed aperture value of the digital display 402, and the AND gate AND26 outputs the signal TVF for blinking the displayed shutter speed of the digital display 402.
This is for providing an input to the J terminal of the clip flop 588 which outputs L. The AND gate AND24 is connected to the ASLC signal and the CU multiplication signal, and outputs a signal indicating that the aperture value is selected preferentially when not in flash photography mode.
directly to the gate AND26, and the AND gate A
They are respectively input through ND25 & inverter INV13. This is because when the aperture priority mode is selected, the shutter speed is calculated and determined, so when the signal to command blinking comes, this signal is used as the flip-flop 590 to output the AVFL signal. This is to prevent it from going to the J terminal, and conversely, when it is not in aperture priority mode, that is, when shutter priority mode is selected,
What is calculated and found is the aperture value, and therefore, when a signal instructing blinking comes, this is to prevent this signal from going to the J terminal of the flip-flop 588 for outputting the TVFL signal.

The signal that commands the blinking is from OR11 to AND gate AND25. This OR gate output, which is given to both ANDs 26, includes two conditions for outputting the signal instructing the blinking.

One is the first condition output through the AND gate AND22, which is conditional on the carry flip-flop 540 being set; The set signal CA is input from the terminal.

The other is a second condition output through the AND gate AND23, which is conditional on the carry flip-flop 540 being reset;
The AND gate AND23 receives the reset signal -CA from the carry flip-flop 540.

The above AND ge -) AND22 is OR, gate ORI
The 5IL814 output of the decoder 600 is input through O, and the Q of the program selector 580 is input.
5 output is input through the inverter INV12, so the CA
receiving the double signal input and the program selector 5;
The program steps according to 80 are configured to output "1" at the Vth step and the Vth step.

Further, the AND23 is the decoder 6
00 and the Q5 output of the program selector 580 are input, therefore, the CA multiplication signal input is received from the carry flip-flop 540, and the program step by the program counter 580 is the Vth output. It is configured to output "1" at the time of step.

d In addition, the above-mentioned carrier town flip-flop 5
The conditions under which the carry signal CA is output from 40 will be described in detail later.

Note that the flip-flops 588 and 590 both receive the clock pulse C through the OR gate 0R12.
Inverter INV14 of P and timing pulse TB7
It receives an inverted signal input. That is, these two flip 70 tubes 588, 590 are connected to the "first clock pulse CP rising edge" at the time of the timing pulse TH7.
This means that it is synchronized with L.

Further, the flip-flops 588 and 590 both receive R and SND signals at their terminals. As is clear from FIG. 70, this 1 (SND signal) is common to all eight routines in that each routine that is being advanced depending on the program step input of the program counter 580 ends at step V. For some reason, when the output of the program selector 580 reaches the Vth step or later, a CALE signal indicating that the calculation has ended is output, and thereafter a signal instructing to transfer each data obtained as a result of the calculation. is output, but this signal is R8ND
It's a signal.

The CALE signal and R8ND signal are obtained through the logic configuration of a logic circuit 598 as shown in FIG.

The CALE signal is applied to Q5. of the program counter 582 as shown in FIG. It is output from the AND gate AND20 which receives the Q4 output, and the AND gate AND68 which receives the inverted output of the Q3 output of the program counter 582 by the inverter INV23.

As is clear from FIG. 70, this CALB signal is a signal that is at a high level for four words from the Xth step to the Vth step of the program steps.

Further, the R8ND signal is applied to the Q2. of the program counter 582 as shown in FIG. The output of Q-3 is inputted through OR8, and the output of AND20 is high for 8 words from the Xth step of the program step to the Vth step, that is, the final step. It is output from the AND gate AND9 to which the Shingetsu at the level is input. Therefore, this R8
As is clear from Fig. 70, the ND signal is programmed and
The signal is output as a signal set to be at a high level for 6 words from the Vth step to the Vth step, that is, the final step.

However, as shown in FIG. 65, the direct reset terminal R8T of the program counter 582 has an OR signal.
The output of AND18, that is, Q3. An AND condition signal is provided between the QO output and the output of the AND20. At this time, the AND gate AN
As is clear from FIG.
The settings are as follows: However, this and
When the output of the gate AND18 goes high, the program counter 582 is immediately reset, so the output of the AND gate AND18 falls to the low level the moment it rises.

Similarly, the R8ND signal also falls to a low level at the moment the program step enters the S-th step, so the R8ND signal is essentially a 3-word signal from the S-th step to the S-th step. It will be output as a signal that is at high level during the period. Note that the CALE signal is an AND6 signal that forms part of the logic circuit 578.
2 is input. Since this AND62 receives the input of timing pulse TB5, CALE
While the signal is at high level, the l'' signal is output in synchronization with the timing pulse TBS.
The CALE signal synchronized with pulse TB5 is
4-word bus line 366 through gate 0R22
be carried on. On the other hand, this logic circuit 598 unconditionally places the timing pulse TB4 on the bus line 366 from the OR gate 0R22.

Therefore, bus line 366 has a timing pulse TB.
The 4-bit II O11 signal synchronized with O-TB3 is
The "1" signal is synchronized with timing pulse TB4, the CALE signal is synchronized with timing pulse TB5, the ADCB signal is synchronized with timing pulse TB6, and the INT signal is synchronized with timing pulse TB7. It will be listed.

Next, a detailed circuit configuration for taking in the data selector 502 shown in FIG. 30, the fixed data ROM 534, and the maximum aperture value AMAX of the photographing lens device 2 to be used will be described in accordance with the circuit configuration diagram in FIG. 75.

The fixed data R,0M534 is C3TO.

C3TC, C3TD, C3TE, C3TF, 'r'MI
N, TMAX, AMAX, TSYN, C8T1. C3T
2, 11 pieces of data are stored in series, and 6 pieces of the above serial data are arranged in parallel in a rainbow. but,
Data A regarding the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 used
Only M A X is different for each of the six juxtaposed data, and the F numbers are Fil, F16. F22゜F
32. F45. Contains data regarding the value of F64. This fixed data ROM 534 is basically the 68th
It can be constructed from the integrated circuit element 1702A shown in the figure.

In such a data arrangement, the fixed data ROM 53
4 is the instruction R to that person's 3~A6 input terminal.
, 0M504, and specifies specific data of the serial data. Therefore, the counter pulse CT is applied to the AO to A2 terminals respectively.
By inputting z, ~CT4, the same 6 data except for AMAX are sequentially output from the lower digits from the output terminals QO-Q5 of the ROM 534 in synchronization with the timing pulses TBO-TB7. It will be done.

The outputs of QO-Q5 are each connected to an AND gate AN
It is input to D31 to AND36, but this AND
The gates AND31 to AND36 are selectively rendered conductive depending on the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 in use. The outputs of the AND gates AND31 to AND36 are combined into the OR gate 0R12, and the OR gate
From gate OR, l 2, instruction RO
The fixed data specified by M504 will be output.

On the other hand, the maximum aperture value AM &, X of the photographic lens device 2 used
The data regarding the aperture value is taken from the maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536 to the central control unit 362 and into a 6-bit shift register 538.

This shift register 538 is shown in FIG.
The diagram shows an integrated circuit device CD4015
It can be configured using 6 bits. This shift
The outputs of registers 538 Ql-Q6 are always buffered.
The contents of the shift register 538 are transferred to the buffer register 602 in synchronization with the rising edge of the timing pulse TBQ, which is applied to the input terminal DI-D6 of the register 602 and is applied as a clock to the buffer register 602. is captured and memorized. That is, the data AMAX taken into the shift register 538 is synchronized with TBI to TB6, and therefore, at the timing of TB7, the data AMAX is taken into the shift register 538.
Shift register 5
The content of 38 is the rising edge of TBO, and the content of buffer register 6
02 and stored.

The Q1 to Q6 outputs of the buffer register 602 are given to the AND gates AND31 to AND36, and one of the AND gates AND31 to AND36 is selectively output according to the stored AMAX. It is for conduction.

By the way, the fixed data ROM 534 receives the OP ratio output of the instruction ROM 504 at its C8 terminal, and the (OF of the operand code) shown in FIG.
As is clear from the term 2, this OF2 is II OI
Only in the case of I, the data specified by the instructions R and OM504 is outputted through the QO-C5 terminal.

Note that the buffer register 602 is an integrated circuit element C.
It can be constructed by combining three pieces of D4013 (manufactured by RCA). By the way, the integrated circuit element CD4
013 is a dual type D flip-flop as shown in the block diagram of FIG.

As described above, through the configuration described above, the instruction I
If the fixed data stored in the fixed data It OM2B5 is specified as an operand in the OM 504, the specified data is sent from the wired OR gate 0R13 receiving the output of the OR gate 0R12 to the signal line IO. The fixed data generated by the timing pulse T I
30 to 'rB7, and are sequentially output from the lower digits.

On the other hand, the output of a data selector 502 is given to the wired OR gate 01 (, t3). This data selector 502 is an integrated circuit whose logic diagram is shown in FIG. Element M
8 channels consisting of C14512 (manufactured by Motorola)
The data selector is configured to selectively output data input from the XO-X7 terminals from the Z terminal in accordance with input signals from the A, B, and C terminals. The outputs of OPo, OPI, and OF2 are inputted to the A, B, and C terminals from the instruction ROM 504, and as is clear from FIG. , DJ
DTSV, DTTV, DTAV, DTAO, DTA
C, BFt.

Each variable data of CR is selectively output to the Z terminal. Note that this data selector 502 receives the OP4 signal input through the inverter INV14 at its DIS terminal, and receives the OF2 signal input through the inverter INV15 at its INH terminal. Code OF2. As is clear from the OF2 section, this OF2. Only when OF2 is l/t, this data selector 502 outputs the variable data input from the XO to X7 terminals from the Z terminal, and performs wired or
It is output to the signal line 10 through the gate ORI 3.

As described above, through the configuration described above, the instruction R
When the variable data selected by the data selector 502 in the OM504 is specified as an operand, it is specified to the signal line 10 from the wired OR gate OR13 receiving the Z terminal output of the data selector 502. The variable data generated by the timing pulse T BO
~TB7 are output sequentially from the lower digits.

Still, the logic circuit 592 is connected to the condition signal storage circuit 548.
From MNAL signal, MNAL signal.

BLB signal, 5PDW signal, SPD/W signal.

It receives the ASL C signal input, and at the same time receives the ABCG signal, WN [JP times signal CU times signal input from the condition register 574. This logic circuit 592 is
The various signals are discriminated according to a certain logic to generate a display control signal for the digital display 402 and a control signal for the output control section 364 for the output control section 364.

This logic circuit 592 outputs a WNUP signal indicating that film winding is complete, and a warning signal "E E E
Display command signal EDSP of "E E E", display command signal BD8P of pulp display "b ul b", display command signal of "EF" indicating completion of strobe charging in strobe photography mode E F D 8. Indicates that it is necessary to manually set the aperture of lens device 2.”
The display command signal MDSP of M T+ is output.

The EDSP signal is generated when there is an operational error in the camera device, and as mentioned earlier, this occurs when the aperture lever is pressed while the mark 12 is selected on the lens device 2. 1-64, and mark 12 is selected on the lens device 2 with the film winding completed, and the lens device 2 is still being focused by the aperture lever 64.
Body 4 is not narrowed down.
The signal is output based on two conditions: AE on the side and <-94 in the Ag dis chirp condition. That is, this EDSP signal is EDSP=8PDW-MNAL+SPDW-MNAL・
WNUP-AECG・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ It is output in a state that satisfies the logical formula (+8).

In addition, in the BDSP signal, the valve signal BLB is "l"
This is the signal output when .

Further, the EFDS signal is a signal that is output when the CU multiplied signal is 1''.

The MD8P signal still indicates that the aperture value has been set with the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 and the lens device 2 has not been stopped down by the aperture lever 64, or the aperture has not been stopped down by the aperture lever 64. It is output in two states: , and when the shutter priority mode is in effect. That is, the MDSP signal is MD8P=8MM-MNAL+8PT)N-MNAL-
It is output in a state that satisfies the logical expression A8LC, -0-Ql.

The logic circuit 592 has a logic diagram shown in FIG. In the figure, the AND gate AND37. AND38°AND39 and ORI4 is a logical configuration to satisfy the above equation 08, and an EDSP signal is obtained from ORX4.

Also, AND gate AND40. AND41 and OR gate 0FL15 have a logical configuration to satisfy the above formula (19), and from OR gate 0R15, MDSP
I get a signal.

The output of the logic circuit 592 and the flip 70 tube
588, 59 (1) output TVF, AVF is then given to multiplexer 594 to generate timing pulse TB
It is converted into a signal synchronized with Q to TB7.

FIG. 78 is a block diagram of the multiplexer 594, to which the integrated circuit element Me 14512 whose detailed logic diagram is shown in FIG. 53 can be applied. This multi-
The plexer has input terminals XO-X7, but XO
The terminal is grounded, and its X1 terminal is connected to WN
LI P signal.

A V l” L signal to the X2 terminal, TV to the X3 terminal
FL signal, EDSP signal to X4 terminal, B to X5 terminal
The DSP signal, the X6 terminal receives the EFDS signal, and the X7 terminal receives the MDSP signal. These input signals are the counter pulse C input to the A, B, and C terminals.
Tl,C'! , '2, CT4, it is output in series from the Z terminal to the signal line 0 as a signal synchronized with the timing node THO to TB7.

As described above, the WNUP signal is used as the timing pulse TB1, and the AVFv signal is used as the timing pulse TB1.
2, the TVFL signal is connected to timing pulse TB3, E
The DSP signal is connected to the timing pulse TB4, the BDSP signal is connected to the timing pulse TB5, the BFDS signal is connected to the timing pulse TB6, and the MDSP signal is connected to the timing pulse TB4.
These signals are output to the signal line 0 in synchronization with the pulse TB7.

Incidentally, this multiplexer 594 receives the R8ND signal at its INH terminal, and while the FtSND signal is being output, the signal output from its Z terminal is restricted.

FIG. 79 is a logic diagram of the arithmetic circuit 500 shown in FIG.
D47 indicates a circulation gate of the B register 512, and AND49 indicates a circulation gate of the C register 514. A register 510. B register 512. In the normal state, the C register 514 inputs each of the AND gates AND45. AND47. A
Through ND49, each content AR, BJ CR
is circulating.

This arithmetic circuit 500 includes the instruction ROM
Operation control instruction OPO from 504.

OPI, OP2. OP3. OP4. OP5. OP6. O
Controlled by P7. Said instruction RO
The output of M504 is the instruction code O as shown in FIG.
P7. OP6. OP5 and operand code OP4. O
P3. OP2゜OP, 1. This arithmetic circuit 500 decodes each code through a group of gates and performs necessary arithmetic and control operations.

Further, this arithmetic circuit 500 includes a data selector 502
Various fixed data and variable data are taken in through the circuit, and these data are taken in from the output signal line [phase] of the circuit shown in FIG. 75 to the AND gate 1-AND60. Note that this AND gate AND60 connects the output signal line ω of the circuit shown in FIG. 71 through the inverter INV21.
) signal, but this is because when in external photometry mode, the acquisition of specified operand data is restricted only during steps that are unnecessary for calculation, and in effect unnecessary calculations are performed. This is to prevent it from happening. The output of this AND gate AND60 is the AND gate AN
D43 and exclusive or game) EX2 and AND, gate AND57. AND43 is given to AND59, but the AND43 is given to A register 51.
It is used when directly importing operand data into 0, and is used when the exclusive or gate EX2
and Antogame) AND57. AND 59 is used when calculating data A/R of A register 510 and operand data.

In Figure 79, exclusive or gate EX1, E
X2. EX3 and AND gate AND57°AND5
8. AND59. AND61. , or game) OR21
, constitutes the calculation section of the flip-flop F211d. The configuration of this calculation part is a well-known addition/subtraction circuit, and when OP6, which is the input of exclusive OR gate E'X1, is 0, it functions as an addition' circuit.
When 6 is "I It", the circuit operates as a subtraction circuit.As shown in the section of OP6 in FIG.
In the case of "l It", the configuration follows the instruction system of subtraction.Furthermore, the flip-flop F21 is an or game)
Carry memory that stores the carry generated from OR21.
It is a flip-flop, but it is used to store digits and carries for thorns in normal arithmetic operations.
The carry generated in the operation of the last digit, that is, the carry output from the OR gate 0R21 at the timing of TB7, is an AND game that receives the input of the signal obtained by inverting the timing control TB7 through the inverter INV15.
Controlled by AND61. This or game) O
The carry output from It 21 is passed through the AND gate AND56 to the carry-flip-flop 54.
This carry flip is given to the J terminal of 0.
Since the flop 540 receives, as its clock input, the inverted signal of the timing pulse TB7 (-inverted signal by the INV16 and the OR condition signal of the clock pulse CP) OR23, According to the terminal input, this clip 70 tube 540 is set or reset in synchronization with the rising edge of the first clock pulse CP at the timing of TB7. That is, this carry flip-flop 540 is set by the carry generated by timing pulse TB7, that is, by the carry generated at the last stage of the operation.

Note that when the operation mode is not in operation mode, as is clear from FIG. It is subject to regulation 1.

As mentioned above, the carry generated as a result of the operation is
The signal is detected and stored by the carry slip flop 540, and the CA multiplied signal is outputted from the Q output terminal as a CA multiplied signal.

Note that the calculation result obtained by the above-mentioned addition/subtraction circuit is outputted through the exclusive OR gate EX3 and given to the AND gate AND44. The output of this AND gate AND44 is OR gate 0R17
Therefore, if this AND gate λND44 is conductive, the result of the above operation will be introduced and stored in the A register 510. In this way, as is clear from FIG. 69, the operation result is taken into the A register 510 in the operation mode and when the register ON instruction signal is issued. That is, when OR7 is NOII and OR5 is 111, the AND gate ANI for data circulation of the A register
) 45 becomes non-conductive and the AND gate AND44 for taking in the calculation result becomes conductive.For this purpose, the AND gate AND51. Inverter INV21. It is Noah Gate N0R2. AND game) AND51 is OR5 and inverter I
It receives the input of the OR70 inverted signal obtained by 1llU of NV21, and outputs "1" only when OR7 is "0" and OR5 is "L", that is, when the output command from the instruction ROM 504 is ADD or SUB. Constructed as it is done. The l'' output of this AND gate AND51 is given to the AND gate AND44.
is made conductive, is inverted through NOR2, and is applied to AND45, inhibiting the gate AND45.

Through this configuration, the operation result is introduced into the A register 510.

AND GATE) AND43 is AND GATE AND6
This gate is provided to input fixed or variable data inputted through 0 into the A register 510, and the other input terminals receive the outputs of AND52 and AND53 through the OR gate ORI6. Is receiving. Said AND game) AND52 and AND5
3 is not conductive unless at least OR7 is 1T+, that is, in the data exchange mode, as is clear from FIG. The AND gate AND52 is also connected to the carry gate AND52.
It receives the Q output CA of the flip-flop 540 and the input of OR5, and as is clear from FIG. 69, it outputs "l" when OR5 is 1" and the signal IJ-CA is l". be. The AND gate AND53 also receives inputs from the Q output CA of the carry flip-flop 540 and OR6, and as is clear from FIG. 69, OR6 is If I 11 and carry CA is When °゛0"', the N I 11 output is performed. Through this configuration, the AND gate AND52 output becomes lII when the SWC command or S W [J match passes, ANDG) The AND53 output becomes "l++" when the SWN command or SW U command is passed.

Through the above configuration, when in the data exchange mode, if the output state of the carry flip-flop 540 matches the condition for being output from the instruction ROM 504, the OR gate 0R15 outputs "1'°," and In order to make gate AND43 conductive, AND
The variable or fixed data of the operand introduced through the gate AND60 will be taken into the A register 510 and stored. In addition, at this time, the above-mentioned or game) oF
Since the "1°" output of tt6 is given to the AND gate AND45 as a "0" signal through the NOR gate N0R2, the A register 51 by the gate AND45 is
Recycling of 0s is prohibited.

On the other hand, the output of the A register 510 is AND
This is given to D46 and AND48, but in the data exchange mode, if the operand data is B register BR or C register CR, A register 510
At the same time as fetching the operand data into
This is to move the data stored in the register 510 to the operand.

B register 512 or C register 51 as an operand
4 is selected, as is clear from FIG. 69, OF2.4 is selected among the operand codes. OF2. OF2. OP
All I become l'. This thing is AND gate AND5
Detected at 0. On the other hand, at this time, if the OPO is 0', the B register 512 is selected, and if the OPO is 1, the C register 514 is selected.Therefore, the OPO is directly applied to the AND55. At the same time, AND gate A through inverter I N V 20,
Given to ND54.

Since the AND gate AND54 is supplied with the output of the AND gate 50 and the output of the OR gate OIt16, the B register 512 is specified as an operand in the data exchange mode, and the conditions for data exchange are The AND gate A N I is satisfied only when
) 54 performs the "I II ratio output," and this "l" output passes through the OR gate 0R20 to the AND
46. Therefore, the above AND gate AND
46 becomes conductive, and therefore, the data in the A register 510 is as follows: AND46, OR46, oR,
It will be taken into the B register 512 through l8. In addition, at this time, the I II ratio output of OR gate 0R20 and the AND gate A through inverter INV18.
Data B of B register 512 is given to ND47.
AND47 for cycling R is prohibited. In addition to the OPO signal, the output of the AND gate 50 and the output of the OR16 are given to the AND gate 55, so in the data exchange mode, the C register 514 is designated as an operand. Only when the data exchange condition is satisfied, the AND gate AND55 outputs "1" and the AND gate AND55 outputs "1".
Game) Give to AND48. Therefore, the AND/G) A-ND 46 becomes conductive, and therefore the A register 51
0 data is the AND gate AND48. It will be taken into the C register 514 through the OR gate ORx 9. In addition, at this time, AND game) AND55
'l II ratio output is given to AND gate AND49 through inverter INV19, so C register 5
AND gate A for circulating 14 data CRs
ND49 is prohibited.

Furthermore, since the carry flip-flop 540 receives the input of OF2 at its terminal, it is in the data exchange mode and is synchronized with the rising edge of the first clock pulse CP at the time of the first timing pulse TB7. However, at the timing of TB7, the commanded data exchange has been completed.

Through the above-described configuration, this arithmetic circuit 500 performs necessary arithmetic operations or data exchange according to instructions from the instruction ROM 504.
By operating this arithmetic circuit 500 according to each routine shown in the figure, the A register 510 finally contains control information for displaying on the digital display 402, regardless of whether the result of the arithmetic operation is obtained or it is initially set. Aperture value or
Data regarding the aperture value is obtained, and the B register 512 contains the value, regardless of whether it has been set as a result of calculation or was initially set.
Control data regarding the shutter speed for display and control is obtained, and control data for controlling the number of aperture stages of the lens device 2 is obtained in the C register 514.

As mentioned above, when the calculation by this calculation circuit 500 is completed, the R8ND signal is output from the logic circuit 598 receiving the output of the program counter 582. The signal is at the A level between the next three words.

This R8ND signal is the AND42. Noah gate N01 (2, or game) is given to OR20, so the AND gate AND42. AND46 becomes conductive, and AND45. AND47 is prohibited. Therefore, the output of the register is the AND gate AND42. A register 5101' (directly connected through OR gate 0R17, and the output of A register 510 is connected to AND gate A
Since it is directly connected to the I3 register 512 through the ND46 and the OR gate 0Ett8, the data AR of each of the A, B, and C registers is transmitted from the signal line 0 to the 3-word interval where the R8ND signal is l°'. .

BJC1't is the content B[also of B register 512.

The contents AFL of the A register 510 and the contents Crt of the C register 5111 are sequentially output in this order.

The signal line ① output of the multiplexer 594 shown in the 78th figure and the output line @ output of the arithmetic circuit 500 shown in the 79th figure are given to an output logic circuit 596.

This output logic circuit 596 has a configuration as shown in the logic diagram of FIG. 80, and is responsible for loading time-controlled data and signals onto the output bus line 374. It is something.

This output logic circuit 596 has an OR gate 0R24 at its output to the output bus line 374, and the output of the signal line 0 and the AND gate AN.
D64. ANI) 63 outputs are given. The output of signal line 0 is the WNUP signal, Av, synchronized with timing pulses TBL-TB7 from multiplexer 594.
FL signal, TVFL signal, EDSP signal, BDSP signal, EFDS signal, MDSP signal.
It will be placed on the output bus line 374 through gate 0R24. As mentioned above, the output of this multiplexer 594 is regulated during the 3-word period when the R8ND signal is at a high level.

On the other hand, when the R, 8ND signal goes to the A level,
This high level signal makes the AND 65 receiving the signal line 0 output from the arithmetic circuit 500 conductive. The output of this AND gate AND65 is given to the AND gate AND64, which receives the valve information from the setting condition storage circuit 548.
It receives the output of the NAND gate NAND3, which receives the signal BLB indicating the mode and the signal CU from the condition register 574 indicating that it is not in the strobe photography mode, and therefore, it is not in the strobe photography mode and the shutter speed is set to bulb. Otherwise, the AND gate A and ND64 become conductive. Therefore, the R8ND signal becomes "1" through the AND64.
The B register 5 of the arithmetic circuit 500 is
12. A register 510. Each content B of C register 514
l(,,AJ CR sequentially outputs the output bus line 37 from OR gate 0R24 in synchronization with the timing pulse.
It will be listed on 4th.

On the other hand, if the flash photography mode is not in effect and the bulb is set as a single shutter speed, the output of the NAND gate NAND3 becomes 0'', and therefore the AND gate A N I) 64 is prohibited. Therefore, the data output from the arithmetic circuit 500 to the signal line @ is not loaded onto the output bus line 374.

However, in such a bulb photography mode, as mentioned before, the aperture value is controlled to be open and the aperture value AV of the lens device 2 is set to the maximum aperture value.

is displayed on the digital display 402.

Therefore, the data for controlling the number of aperture stages is all pits "0".
", but in order to display the maximum aperture value AVo, it is necessary to transfer the maximum aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 used to the output control section 360. The maximum aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 to be used may be placed on the bus line 374 at the same timing as the value, that is, the data AR of the A register 510, is placed on the bus line 374. game)
AND62. AND63 is provided. AND62 is the Q of the program counter 582
5 output and the S11 output of the decoder 600 are input. Therefore, this AND62 inputs the data AR of the A register 510 from the arithmetic circuit 500 to the output line 0.
When output to , it becomes "1" only for the same l word period. AND game) AND63 is the aforementioned NAND game) NAND3
The output of the AND gate AND62 and the 37th
The signal from the circuit shown in the figure, that is, DTAO, is given. Therefore, when the bulb is selected when not in the strobe photography mode, the data AR of the A register 510 is output from the arithmetic circuit 500. At the timing, the open aperture value data AVO of the photographic lens device 2 used is
It is placed on output bus line 374 through gate 0R24.

Figure 81 shows bus line 366 and human-powered bus line 3.
70. 3 is an explanatory diagram summarizing what has been previously described regarding signals and data placed on output bus line 374. FIG.

That is, bus line 366 has a timing pulse T
A 0” signal is placed between the timings of B O-T B 3, and CA is synchronized with the timing pulse TBS.
LE signal is AD in synchronization with timing pulse TB6
CE signal is IN in synchronization with timing pulse TB7.
The signal on bus line 366 is connected to input control section 360 . Central control unit 362. Each part of the output control unit 364 plays an important role in determining the timing for data transfer.

Still, the input bus line 370 plays an important role in transferring various signals and data from the input control section 360 to the central control section 362 based on the timing pulses TBO to TB7. During signal transfer, the ADOF signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TBl, the ABLK signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TB2, the ABCG signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TB3, the WNUP signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TB4, and the timing pulse TB4 is synchronized with the ADOF signal.
The AO multiplication signal timing is carried out in synchronization with the pulse TBS, and the CU multiplication signal is carried in synchronization with the pulse TB6.
), the timing pulse TBO~TB
In synchronization with 7, the data of % stacking degree is sequentially loaded from the lower digit.

Furthermore, the output bus line 374 plays an important role in transferring various signals and data from the central control section 362 to the output control section 364 based on the timing pulses TBO to TB7. During signal transfer, the WNUP signal is synchronized with timing pulse TB1, the TVFL signal is synchronized with timing pulse TB2, the A V P L signal is synchronized with timing pulse TB3, and the Er signal is synchronized with timing pulse TB4. ) SP double signal The BDSP signal is loaded in synchronization with the timing pulse TH5, the EFD8 signal is loaded in synchronization with the timing pulse TB6, and the MDSP signal is loaded in synchronization with the timing pulse TB7. In the case of TV, aperture value AV, open aperture value AVo, controlled aperture control number AVs, etc., timing pulse TBO~T
In synchronization with B7, data of % stacking degree is sequentially loaded from the lower digit.

The missing output control section 364 will be explained.

The output control section 364 has two main functions. One is a display control function and the other is an exposure control function.

Various condition signals and various data are input to this output control section 364 from the central control section 362 through an output bus line 374. Since these signals and data are input under temporal control, in order to know what kind of signal or data is input to the output bus line 374, it is necessary to check the signal or data. It is necessary to know the time that is placed on the output bus line 374.

A synchronization circuit 660 receiving a signal input from bus line 366 is provided to obtain this time.

The detailed circuit diagram of this synchronization circuit 660 is shown in FIG. 82, where 700 is a ring counter. The ring counter 700 can be implemented using an integrated circuit device CD4035 whose logic diagram is shown in FIG.

Bus line 366fd, timing pulse 1゛B6
Since it is input to the D terminal of flip-flop F22 which operates in synchronization with
bus line 36 in synchronization with timing pulse TBS
6 is detected. The Q output of this flip-flop F22 is connected to the flip-flop F23 which operates in synchronization with the timing pulse TBO.
is applied to the D input terminal of This flip-flop F
The Q output of No. 23 is input to the clock terminal CLK of the ring counter 700 through an AND gate AND66 to which the timing pulse TBO is input. This ring counter 700 returns its QO and Q3 outputs to the J and N terminals via an AND gate AND67. Note that the QO of the ring counter 700
Clock pulse C is output to specific output signal line 0.
It is output to the signal line [phase] through the OR gate 0R27 which receives the input of P, and the signal line [phase] is output through the OR gate (OR gate) which receives the input of Ql high output clock pulse CP, and the Q3 output is Clock Nokubus CP
OI (.

The signal is output to the signal line via 25.

Note that the Q output of the flip-flop F23 is input to the 8 terminals of the flip-flop F24, and the Q output is output to the signal line O.

The R terminal of this flip-flop F24 has a power
An up clear signal PtJC is provided.

Further, a direct reset signal is inputted to the direct reset terminal R of the flip-flop F23 from a signal line [phase] which will be described later.

The operation of this configuration will be explained with reference to FIG. 83.

Now bus line 366 has timing bus TB5
When a synchronized CALE signal is placed on the timing
Flip-flop F operating in synchronization with pulse TB6
22 is set and its Q output becomes 1''.The CA
Since the LE signal is output for 4 words, the flip-flop F22 continues to output "1" for 4 words.

The Q output of the flip-flop F22 is a flip-flop synchronized with the timing pulse TBO.

- Since it is input to the D terminal of the flop F23, this flip-flop F23 is set in synchronization with the rising edge of the next timing pulse TBO, and its Q output becomes 6-bit. Since the flip-flop [222] is in the set state for 4 words, this flip-flop 7'F 23 similarly continues to be set for 4 words.

The Q output of the clip-flop F23 receives the timing pulse TBO, AND6
6, so this AND game) From AND66, the above clip.

- A signal synchronized with TBO will be output for 4 words after the flop F23 is set.

Since the output of this AND66 is given to the clock terminal CLK of the ring counter 790,
This ring counter 700 is a timing pulse TB
QO, Ql, Q2 . From the Q3 output terminal, an output as shown in Figure 83 will be made.
Qo of this ring counter 700, Q4. The output of Q2 is input to the AND gate AND67, and the output of the AND67 is input to the J and 2 terminals because, at the start of counting, from the QO terminal,
This is to output a count output. In addition, this ring
The reason why the output polarity of the counter 700 is normally "1" and becomes "0" during count output is that such an output characteristic is obtained by grounding the T/C terminal.

Therefore, a signal output at the "OII level" is output to the signal line [phase] only for the next one word time after the first CALE signal is detected.

Also, OR gate 0R25, 0I-t26. OR.

27, pulses having falling characteristics are output from signal lines Q, d, and Gφ at each rise time of timing pulses TBQ to TB7, as shown in FIG. In addition, the signal line. −■ falling output is output bus
It corresponds to the word time when each ridge signal is placed on the line 366, and the falling output of the signal line QΦ corresponds to the word time when the shutter speed data TV is placed on the output bus line 366, and the signal line ( It is clear from the relationship between the respective building signals and the data sending times described above that the falling output of the signal corresponds to the word time at which the control aperture stage number data AVs is loaded onto the output bus line 366.

On the other hand, flip-flop F24 is set by the Q output of flip-flop F23, but the output signal from the Q4 child of flip-flop F24 to signal line 0 indicates that the first operation is not completed. It is used to prevent the camera mechanism from performing any operations after the shutter release. This clip-flop F24 connects the power up clear signal PUC to its reset terminal R.
received. Also, this bus line 366 is input to the D terminal of the 7 flip-flop F25 of the timing pulse TBO4Q;
is applied to bus line 36 at the time of timing pulse TB7.
6, that is, the A of the input control section 360.
It is used to detect a signal indicating that the -D converter is integrating input analog data, and its Q output is placed on the signal line Go.

The flip-flop F23 of this synchronization circuit 660 receives a direct reset signal input from the signal line [phase] to its direct reset terminal R, but this is due to the time before the shutter release and the shutter release time. After the self-timer is activated, the flip 70 7
"This is to prohibit the setting operation of F23. This is to prevent other data, especially after the shutter release is performed and each mechanism of the camera device starts operating, based on a certain calculation result. When performing TTL metering, data affected by aperture or mirror up is input,
This is to prevent normal exposure control operation from being disturbed.

Various signals and data on the output bus line 366 are separated based on temporal judgment by the output from the synchronization circuit 660 and the timing pulse TBO-TB7 as described above. These are incorporated into the respective corresponding functional parts of the output control section 364.

Each signal on the output bus line 366 is processed by a demultiplexer 610 into a timing pulse TBO-
It undergoes separation based on TB7 and is stored in output control register 622.

Such a demultiplexer 610 and output control register 6
22 is shown in detail in FIG. 84, and the demultiplexer 610 includes:
The integrated circuit device CD4015 whose logic diagram is shown in FIG. 62 is applied, and the integrated circuit device CD403 whose logic diagram is shown in FIG. 38 is still used as the output control register 622.
5 is applied twice.

In such a configuration, the demultiplexer 610 connects the signal line [phase] of the 82nd illustrated circuit 660 to its clock terminal C.
It receives the output input and also outputs the output control register 62.
2 receives the timing pulse TBI and the signal line (multi-output AND condition signal) of the synchronization circuit 660 shown in FIG. bus line 366
At the next word time, the CALE signal synchronized with the timing pulse TB5 is placed on the output bus line 378 as shown in FIG. 81 in synchronization with the timing pulses TBI to TB7. AVFL,E
DSP, BDSP.

Since the EI"DS and MASP signals are input, the demultiplexer 610 takes in the signals in series between these words using the signal line 0 output as a timing pulse. After this operation, the next word time Then, signal line 0
Since the output changes from a low level to a high level, the AND gate AND69 outputs a signal synchronized with the timing pulse TB1, so that the QOl of the demultiplexer 610, Ql1. Q21. Q31.
QO2゜Ql2. Each output of Q22 is taken into the output control register 622 from the DQ-B5 terminal and stored therein. As a result, the output control register 62
MDSP from each output terminal of QO-Q6 of 2.

EFDS, HDSP, EDSP, AVFL, TVF'L
.

Each signal of WNUP will be output.

On the other hand, the data on the output bus line 374, such as the shutter speed TV, aperture value AV, and the number of control stages AVs, are handled as data for controlling each mechanism of the camera device and data for display. are different.

Now, to explain how to import data for display,
In the output bus line 374, there are two pieces of data used for display: shutter speed data TV and aperture value data AV. These signals are rounded off through the display control circuit 652 and converted into a form suitable for display on the digital display 402. Also, in order to prevent the digital display 402 from flickering due to sudden changes in data, data conversion is performed. The display aperture value is adjusted based on the word time in which each data is loaded on the output bus line 374 after adjusting the interval of reading to such an extent that there is no flicker. are taken into and stored in the shutter speed display register 650, respectively.

FIG. 85 shows a detailed logic configuration diagram of a data acquisition circuit for such display.

In the figure, 998 is a rounding circuit for rounding off the data input from the output bus line 374, and is constituted by an integrated circuit element CD4032 (manufactured by FtCA). This integrated circuit device CD4032 is formed by three serial adders, the block diagram of which is shown in FIG. 86, and the logic diagram of which is shown in FIG. In the circuit shown in No. 85, only one of them is used.

The rounding circuit 998 receives the output data of the output bus line 374 at its Al terminal and receives the timing pulse TBI at its B1 terminal. Further, a timing pulse TB7 is input to the carry terminal CA.

In such a configuration, the output bus line 374
When data is input to the terminal, the % stacking degree bit is T.
The timing pulse TBl is inputted to the Bl terminal at the same timing, perhaps because it is inputted at the timing of BI. In other words, l'' is added only to the % stage density bit of the data, but if "l" is set in the h stage density bit, the % stage density bit is added. A carry is generated and a carry is performed, and the % of the data is
If the stacking degree bit is set to "0", the carry does not reach the % stacking degree bit. Therefore, as long as we look at the output data from the S terminal of this rounding circuit 998 and look at the higher digits than the bits of % stacking degree, this output data is the % stacking degree rounded off by the bits of % stacking degree. It becomes data.

As described above, in the rounding circuit 998, the data is converted into % stage density data suitable for display, and the data output from the S terminal is sent to the aperture position display register 64.
8 and the D terminal of the shutter speed display register 650, respectively. It should be noted that at this stage, it is necessary to determine what the data rounded to the nearest whole number and converted into % stacking degree in the four-step rounding circuit 998 relates to, based on time-based judgment. Each register 648,650
In accordance with the control pulses input to the respective clock terminals C, the corresponding data will be taken in.

Note that this rounding circuit 998 has its carry terminal C
It is reset by receiving the timing pulse TB7 at A.

The aperture display register 648 has its clock terminal C connected to a slip flop F2 through an OR gate 0R31.
7 and the OR condition of the clock pulse CP, and the shutter speed display register 65
0 receives at its clock terminal C the Q output of the flip-flop F26 and the OR condition of the clock pulse CP through the OR gate 0R32.

The Q output of the flip-flop F26 is zero power of the flip-flop F27, and the D input of the flip-flop F26 is connected to the inverter INV25.
It receives the output of OR, 29.

On the other hand, the Q output of the clip-flop F27 is given to the set terminal S of the flip-flop F28,
The Q output is given to OR28.

OR game) OR28 is one inverter INV24
From the signal line [phase] connected to the signal source described later via
2H2 on/off signal is input, and this OR/OFF signal is input.
The output signal of 0R28 is the OR gate ott.
Given to 29. This or game) OR29, on the other hand,
It receives a signal input from signal line 0, which is the QO terminal output of the ring counter 700 shown in the 82nd figure. In addition, 2Hz on from the signal line.

The off signal is also applied to the reset terminal R of the flip-flop F28 through OR30. The reset terminal R of this clip-flop F28 is also connected to the power up signal through the OR gate 0R30.
A clear signal PLIC is input. On the other hand, the flip-flop F26. The power up clear signal PtJC is also input to each direct reset terminal R of F2f.

With this configuration, its operation will be explained according to the timing chart of FIG. 88. When the 2H2 signal sent from the signal line [phase] reaches the NO level, the output of the inverter INV24 becomes low.・It becomes the level. In this state, the 7-rip-flop F28 is in the reset state, and its Q output is e! Q l", the output of the OR gate OR,=,28 is 0", and therefore the OR gate
The gate 0R29 is input from the signal line ◎ in Figure 82.
The QO small output of the indicating ring counter 700, i.e. normally "1"
", it is possible to output a signal that becomes "O" only for one word following the CALE signal.

The output of this OR gate 0R29 is the inverter INV2
5 to the D terminal of the flip-flop F26 synchronized with the timing pulse TBO, this flip-flop F26 outputs "1" for one word from the inverter INV25, and outputs "1" for the next one word. The flip-flop F26 is set for a period of time.The period when the flip-flop F26 is set corresponds to the time when the shutter speed data TV is loaded on the output bus line 374, so the Q of this slip-flop F26 is Output and clock
Through the OR gate 0R32 receiving the input of the pulse CP, the shutter speed display register 650 is
When a clock pulse for data capture is applied, the display value TVDS from the rounding circuit 998 is captured and stored in the register 650. On the other hand, since the Q output of the slip-flop F26 is input to the D terminal of the flip-flop F27 synchronized with the timing pulse TBO, this flip-flop F27 is connected to the 1 to which the clip-flop F26 is set. It is set only during the next word between words. Therefore, this flip: flop F
27 is set, the output bus line 374
This corresponds to the time when the aperture value data AV is loaded on the OR gate 0R3, which receives the Q output of this flip-flop F27 and the input of the clock pulse CP.
1, when a clock pulse for data acquisition is applied to the aperture value display register 648,
The displayed aperture value AVDS from the rounding circuit 998 is
It will be taken into the register 648 and stored.

Note that since the Q output of the flip-flop F27 is given to the set terminal of the flip-flop F28,
Along with the setting of the flip-flop F27, this flip-flop F28 is also set, and its Q output becomes "l".
o”.

This Q output is given to OR gate 0R28 to make the sono output '1', so the output of OR gate 0R28 is 'l'.
” and is applied to the OR gate 0R29. Therefore, the signal from the signal line [phase] does not pass through the OR gate 0R29, and the flip-flops F2, 6, and F27 are also held in the 4-set state. Therefore, the corresponding data for the shutter speed display register 650 and the aperture value display register 648 are not updated.

This flip-flop F28 receives the inverted signal of the 2Hz signal from the signal line [phase] by the inverter INV24 through the OR gate 0R30.
It will be reset when the Hz signal becomes low level.

On the other hand, this low level 2Hz signal applies "l"lo to the OR gate 0R28 through the inverter INV24, making its output "1", so the signal from the signal line 0 is not received. The state of not being allowed is maintained.

Next, when the 2Hz signal from the signal line [phase] becomes high level, the flip 70 tube F28 output turns on, so the signal from the signal line [phase] can be received, and therefore In the same manner as described above, a new displayed shutter speed TVDS is input to the shutter speed display register 650, and a new displayed aperture value AVDS is input to the aperture value display register 648. Each will be captured and memorized.

Through the above-described configuration, data for display, including shutter speed and aperture value, is captured every 2 Hz, so flickering and flickering due to small changes in data within the digital display 402 are avoided. This method can prevent erroneous reading, and is an extremely effective data capture or display method for a digital display system.

As described above, the displayed aperture value AVDS and the displayed shutter speed TVDS are rounded to the aperture value display register 648 and the shutter speed display register 650, and are captured at 2Hz intervals as % stage density data. The following display control circuit 624 and display driver 65
6 will be displayed on the digital display 402.

The display control circuit 624 does not simply display the aperture value and shutter speed, but also displays symbols, etc., controls blinking of the display, etc., as shown in FIG. 10, depending on the operation mode and operating state of the camera device. It is also necessary to perform various signals TVFL, which are taken in from the output bus line 374 and stored in the output control register 622.
, AVFL, ED8P, BDSP, EFDS, MDSP
etc. are involved.

The detailed block diagram of the display control circuit 624 is shown in FIG. 89. In the same figure, 702 is a decoder ROM for displaying the aperture position, and the second one of the display in the viewfinder in FIG. Table I Aperture value and "OP" tl CL" for the receiving part 250.

704 is a decoder ROM for displaying the shutter speed, and is used to display the shutter speed on the first display section 244. It is also 706
is "EEEE"s for the first display section 244.
” b u L b 'Z ” b E F ” +
These are decoders for displaying symbols such as "EF" and LOM.

As mentioned above, the digital display 402 is dynamically driven based on the timing pulses TBI to TB6, and the details will be explained with reference to the plan view of the digital display 402 shown in FIG. 90.

In the figure, the first display section 244 includes a display element 708 for displaying fractions, four 7-segment display elements 710 and 714° for displaying shutter speed and symbols, and a decimal point display element 7.
The 7-segment display element 718 is driven to display at the timing of timing pulse TB3, and the 7-segment display element 7j6 is driven to display at the timing of timing pulse TB4, resulting in a 7-segment display. Element 714 and display element 7 for fraction display
08 is driven for display at the timing of the timing pulse TB5, and the 7 segment display element 710 and the decimal point display element 712 are driven for display at the timing of the timing pulse TB6.

Also, in the figure, the second display section 250 is composed of seven segment display elements 720, 724 and a decimal point display element 722, and the third display section 252 is composed of "M".
It is composed of a display element 726 for displaying information, and includes the 7-segment display element 724 and MI! The display element 726 for displaying has a timing node (T).
The display is driven at the timing of timing pulse B1, and the seven segment display element 720 and the decimal point display element 722 are driven for display at the timing of timing pulse TB2.

Therefore, each of the seven segment display elements 710°714.
716, 718, 720, 724 in parallel with a time-division display signal synchronized with timing pulses TBO to TB7, and the display element 726 for displaying "M" and the decimal point display element 722, 712. This digital display 402 can be dynamically driven by providing a display signal synchronized with each of the timing pulses TBI, TB2, TB6, and TB5 in one line to the display element 708 for displaying fractions. I can do it.

Note that as the display device 402, R7A-122-9 (B
(manufactured by OW MAR) can be used.

The aperture position display decoder R,0M702 is composed of an integrated circuit element 1702A having a configuration as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 68, and its input terminal AO
receives the input of the timing pulse TB2, and the input terminals A1-A6 receive the aperture position display register 648.
Further, the input terminal A7 receives an input of the EDSP signal from the output control register 622.

In addition, the τ terminal has 1. Timing...＜Pulse T
Noah game receiving input from BI and TB2) NOR3
The output of (or game) is input through OR40.

Therefore, the output of the aperture position display decoder ROM 702 is restricted at least at times other than the timings of TBI and TB2. Therefore, at the timing of TB1, the input to the AO terminal is "0", and at the timing of TB2, the input to the AO terminal is "1". Therefore, according to the input data from the aperture value display register 648, the 7-segment display element 724 and the 7-segment display element 720 of the digital display 402 are output from the output terminals DO to D7 at each timing of the timing pulses TBI and TB2.
, outputs eight lines for display driving of the decimal point display element 722.

The output of the 7 lines of Do-D6 of the (7) decoder ROM 702 is the 7-segment display element 720.7.
24 segment selection and the decoder ROM.
The output of one line of D7 of 702 is the decimal point display element 7.
22, respectively, will be used for selective driving.

The shutter speed display decoder ROM 704 has a sixth
It is composed of an integrated circuit element 1702A having a configuration as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 8, and a timing pulse TB4. The input terminal A1 receives the output of the OR gate OR-38 which receives the input of TB6, and the output of the OR gate OR39 which receives the timing pulse TBS and TB6 at the input terminal A1. Further, input terminals A2 to A7 receive the output of a shutter speed display register 650. In addition, the output of NOR3, which receives the input of timing pulses TBl and TB2, is connected to the inverter IN to its n terminal.
V34, OR Gate 0I (42, OR Kate 0R4
It is input through 3. Therefore, the shutter speed display decoder I (, OM 7o4 is at least T
B1. , /T B The output is regulated at the timing of 2. Therefore, the output of this decoder ROM 704 has meaning at the timings of TB3 to TB5, but at this timing, pulse TB4. TB5. TB6
When neither is input, that is, at the timing of TB3, both the inputs of the AO and AI terminals become "0", and when the timing pulse TB4 is input, only the input of the AO terminal becomes "1". Also, when the timing pulse TBS is input, only the terminal input of that person becomes "L", and when the timing pulse TB6 is input, both the AO and AI terminal inputs become "L". . Therefore, according to the output from the shutter speed display register 650, at each timing of timing pulses TB3 to TB6, output terminals DO to D7 output signals to the seven segment display elements 718 of the digital display 402, respectively.
．． 7-segment display element 716, 7-segment display element 714, fraction display element 708, 7-segment display element 710, and decimal point display element 712 for display driving.
Outputs the line.

Note that the 7-line output of Do-D6 of this decoder ROM 704 is the same as that of the 7-segment display elements 710 and 714.
, 716, and 718, and one line output of D7 of the decoder ROM 702 is used to select and drive the fraction display element 708 and the decimal point display element 722, respectively.

The symbol display decoder ROM 706 is composed of an integrated circuit element 1702A having a configuration as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 68, and inputs timing pulses TB4. to its input terminal AQ through the OR gate 0R38. It receives input from TB6, and input terminal Al
receives timing pulses TBS and TB6 through the OR gate 0R39. In addition, "BF" is input to input terminals A4-86, respectively.

A signal is input to command the display of "bEF", "buLb", and "EEBE". In addition, the C8 terminal is connected to the output of NOR3, which receives timing pulses TBI and TB2, to inverter INV3.
4. Or game) It is input through OR41. Therefore, the output of the shutter speed display decoder ROM 706 is restricted at least at the timings of TBI and TB2. Therefore, this decoder ROM 706
The output of is meaningful at the timing of TB3 to TB6, but now the timing path TB4゜TB5. TB6
When neither is input, that is, at the timing of TB3, the inputs of the AO and At terminals are both 0'', and when the timing pulse TB4 is input, only the AQ terminal input is ``1''. , When timing pulse T'B5 is input, only the one terminal input of that person becomes "■", and when timing pulse TB5 is input, that AO.

Both AI terminal inputs become "L". Therefore, this de=r
-p'' ROM 706B According to the input from the person's 4 to A7 terminals, at each timing of timing pulses TB3 to TB5, output terminals DO-D6 output 7 segment display elements 718.7 segments of the digital display 402, respectively. Display element 716.7 segment display element 71
4. Outputs 7 lines for display driving of the 7-segment display element 710. Note that the seven line outputs DO to D6 of the decoders R and OM 706 are used for segment selection of the seven segment display elements 710, 714, 716, and 718.

Note that each of the decoder ROMs 702. 704°706
The outputs of each DO~D6 are combined, and a total of 7
It is given to the display drive circuit 656 as a line signal.

Further, the D7 outputs of the decoders FLOM702 and FLOM704 are combined into one line and applied to the display drive circuit 656 through the OR37. As the display drive circuit 656, two 75491 (manufactured by T1) are used.

On the other hand, the signal for displaying the nM I+ symbol display element 726 is obtained by outputting the MDSP signal in synchronization with the timing pulse TB1 according to ANDG 7.4. This and game)AN
The output of D74 is passed through OR37,
It is applied to the display drive circuit 656 together with the D7 outputs of the decoder ROMs 702 and 704.

Note that the output of each of the decoder ROMs 702, 704, and 706 is regulated by various factors. In particular, since each output of the decoder ROMs 704 and 706 is output in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to TB5,
It is necessary to select one of them and output it.

Also, if you want the shutter speed display data to blink,
It is necessary to regulate the output of the decoder R, 0M704 at a fixed cycle, and when you want the aperture value display data to blink, it is necessary to regulate the output of the decoder ROM'702 at a fixed cycle, and also to display an error warning. To display “EE EEEE” blinking, use decoder R, 0M7-02, 70.
It is necessary to regulate the output of 6 at a constant cycle, and furthermore, while the input analog data is being integrated by the A-D converter in the input control section 360, that is, while the INT signal is being input, Since there is a possibility that the light emitted from the digital display 402 in the viewfinder may adversely affect the TTL photometry system, the output of all decoders R, 0M702, 704, and 706 is regulated and the digital display 402 is disabled. Furthermore, when the camera mechanism is operating for exposure, the light emitted from the digital display 402 in the viewfinder may have an adverse effect on the exposure, and when the self-timer is operating or when In order to prevent wasted battery consumption due to unnecessary operation of the digital display 402 when photographing with an exposure time of
It is necessary to perform output regulation at 704° and 706 to disable the digital display 402.

In FIG. 89, the NOR gate N0R5 has a signal line [phase],
A signal is input from ■, but from signal line ◎,
“1” before the exposure control mechanism of the camera device starts operating.
A signal that becomes "l II" is input from the signal line O, and a signal that becomes "l II" after the exposure control mechanism of the camera device finishes its operation. Therefore, this Noah Gate N
0R5 outputs a signal that becomes "1" when the exposure control mechanism of the camera device is in operation. The output of this NOR gate 0R34 is applied to the OR gate 0R34. On the other hand, an INT signal indicating that integration is in progress is input from the signal line [phase] shown in FIG. This will act as a blanking signal to erase all displays. The output of the OR gate 0R34 is inverted from the OR gate 0R35 through the inverter INV27, and is output as a 0'' signal.
Game) Since it is given to AND74, AND gate A
The output of the ND 74 is regulated, so that the selection display signal for displaying "M" is blanked.

On the other hand, the output of the OR gate 0R35 is connected to the lever terminal of the decoder R, 0M702' through the OR gate OR4-0, and to the C8 terminal of the decoder ROM704 through the OR gate 0R42 and 0R43.
42 and 0R43 to the v terminals of the decoder ROM 706, each of the decoders R
OM702°704, 706+17) Since blanking is applied to each output, the display on the digital display 402 is restricted.

Note that clock pulse CP is applied to OR gate 0R35.
is given, and when the output of the OR34 is O'', a signal synchronous with the clock pulse CP is always output, but this clock pulse CP
The signals synchronized with the decoder ROMs 702 and 704
This is used for blanking so that unnecessary data is not displayed on the digital display 402 when the output contents of the 706 change.

Now, the shutter speed is displayed on the first display section 244 of the digital display section 402, and the aperture value or IIcL""oP is displayed on the second display section 250.
When displaying a symbol such as "Oq" and, if necessary, displaying "M" on the third display section 252, the BD8F signal, EDSP signal, and EFDS signal are naturally "0". , Therefore, “σ1” of the decoder ROM 702
As mentioned above, a blanking signal is applied to one terminal at a time other than TBI and TB2, and since the decoder R, 0M704, as mentioned above, a blanking signal is applied to one terminal. A blanking signal is applied at the timing of and TB2. On the other hand, for the v100 terminal of the self-decoder ROM 706, the BDSP signal, ED8F signal and EF
AND gate AND73 receiving DS signal input
The output signal of the decoder ROM 706 is regulated because it is given as a blanking signal through the OR41. .

Therefore, based on the outputs from the decoder ROMs 702 and 704, the digital display 402 displays the shutter speed on its first display section 244, and displays the aperture value or "cL" on its second display section 250. "OP", 00
"M I+" is displayed on the third display section 252, if necessary.

In this display state, if the aperture value currently calculated as a result of calculation exceeds the limit that requires no Il control in the lens device 2, the aperture value display should be changed to 6 (11 as an AVFL signal). As already mentioned, the AVFL signal is output as 2H.
From the signal line [phase] on which the on/off signal of z is mounted, the NAND gate NAND3t is given the on/off signal of 2H2 through TNV33, so this NAND gate NAND375\ etc. A 2Hz on/off signal is output, and the
Input to AND4. On the other hand, this Nando game) NA
ND4 receives the input of NAND2, but since the EDSP signal of this NAND3 is 0'', its output is 1'', so the corresponding NAND 4 will output a 2Hz on/off signal. This NAND gate NAND4 output is input to the C8 terminal of the decoder ROM7σ-2 through the OR gate 0R40.
Blanking is applied to the output of the ROM at 2 Hz.

Therefore, the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 of the digital display 402 is switched on and off at 2 Hz by the decoder ROM 702.

Also, if the shutter speed determined as a result of the calculation exceeds the limit that can be controlled by the body 4, the shutter speed display should blink (I have already mentioned that l'' is output as the TVFL signal). , In this case, the TVFL signal is 2H from the signal line [phase] on which the z on/off signal is carried through the inverter INV33.
AND gate A to which the on/off signal of z is given
Since it is given to ND72, this AND game) AND7
2 outputs a 2Hz on/off signal. The output of this AND72 is input to the C8 terminal of the decoder R,0M704 through the 1-OR gate 0R43, and blanking is applied to the output of the ROM at 2 Hz. Therefore, the shutter speed display displayed on the first display section 244 of the digital display 402 is caused to blink at 2 Hz by the decoder ROM 704.

Next, as previously mentioned, when the camera enters the o-photo shooting mode and a charging completion signal is given to the input control section 360, the "lI+" signal as an EFDS signal is output from the central control section 362. However, at this time, as shown in FIGS. 10(C) and 10(d), the shutter speed to be controlled and "EF" indicating the completion of charging are displayed on the first display section.

Note that the shutter speed to be controlled is determined by the fractional display element 708.
, 7 segment display element 71o.

714 and a decimal point display element 712, and a decoder FtOM704 and a timing pulse T
BS and TB6 are involved, and the "EF" display indicating that charging is still completed is the 7-segment display elements 716 and 71.
8, and the decoder R, 0M706
and timing pulse TB3. TB4 is involved.

Now, when "1" as the EFDS signal is input to the A4 terminal of the decoder ROM 706 shown in FIG. 89', the timing pulse TB3. T.B.
The signal output during 4 is EF'' for the 7-segment display elements 716 and 718 of the first display section.

On the other hand, a shutter speed display signal is applied to the decoder R, 0M 704 from the shutter speed display register 650. Note that the shutter speed at this time is less than the strobe synchronization shutter speed (for example, 1/60th of a second).
7 segment display elements 710 and 714 of the first display section
It does not exceed the scope of the display.

In this state, the AND gate AND73 has EF.
The DS signal is input, but this AND gate AND7
3 is the timing pulse TB3.3 through the OR gate 0R44. Since TB4 (7) input is received, this AND73 is TB3. 1 at the timing of TB4
This 1 output is input to the NOR gate N0R4, and in order to make the output 0, the output of this NOR gate NOR,4 is input to the inverter INV32.
Or game) C through OR43
The decoder ROM704 input to the 8 terminal is TB3.
．． Blanking is applied only during the timing of TB4, and the output of the NOR gate N0R4 is connected to the OR gate 0R.
Decoder ROM input to C8 terminal through 41
706 is TB3. Timing other than TB4, i.e. TB
Blanking is applied between the timings of S and TB6.

Therefore, in the flash photography mode, the first display section 244 of the digital display 402 shows the shutter speed and E.
On the other hand, the aperture value data is output from the aperture value display register 648 on the second display section 250 of the digital display 402 unless the strobe is in the full emission mode. According to the data, a display aperture value signal is output from the decoder R,0M702, and the aperture value is displayed.In addition, the MDS
If the P signal is 01'ν, "M" is displayed.

If Pulp is still selected as the shutter speed,
As mentioned above, the "■" signal is output as the BDSP signal, but at this time, the first display section shows the "," buLb, as shown in Figure 1o (b). A display is made.When 1” is input as the BDS P signal,
1” signal is AND gate AND70%AND71
However, the above AND game) A'ND70 is E
The FD'S signal is input through the inverter INV30, and the EFDS signal is directly input to the AND gate AND71, so as long as the EFDS signal is 0'', the output of the AND gate AND70 is 11''. and is input to the A6 input terminal of the decoder ROM 706.

As a result, the decoder ROM 706 outputs a signal to cause the first display section 244 of the digital display 402 to display "buLb". In this state,
Since the BDSP signal is input to the NOR gate (NOR4), its output is set to 0''.
Invert the output of 0R4 through inverter INV32'
The decoder ROM 704, which is input to the C8 terminal through OR43, is blanked, and the output of the NOR gate N0R4 is ORGed)
The decoder ROM 706, which is input to the C8 terminal through OIt41, outputs a signal for displaying "buLb". Therefore, in the pulp photography mode, the first display section 244 of the digital display 402 displays "b".
uLb' will be displayed. On the other hand, the second display section 250 of the digital display 402 displays the MDsP
Unless the signal is "l", the open aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 in use is displayed according to the output signal from the aperture display register 648, and if the MDSP signal is "1",
The aperture value is not displayed, and "M" is displayed on the third display section 252.
A display is made. Note that this is as shown in FIG. 10(b).

Also, as mentioned before, when in strobe photography mode and when Pulp is selected as the shutter speed, the EFDS signal and BDSP signal are each output as a "1" signal. At this time, the first
The display section shows "b" as shown in Figure 1O (C) and (d).
EF” is displayed.EFDS signal and BDSP
When "l" is input as a signal, the output of the AND gate AND71 receiving both input becomes "1" and is input to the A5 terminal of the decoder ROM 706. As a result,
The decoder R, 0M 706 outputs a signal to display 'buLb' on the first display section 244 of the digital display 402. In this state, the BDS
Since the P signal is input to the NOR gate (NOR4), its output is set to '0'; therefore, this NOR gate N0R
After inverting the output of 4 through the inverter Nv32, the decoder R, 0M704, which is input to the C8 terminal through OR43, is blanked, and the output of NOR4 is input to the OR gate 0R.
Decoder ROM input to C8 terminal through 41
706 outputs a signal for displaying "bEF". Therefore, in the strobe photography mode and the pulp photography mode, "bEF" is displayed on the first display section 244 of the digital display 402. On the other hand, unless the strobe is in the full flash mode, the second display section 250 of the digital display 402 outputs aperture value data from the aperture value display register 648, and the display aperture data is output from the decoder ROM 702 according to the data. The value signal is output and the aperture value is displayed.
For, if the MDSP signal is “1”, “M
″Displayed.

Also, when a “1” signal is input as a BDSP signal,
The first and second display sections 24 of the digital display 402
4. A blinking display of 250K "EEEEEE" is performed.

In this way, when a 1" signal is input as an EDSP signal, the decoder ROM 702 outputs an ED signal to the input terminal 7 of the person in order to output a signal for displaying "EE".
In addition to inputting the SP signal, the EDSP signal is input to the input terminal of the person 7 in order to cause the decoder R, OM 706 to output a signal for displaying "EEEE".

On the other hand, this (7) EDSp signal is transmitted from the signal line [phase] on which the 2H2 on''-off signal is mounted to the inverter INV3.
2Hz on/off signal is given to NAND2 through NAND2.
A 2H2 on/off signal is output from the gate NAND2 and input to the NAND gate NAND4. on the other hand,
This Nando Goo) NAND4 is Nando Gate NAN
It receives the output of D3, but this NAND gate NAN
As long as the AVFL signal among its inputs is 0'', its output is 1'', so the NAND gate N
AND4 outputs a 2Hz on/off signal, and this signal is sent to decoder ROM7 through OR gate 6R4o.
02's C8 terminal is input, and the output of the ROM702 is 2.
Apply blanking at Hz. Therefore, this decoder R
, OM702 causes the "EE" display displayed on the second display section 250 of the digital display 402 to blink at 2H2. In addition, the NAND gate NA
The 2Hz on/off signal that is the output of ND2 is inverted through the inverter INV28, and the NAND gate N
After matching the phase with the on/off signal of 2H2 which is the output of AND4, it is decoded through OR41.
-ROM 706 (7) Input to C8 terminal, corresponding RO
Blanking is applied to the output of M706 at 2Hz. Therefore, the decoder ROM 706 causes the EEEE" displayed on the first display section 244 of the digital display 402 to be
The display will blink at 2Hz. On the other hand, the E
Since the DSP signal is input to NOR gate N0R4,
This NOR gate N0R4 is not supposed to output "O", and the 0" output of this NOR gate N0R4 is connected to the inverter I.
The decoder ROM70 is inverted through NV32 and input to the C8 terminal through OR gate 0R43.
4, its output will be completely regulated.

As mentioned above (when there is a “1” signal input as the EDSP signal, the digital display 402 displays “EEE”).
This means that a blinking display of "E EE" is performed at intervals of two.

Next, detailed description will be given of how control data is acquired from output bus line 374.

The control data carried on the output bus line 374 is data TV for controlling the shutter speed and data AVs for controlling the number of stops. As mentioned above, in the next 1 word time after the CALE signal is placed on the pass line 366, the 1/1 word synchronized with the timing pulse TBO-TB7.
Data with 8-stage precision is loaded onto the output bus line 374, and the narrowing-down stage number control data AVs is output from the 1st word of the 3rd word after the CALE signal is loaded onto the bus line 366, as described above. The data is sent to the output bus line 374 as 1/8 step precision data synchronized with the timing pulse TBO-TB7 at one time. That is, the shutter speed control data TV is synchronized with the output of the output signal line [phase] of the asynchronous circuit 660 in FIG. 82, and the shutter speed control data AVs is synchronized with the output of the signal line [phase]. are doing. That is, the shutter speed control data TV can be taken in from the output bus line 374 in synchronization with the signal line [phase] output, but this shutter speed control data TV is not the same as the apex value, that is, the actual Since it corresponds to a logarithmically compressed value of the reciprocal of shutter speed seconds, some calculation operation is required to obtain data corresponding to actual shutter speeds from shutter speed data TV equivalent to the apex value. That is, in order to make this shutter speed data TV a signal of a magnitude corresponding to the actual shutter speed, it is necessary to subtract the shutter speed control data TV from the apex value of the shutter speed that is the reference. The data obtained as a result of this subtraction corresponds to the number of stages equivalent to the apex in the control shutter speed, and by exponentially expanding the data obtained in this way based on the reference shutter speed, the real time It is possible to obtain. As mentioned above,
In order to obtain the actual time from the shutter speed equivalent to Apex, use the shutter speed data TV from the reference shutter speed.
It is necessary to subtract , and the subtraction circuit 612 is provided for this purpose.

The control shirt time data TVs obtained through the subtraction circuit 612 as described above is input to the shirt shirt time control registers 614 and 626, and each of the registers 614 and 626 receives the input data from the synchronous circuit 660. Based on a control signal specifying the time to take in the speed data, the speed control data TV is separated from the output bus line 374 and stored. Incidentally, the shutter speed control register 614 is the integer part of the shutter speed data TVs, and the shutter control register 626
is provided to store the decimal part of the shirt data TV.

On the other hand, the aperture stage number control data AVs can be input from the output bus line 374 in synchronization with the signal line output, and the aperture stage number control data AVs
s outputs the aperture cutting stage number control data AVs to the aperture cutting stage number control register 628 based on a control signal that specifies the acquisition time of the aperture cutting stage number control data AVs from the synchronization circuit 660. It is captured and stored separately from line 374.

Data for control as explained above, ie, the shutter speed control data ゛TV and the number of aperture control data A.
The detailed logic diagram of the configuration for inputting Vs is shown in FIG.

As is clear from FIG. 91, the shutter speed control registers 614 and 626 are integrated into an integrated circuit element CD4015 whose clock terminal C input is the signal line [phase] output shown in FIG. The stage number control register 628 is composed of an integrated circuit element CD4015 whose clock terminal C input is the signal line [phase] output shown in FIG.

The detailed logic diagram of the integrated circuit element CD4015 is shown in FIG. 62.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 91, an AND gate AND75,
AND76, AND77, AND78. Or goo) O
R45, 0R46, Exclusive Or Fist Gate KX
4. EX5. 'f 7 har 1;z INV35.
71J Tsubu-70 Tsubu F29. Noah Gate N0R5
It is a well-known subtraction circuit configuration, and is constructed by Noah
Gu) Timing pulse TBO~T for NOR5
The data input to the output bus line 374 in synchronization with the timing pulses TBO to TB7 is subtracted from the data input in synchronization with B7, and the result is sent from the exclusive-or gate Ex5 to the output bus line 374. Output in synchronization with timing pulses TBO-TB7. By the way, the ANDe gate AND is connected through the inverter INV35.
The purpose of inputting the timing pulse TB7 to 78 is to prevent the carry that occurs in the final stage of the operation and
- This is to prevent carry from being transferred to the operation in TB7.

Note that for the Noah gate N0R5, the equivalent value of the apex of the shutter speed, which is the reference for the shutter speed control, is input, but in this embodiment, the value equivalent to the apex of the shaft speed is 2000th of the maximum speed. 1 second is the standard shirt time,
Therefore, binary code data corresponding to the shutter time of 1/2000th of a second is input to the Noah gate N0R5. This data will be shown later, but
10101000'', and therefore, if this data is synchronized with the timing pulses TBO-TB7, a “1” input will be given to the NOR gate N0R5 at the timing pulses TB7.TB5.TB3°. In order to realize the configuration, in this embodiment, a timing pulse TB3.TB is applied to the tour gate N0R5.
5. The input for TB7 is entered in row 1.

The output data from EX5 of the subtraction circuit 612 having the above-described configuration is applied to the input terminal of the shutter time control register 614+626, but at this stage, it is difficult to confirm whether the data is actually It is unclear whether the control shirt corresponds to the second time TV or not.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the shirt timing control register 6
14+626 clock terminal C, output bus line 3
The signal output from the output signal line [phase] of the synchronizing circuit 660 is applied at the same word time as when the data TV related to the shutter speed is loaded on the synchronous circuit 74. As a result, the registers 614+626 separate the shirt time control data TV from the output of the subtraction circuit 612, and store the data. Through this operation, Nyatta seconds control data TV is output in parallel from the upper digits to the lower digits from the QO to Q7 terminals of the shutter seconds control registers 614 and 626, and the QO-Q4 output is The integer part, Q5 to Q7, respectively correspond to the decimal part.

On the other hand, the narrowing down stage number control register 628 controls the output bus
The clock terminal C of this register receives the output of the synchronizing circuit 660 at the same word time as the aperture stage number control data AVs is placed on the output bus line 374. Since the signal output from the signal line [phase] is input, the register 628
is for separating the narrowing down stage number control data AVs from the data on the output bus line 374 and storing the collected data. Through this operation, each of the output terminals QO to Q7 of the narrowing down stage number control register 628 outputs
The number of narrowing stages control data AVa is output in parallel from the upper digits to the lower digits.

As described above, the shutter speed control register 614
The exposure control operation in the mechanical part 358 of this camera system is performed based on the shutter speed control data TV stored in +626 and the aperture stop number control data AVs stored in the aperture step number control register 628. However, this camera mechanism portion 358 and its operation sequence will now be explained.

This camera system is provided with a shutter release means 396 in the mechanical part 358. Aperture control means 398. As mentioned earlier, the operation of the shutter speed control means 400 is controlled through the three electromagnetic mechanical conversion means, and now the operation of each of the control means will be explained.

Most of the mechanical mechanisms of this camera system are no different from traditional camera mechanisms.

The shutter release means 396 is an electromagnetic solenoid that is interlocked with a trigger mechanism that runs a mechanical sequence of the camera mechanism by being energized for a certain period of time, and
The AE lever 94 is used to preset the aperture value from the body 4 side by energizing the electromagnetic lens in a pulsed manner.
A mechanical sequence mechanism is operated, such as starting the movement of -, driving the aperture of the lens device 2, flipping up the mirror, and starting the movement of the front curtain of the focal plane shutter.

The aperture control means 398 is an electro-magnetic solenoid that urges the clamping mechanism of the AE lever 94 toward the clamp release side when energized. 94 is capable of traveling in the unclamped state, and is clamped when the power supply is stopped. In such a configuration, before the mechanical sequence of the camera mechanism starts running, the aperture control means 398
The clamping mechanism of the AE lever 94 is held in the clamp release side by energizing, and the AE lever 94 is ready to move when the mechanical sequence of the camera mechanism starts moving. Keep it. Next, when the AE lever 94 starts traveling according to a mechanical sequence, the amount of travel is detected, and when the amount of travel reaches a predetermined value, the power supply to the throttle control means 398 is stopped. , the clamping mechanism of the AE lever 94 is returned to the clamping position to clamp the AE lever 94. As described above, it is possible to preset the aperture value of the lens device 20, and this is as described above.

Further, the shutter speed control means 400 is an electromagnetic solenoid that controls the rear curtain of the focal plane shutter to start running when energized. The trailing curtain is in a running restricted state, and the running restriction of the shutter trailing curtain is canceled due to the energization being stopped, and the shutter trailing curtain starts running. In such a configuration, at the same time as the mechanical sequence of the camera mechanism starts running.

The speed control means 400 is energized to regulate the movement of the rear shutter curtain, and after the front shutter curtain runs, it starts measuring time, and when the measured time reaches a predetermined value, the speed control means 400 controls the speed of the shutter. By stopping the power supply to the means 400 1c, the travel restriction of the shutter rear curtain is released, and the exposure time can be controlled by starting the travel of the shutter rear curtain.

Note that, when the shutter rear curtain finishes running, the mechanical sequence mechanism performs a return operation of the mirror, the aperture drive lever 98, and the like.

Note that the shutter release means 396. Aperture control means 398. It is necessary for the shutter speed control means 400 to accurately control its operation timing and operation time, and for this purpose, signals for an accurate sequence mechanism obtained according to various conditions are required. A control signal generation circuit 646 is provided in the output control section 364.
0 from this control signal generating circuit 646, the shutter release means 396. Aperture control means 398. A drive control signal is applied to the shutter speed control means 400 for an appropriate time at a timing such that an appropriate exposure control operation is performed, but these control timings or times are determined by the operating time of the self-timer, The number of refinement stages accumulated in the refinement stage number control register 628 is set to AE.
At the timing when the lever 94 runs, after the shutter front curtain starts running, the shutter second control registers 614, 62
It is created based on the timing at which the real time corresponding to the shutter time data stored in 6 is elapsed, the time to compensate for the mechanical delay of the mechanical sequence mechanism, etc.

The output data of the shutter speed control register 626 and the output data of the narrowing stage number control register 628 are as follows.
One signal is input to the data selector 632 and selectively applied to the down counter 642 based on commands from the control signal generation circuit 646.

On the other hand, the output data of the Nyatsuta second control register 614 is sent to the select gate along with the output data of a constant generation circuit 616 provided to generate constant data corresponding to time for various temporal control and control. 618,
] is selectively given to the frequency dividing circuit 620 based on a command from the self-control signal generating circuit 646.

Note that the down counter 642 has its clock terminal connected to the AE lever 940 via the select gate 640.
It receives the pulse signal FPC that is input during running and the output pulse signal of the frequency dividing circuit 620, and converts the data input from the data selector 632 into the pulse input through the select gate 640. The configuration is such that a subtraction count is performed based on the subtraction count, and a carry generated as a result of the subtraction count is given to the control signal generation circuit 646.

In this configuration, when controlling the number of narrowing stages, the narrowing stage number control data AVs is applied from the narrowing stage number control register 628 to the down counter 642 through the data selector 632.

On the other hand, a pulse signal FPC is input to the clock terminal of the down counter 642 via the select gate 640 in accordance with the amount of travel of the AE lever 94. At this time, when the AE lever 94 moves, the down counter 642 subtracts the aperture stage number control data AVs in response to the pulse signal FPC. When a carry is output, this carry means that the number of input pulses of the pulse signal FPCO is equal to the narrowing stage number control data A.
This indicates that the AE lever 94 matches Vs.
This indicates that the traveling position at that time has reached the preset position corresponding to the number of aperture-shrinking stages of the lens device 2. , Therefore, the control signal generating means 64 to which the carry is inputted
Reference numeral 6 indicates that by clamping the AE lever 94 through the aperture control means 398, the number of aperture stages of the lens device 2 can be preset to the same value as the aperture stage number control data AVs.

In addition, when performing shirt time control now, the data
Through the selector, the Nyatsuta second control register 62
6, the down counter 642 receives decimal fractional data of the shutter speed control data TV. Note that this down counter 642 adds "1" to the decimal data and then takes in this data as data multiplied by eight. On the other hand, the clock terminal of the down counter 642 is connected to the select gate 640.
The output pulse of the frequency dividing circuit 620 is inputted through the frequency dividing circuit 620. At this time, the frequency dividing circuit 627 takes in the integer part of the shirt timing control data TV from the shirt timing control register 614 through the selector 618, and then divides it into 1/8 of the reference time. The down counter 64 divides the frequency of the pulse signal and outputs it as a pulse.
2 is subtracted based on the output pulse of the frequency dividing circuit 620. Through this operation, when a carry is output from the down/carontalo 42, this carries indicates that the output pulse number of the frequency dividing circuit 620 matches the data regarding the shutter speed control data which is less than a decimal number. This indicates that the real time corresponding to the shutter time control data has elapsed. Therefore, the control signal generating means 646 to which the carry is inputted, through the shutter speed controlling means 400,
By starting the shutter trailing curtain, the shutter speed can be controlled to the real time corresponding to the shutter speed control data TVs.

In addition, to explain the shutter speed control in more detail, the shirt speed control data TVs is 1/8
It is given as data with step precision, and this data is now expressed as TVs = P + s (18
)far. However, P and α are integer values. This data corresponds to the actual exposure time with respect to the reference time Y as follows: TR=YX2(P+100)(19). However, Digi 27. In order to calculate the circuit A2(P+M), it becomes an extremely complicated circuit, so in this example, 2P+s+2P(1+'!)
(20) is coming soon. Therefore, the actual exposure time TR is expressed as TR=Yx2Px(1+) (21). Note that this formula is TR=-×2P×
Since it can be replaced with (8+α) (22), the -frequency divider circuit 620 uses a frequency pulse to
By subtracting and counting the data 8+α taken into the counter 642, the real time TR of 7 seconds can be obtained.

The constant generating circuit 616 outputs data for specifying the self-second time, data for compensating for mechanical sequence operation delays, data for determining the operation time of the shutter release means 396, and data for determining the operation time of the shutter release means 396. Data for generating the 2 Hz on/off signal described above is output, and both are frequency-divided by the frequency divider circuit 620 and converted into real time, and then given to the control signal generation circuit 646. Said shutter release means 396. Throttle control means 398. This is the basis of the output control signal for the shutter speed control means 400.

Next, the detailed operation of the output control section 364 and the detailed circuit and configuration for realizing it will be explained.The control states of the device are divided into eight states.

This is because the operation of the camera device is established through various sequences, and the operation of the electrical control circuit also needs to correspond to such sequence (7+).

In this camera system, the eight '1fflJ'
141 In order to specify the prone state, signals CCO to CC7 are generated.The operation of the camera device corresponding to each signal of CCO to CC7 will be explained with reference to FIG.

? The state of the CCO signal is a cycle in which the input control sieve section 360 takes in photometric or analog data and performs A-D conversion, the central XI section 362 performs calculations, and the output control section 364 displays various data. (III) until the shutter release button 18 is pressed.
) the CCO signal is held in the loop. In this state, the photographer uses the digital display 40 in the viewfinder 3.
2, you can check the display of various data and change the setting data. Note that the state of the CCO signal is maintained as long as the EDSP signal is "1" or the first CALE signal is not output after the power is turned on.

The state of the CC2 signal is a cycle corresponding to the operation of the self-timer, and during this period, the digital display 402 stops displaying various data, but the input control unit 360
Photometric or analog data capture and A
-D conversion and calculation by the central control unit 362 are repeatedly performed, and during this time, an LED lamp 32, which will be described later, blinks to inform the photographer that the self-timer is in operation. Furthermore, from the state of this CCO signal, CC2
The transition to the signal state is when the 5ELF signal is "1", the shutter release button 18 is pressed, and the SR multiplied signal 1
’ (1). Note that when the 5ELF signal becomes "0" or the EDSP signal becomes "1" while in the CC2 signal state, the camera device returns from the CC2 signal state to the CCO signal state (II).

It transitions in parallel with the transition of the mechanical sequence of the structural part 358, and when it transitions to the state of the CC3 signal,
The energization to the throttle control means 398 is started, and the AE lever 9
The clamp mechanism No. 4 is urged toward the clamp release side, and the AE lever 94 becomes movable.

By the way, the state of this CC3 signal changes from the state of CC2K when the state of the CC2 signal in which the self-timer is operating is about to end (■), or when the shutter release button 18 is pressed, the state of the 5ELF signal changes. If is “0”, transition directly from the state of the CCO signal (1)
Obtained depending on the situation.

Note that the state of the cc3r= signal is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and then shifts to the state of the CCI signal (Vl). - In the state of this CCI signal, the shutter release means 396 of the camera device W mechanism section 358 is energized;
Operate the trigger mechanism to start running the mechanical sequence. The camera is shifted to the state of the CC1-order CC5 signal (■), and the mechanical sequence of the camera device starts running depending on the operation of the trigger mechanism.

The state of the CC5 signal is an aperture control cycle,
According to the mechanical sequence, mirror up, A
Operations such as moving the E lever 94 are performed. This CC5
In the state of the signal, subtraction counting of the aperture stage number control data AVs is performed based on the pulse signal FP output in accordance with the traveling distance of the AE lever 94, and the number of pulses of the pulse signal FPC is equal to the data AVs. If they match, or if not, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the state of the CC5 signal changes to the state of the CC4 signal. The power supply to the means 398 is stopped and the AE lever 94 is turned off.
is clamped and its movement is restricted. That is, CC with
While in the state of the 5 signal ψ, the aperture preset is performed from the body 4 side of the lens device 2.

Note that the CC5 signal state ends and changes to the CC4 signal state after a predetermined period of time has elapsed when the pass/L/99 of the pulse signal FPc matches the data AVs. In this case, the aperture preset is manually set on the lens device 2 side, or
This is applied when the aperture value AMAX of the minimum aperture is automatically selected.

Note that when the state of the CC5 signal is entered, energization of the speed control means 400 is started in order to restrict the movement of the shutter trailing curtain.

Note that in the state of this CC5 signal, the presetting of the aperture and the narrowing down operation of the lens device 2 by the aperture drive lever 98 are performed in parallel.

Next, when the state changes from the CC5 signal to the CC4 signal state, the front shutter curtain starts running as a mechanical sequence progresses. With the start of this Nyanota first curtain,
Since the exposure of the film surface does not start immediately, and there is a mechanical delay time, the state of the CC4 signal is set to compensate for this time.

Next, when exposure is started by the start of the shutter front curtain, a CTST signal is input.
Depending on the T signal, the state of the CC4 signal shifts to the state of the CC6 signal (DO8 The state of the CC6 signal is the shutter speed control cycle, and after entering the state of the CC6 signal, the state of the shutter speed control data The CC7 signal changes from the CC6 signal state to the CC7 signal state (X) after the real time is measured based on the TVs and the reference time Y, and the time corresponding to the shutter time control data has elapsed. In this state, the shutter speed control means 400, which was previously energized, is de-energized, the shutter rear curtain starts, and the exposure to the film surface is stopped. Afterwards, the mechanical sequence performs the quick return of the mirror and aperture drive levers.

By the way, when the BDSP signal is 1", the switch SW2 that is linked to the shutter release button 18
As long as the spider signal SR is "1", the state of the CC6 signal is maintained, and when the SR signal becomes "0",
The state of the CC6 signal returns to the state of the CCO signal (■). This function is designed in consideration of the fact that the release button 18 is used to directly manually control the shutter speed in the bulb photography mode.

In addition, the state of the CC7 signal is already
Viewfinder 1 displays the data that forms the basis of the exposure control performed.
3, the so-called post display is in progress. When the state of the CC7 signal is entered, the operation restriction of the digital display 402 is released and various photographic information is displayed, but this photographic information relates to the exposure control that has already been performed. In addition, this CC7
The state of the signal changes from the state of the CC6 signal to the state of the CC7 signal, and if the signal SR is "1", that is, if the shutter release button 18 continues to be pressed, an intervention occurs. When the signal SR becomes 0'', the state of the CCO signal immediately returns to ζ (
XI).

Furthermore, if the signal SR has already become "0" at the time of transition from the state of the CC6 signal to the state of the CC7 signal, that is, if the shutter release button 18 has already been released, the system will release the CC7 signal. After transitioning to the signal state, it immediately returns to the CCO state.

Furthermore, even if the shutter release button 18 is held down in the CC7 signal state, if the film is wound manually or by the motor drive device described above, the system will not work. The state of the CC7 signal returns to the state of the CCO signal. This is an important function when continuous photographing is performed using a motor drive device by holding the shutter release button 18 in a depressed state.

As described above, in the camera system of this embodiment, the output control section 364 is placed in eight control states of the CC0t to CC7 signals.

The 7-en of each signal CCO to CC7 explained above,
shutter release means 3 in the states of each of the signals;
96. The state of the energization signal to the electromagnetic solenoid of the aperture control means 398° shutter control means 400 is shown in the sequence diagram of FIG.

In addition, in FIG. 93, FCI, Fe2. Fe2 is the CC
This is the basic signal for obtaining the O to CC7 signals.

Now, before explaining the control signal generation circuit 646 and the CCO to CC7 signals, the narrowing down control stage number data AV
The basic configuration operations for control based on S and shutter time control data TV and the configuration operations for obtaining other temporal control signals will be explained.

FIG. 94 shows the shutter speed control register 6 shown in FIG. 30.
14. Constant generation circuit 616. Select Goo) 618.
The detailed configuration of the frequency divider circuit 620 is shown, and in the figure, 618A to 618D indicate the select gates 66, which are composed of an integrated circuit element CD4019 whose detailed logic diagram is shown in the figure. The four gates constitute the select gate 618 shown in FIG.

The frequency dividing circuit 620 also includes an integrated circuit element MC14536 (
This integrated circuit element MC14536 is a programmer pull timer whose block diagram is shown in FIG. 95.

This programmer pull timer is capable of frequency division up to 24 steps in total, and is based on the 4-pit data input from each terminal A, B, C, and D and the signal input from the 8b terminal. , the frequency of the pulse signal inputted from the In terminal is divided and outputted from the Do terminal. In addition, the above A.

The input data from the B, C, and D terminals are used to perform up to 16 stages of frequency division, and the 8b terminal input is used to further perform 8 stages of frequency division when it is "0".

In FIG. 94, flip-flop F39 divides the clock pulse and provides its Q output as described above. In this example system, there are 64 clock pulses.
Although a KHz Norms signal is used, through this configuration, the In terminal of the frequency dividing circuit 620 has a 32 KHz signal.
An on/off pulse of z will be applied.

This 32 KHz pulse corresponds to the reference time Y described earlier.
It is the basis for making 1/8 of the time of
This frequency dividing circuit 620 operates when its input terminals A, B, C, and D inputs are all "0" and the 8b terminal input is "1".
It is configured to transmit 16 kHz from the O terminal. That is, this frequency divider circuit 620 divides the frequency of a 16 KHz pulse signal based on the input data from input terminals A, B, C, and D and the input signal from terminal 8b, and outputs the frequency from the O terminal to the signal line O. This is what is output. Note that this frequency dividing circuit 620 includes a reset terminal R, and the select gate 618A operates according to an input signal from a signal line O, which will be described later.
Q1 of the shutter speed control register 614 is connected to terminals 1 to A4.
The lower 4 pits of the integer part of the shutter speed control data TV are input from ~Q4, and the data for obtaining the self time of 8 seconds, that is, "101", is input to the B1 to B4 terminals.
0'' data is input, and a CC6 signal, which will be described later, is input to the Ka terminal, and a CC2 signal, which will be described later, is input to the Kb terminal.

That is, this select goo) 618A outputs data related to the self-second time from its D1 to D4 terminals at the time of the CC2 signal, and outputs the integer part of the shutter time control data TV at the time of the CC6 signal. The lower 4 bits are D1~
Output from D4 terminal.

In addition, in the select gate 618B, fixed data for specifying the time of the CC3 and CC4 signals, which will be described later, is input to the person's 1 to A4 terminals, and fixed data for specifying the time of the CC5 signal, which will be described later, is input to the B1 to B4 terminals. , fixed data is input to specify a certain time. In addition, this CC3
゜A time of 2 msec is used as the time of the CC4 signal, so the A1 to A4 terminals have “0”.
110” data has been input.

Further, as the time of the CC5 signal, the AE lever 94
A time of 30m5ec is used in consideration of the travel time of
1O'' data is input.

Note that this select gate 618B connects CCI to the Ka terminal via an OR gate 0R57.

It receives the CC3 signal input, and the Kb terminal receives the CC5 signal input. That is, this select gate 6
18B is 2 m at the time of cci and CC3 signals.
Data regarding the time of sec is output from the D1 to D4 terminals, and data regarding the time of 30 m5 ec is output from the D1 to D4 terminals at the time of the CC5 signal.

In addition, the select gate 618C connects the D1 to D4 outputs of the select gate 618A to its terminals 1 to A4, and the select gate 618C to its B1 to B4 terminals.
The 18B DI-D4 output is input, and the Ka terminal receives the CC2 signal and CC2 signal through the OR gate 0R55.
6 signals are input, and the CCI signal and CC3 signal are input to the Kb terminal through OR gates OR56 and 0R57.
signal, CC5 signal is input.

That is, this select goo) 618C is CC2°C
At the time of the C6 signal, the D1 to D4 terminal outputs of the select gate 618A are output from the D1 to D4 terminals, and at the time of the CCI, CC3, and CC5 signals, the D1 to D4 of the select gate 618H are output. Connect the terminal output to its D1
- It is output from the D4 terminal.

In addition, the select gate 618D inputs the DI-D4 output of the select gate 618C to its A1 to A4 terminals, and data for creating a 2Hz signal, which is transmitted to its Bl-B4 terminals. That is, 1, "1101° data is input.

In addition, an OR gate 0R54°0R is connected to the Ka terminal.
cci through 55, 0R56, 0R57.

CC2, CC3, CC5, and CC6 signals are input to the Kb terminal through the inverter INV47.
An inverted signal of the a terminal input is input.

That is, this select group) 618DU, CCI.

At the time of each signal CC2, CC3, CC5, CC6,
The D1 to D4 terminal outputs of the Select Goo 618C are output from the D1 to D4 terminals, and at times other than the above, that is, at the times of the CCO, CC4° and CC7 signals,
Data regarding the 2 Hz signal is output from its D1 to D4 terminals.

Outputs D1 to D4 of the select gate 618D are input to terminals A to D of the frequency divider circuit 620, respectively.

On the other hand, the output from the QO terminal of the shirtter time control register 614, that is, the most significant bit of the shirtter time control data TV, is connected to the NAND gate N receiving the input of the CC6 signal.
The signal is input from AND29 to the D terminal of the frequency dividing circuit 620 through the inverter NV45 and the OR gate 0R53.

Further, the output of the NAND29 is connected to the frequency dividing circuit 6 through the AND91 which inputs the CC2 signal through the inverter NV46.
It is input to the 8b terminal of 20.

In the configuration as described above, the states of the A-D input of the frequency dividing circuit 620 and the 8b terminal input will be explained for each state of the signals CC0-CC7.

During the time of the CCO, CC4, and CC7 signals, the Kb terminal input of the select gate 618D becomes 1", and the 8b terminal input of the frequency divider circuit 620 becomes "1", so the A of the frequency divider circuit 620 , B, C, D and the 8b terminal are "1", "O", "l", "l", respectively.
”.

It becomes "1", and therefore this frequency divider circuit 620 glue.

From the 0 terminal, a pulse of 16 kHz is divided by 1101 steps, that is, a 2 Hz pulse is output.

At the time of the CC2 signal, select gate) 618
B1 to B4 terminal input of A is select gate 61sc
, 618D to the A, B, C, and D terminals of the frequency dividing circuit 620, and since the 8b terminal input is "0", the input terminals A, B, C, and D of the frequency dividing circuit 620 and the 8b Each input of the terminal is "0", "1", and "0" respectively.

“1”, 0”, therefore, D of this frequency dividing circuit 620
From the o terminal to the signal line 0, the pulse output is a 16KHz pulse divided by "1010" steps plus 8 steps, that is, 1
A pulse output with a period of 6 seconds will be made.

Note that this 16-second period pulse is used as the end of the self-timer time at the time when this pulse first rises from "0" to "1", that is, when 8 seconds have passed after the start of frequency division. ing.

Next, during the time of the CC3 and CCI signals, the A1 to A4 terminal inputs of the select gate 618H are input to the A, B, C, and D terminals of the frequency divider circuit 620 through the select gates 618C and 618D. Also, since the 8b terminal input of the frequency dividing circuit 620 becomes "1", the A of the frequency dividing circuit 620,
B.C.

Each input terminal of D and each input of terminal 8b are “0”.
, "1", "1", "0", "1". Therefore, from the DO terminal of this frequency dividing circuit 620 to the signal line 0, 1
A pulse output is obtained by dividing a 6 KHz pulse by 0110'' steps, that is, a pulse output with a period of 4 m5 ec. Note that this pulse with a period of 4 m5 ec is caused by the pulse first changing from “0” to “1”. The time when the signal rises, that is, the time when 2 m has passed after the start of frequency division, is used as the end time of the CC3 or CCI signal.

At the time of the CC5 signal, the select gate 618
B's Bl-B4 terminal input is select goo) 618C
, 618D to the A, B, C, and D terminals of the frequency dividing circuit 620, and the 8b terminal input of the frequency dividing circuit 620 is
1", the input terminals A, B, C, D and the 8b terminal of the frequency dividing circuit 620 are respectively "O".

"1", '0", "1", "1". Therefore, from the DO terminal of this frequency dividing circuit 620 to the signal line ■, 1
A pulse output is obtained by frequency-dividing a 6 KHz pulse by "1010" steps, that is, a pulse output with a period of 64 m5 ec. It should be noted that this pulse with a period of 64 m5 ec is used as the end point of the CC5 signal when the pulse first rises from "0" to "1", that is, when 32 m5 ec has elapsed after the start of division.

At the time of the CC6 signal, the select gate 618
The A1 to A4 terminal inputs of A, that is, the lower 4 bits of the integer part of the second time control data TV, are input to the select gate 61.
A, B, and C of the frequency divider circuit 620 through 8C and 618D.
, D terminal, and when the most significant bit of the integer part of the shirtter seconds control data TV is "0", the input to the 8b terminal of the frequency divider circuit 620 becomes "1", and the shirtter seconds The most significant bit of the integer part of the control data TV is “1”
”, the D terminal input of the frequency dividing circuit 620 becomes “1” and the 8b terminal input becomes “0”.

Therefore, from the Do terminal of the frequency dividing circuit 620, 1 is connected to the signal line ■.
Y×2 of the above-mentioned formula obtained by frequency-dividing a 6 KHz pulse signal based on the above-mentioned shutter time control data TV.
A pulse signal corresponding to p will be output.

Note that this pulse signal is later converted into 8+ of the equation (22) above.
It is used to count down the data corresponding to α, and it is used to detect that the actual time in shutter seconds has passed since the shutter front curtain started running at the end of this down count. .

FIG. 96 shows the shutter speed control register 6 shown in FIG. 30.
26. Narrowing down stage number control register 628° data selector 632. This figure shows the detailed configuration of the down counter 642° select gate 640, in which the data selector 632 uses two integrated circuit elements CD4019 in parallel, the detailed logic diagram of which is shown in FIG. It consists of a select gate, and the QO to Q7 terminal outputs of the narrowing down control register 628 are input to its B7 to BO terminals.
Q5 to Q7 terminal output, that is, the second time control data T
The three bits below the decimal point of Vs are input to the A2 to AO terminals. Also, this data selector 632 has a 1" signal input to its A3 terminal, and A4 to A7
The terminal is grounded. That is, this data selector 6
32 receives input of 8+α data shown in the above equation j22) at terminals AO to A3, and also receives input from BO to A3.
This means that the narrowing down stage number control data AVs is input to the B7 terminal. Well, this data selector 632 has the CC4 signal input to its Ka terminal and the CC3 signal inputted to its Kb terminal.Therefore, at the time of CC3, this data selector 632 receives the narrowing stage number control data from its Do-D7 terminal. AVs, and at CC4 time, this data selector 632 outputs the data from its DO to D7 terminals.
The 8+α data of the formula will be output.

The Do to D7 outputs of the data selector 6'32 are input to JO to J7 of the down counter 642, and the P
When the CC3 signal or CC4 signal is input to the RE terminal via the OR59, the down signal is input to the RE terminal.
The counter 642 is the DO~ of the data selector 632.
Capture and store the output data of the D7 terminal.

Incidentally, this down counter 642 is a down counter constructed using two integrated circuit elements CD4029 whose detailed logic diagram is shown in FIG. 34, and is based on the clock terminal CLK input. Then, the data input and stored from the JO-J7 terminal is subtracted and counted, and as a result, a carry (borrow)
If this occurs, a signal indicating this will be output from the CO2 terminal. This CO terminal output signal is normally "1" and becomes "0" when a carry occurs.
This signal is a flip signal synchronized with clock pulse CP.
It is input to the D terminal of the clock F40, and therefore, when the subtraction count by this down counter 642 is completed, the clock is synchronized with the pulse CP to indicate this from the B terminal of this flip-70 tube F40. The signal is output to the signal line [phase].

On the other hand, this down counter 642 has a NAND gate NAND31 connected to its clock terminal CLK.

At the time of CC5 signal through NAND29, FP double signal input is received, and NAND 1-NAND3
1. The DO terminal output of the frequency dividing circuit 620, that is, the signal input of the signal line 0 is received through the NAND 30 at the time of CC6. Therefore, the operation of this down counter 642 will be explained based on the sequence shown in FIG. 93.

This da-run counter 642 is set at the time of the CC3 signal.
The output data of the narrowing down stage number control register 628 is taken in from the JO to J7 terminals through the data selector 632 and stored. Moving to the time of the next VC1CC5 signal, 77 gates NAND30. The FPC signal is input through the NAND 31, and the narrowing stage number control data AVs stored at the time of the CC3 signal is counted down according to the FPC signal. As a result, when the subtraction count is completed, the CO2 terminal output signal changes from 1" to 0. At this point, the AE lever 94 has moved to a position where the aperture amount corresponding to the aperture step number control data AVs is preset.Of course, the amount of movement at this time is It goes without saying that the amount of compensation should be added as appropriate in consideration of the mechanical delay time until the control means 398 clamps the AE lever 94.At this time, the CO2 terminal output signal becomes 0''. This is detected by the flip-70 knob F40, and from its Q output terminal to the signal line [phase], it is detected that the AE lever 94 has traveled to the position corresponding to the aperture stage number control data AVs.
As shown, a signal is output in synchronization with the clock pulse CP.

In addition, this down counter 642 outputs the Q5 to Q7 terminal output data of the shirt shutter time control register 626, that is, the data below the decimal point of the shirt shirt time control data TVs, as well as the least significant bit of the integer part at the time of the CC4 signal. The data with "1" set in the corresponding bit is effectively converted into integer data, that is, multiplied by 8 to become 8+α data.
The data is taken in from the JO to J3 terminals through the selector 632 and stored. Next, when moving to the time of the CC5 signal, the NAND gate NAND30. The DO terminal output of the frequency divider circuit 620 will be input to the clock terminal CLK from the signal line 0 through the NAND 31, but this signal line @
At the time of CC6, as explained previously, the pulse period Y is obtained by dividing the time obtained by multiplying the reference time Y, that is, the 16 KHz pulse signal, based on the /yasota second control data TVs.
×2p pulse output is performed, therefore, CC
8+α stored at the time of the 4 signal is counted down according to the pulse signal with the cycle of Y×2p, and as a result, when the subtraction count is completed, the CO2 terminal output signal shifts from “1” to “0”. . At this point, the time Y×2p×(8+α) has passed since the start of CC6 time, and the shutter speed control data T Vs (
This means that an approximate real time corresponding to P + s is obtained. At this time, the fact that the CO2 terminal output signal has become "0" is detected by the flip-flop F-40, and the output signal from the Q output terminal to the signal line 0 is sent to the signal line 0 after entering the state of the CC6 signal. Clock pulse CP to indicate that the real time corresponding to the time control data TVs has elapsed.
A signal is output in synchronization with the

FIG. 97 shows a detailed circuit diagram of the control signal generation circuit 646, which constitutes a logic circuit for obtaining the control signals CCO to CC7 described above.

In addition, what is marked at 990 in the figure is an integrated circuit element CD40 whose detailed logic diagram is shown in FIG.
A decoder consisting of flip-flops F32. F33°F34 (8.BFC for each D Q output
It decodes I, FC2, and FC3 and outputs them as signals of CC0 to CC7. In addition, the above FC1, F
C2.

Each signal of FC3 is in a state as shown in FIG. 93, and each signal of each flip-flop F32. F33. These flip-frogs F32 output from the Q output terminal of F34.
．． F33. All F34 are synchronized with clock pulse CP.

Now, the setting conditions for Flip 70 Tsubu F32 are 5FC
I, 'set the reset conditions to RFe5. flip flop F
Set condition of 33 to 5FC2° Reset condition to RFe5
．． Set conditions for 7rig F34 are 5FC3,
Set the reset condition to RFe5. Let FDR be the direct reset condition for all seven lip-flops F32°F1a and F34.

The fact that the above FDH condition holds means that flip 7
0 Tsubu F32. F1a and F34 are clock pulses CP
Therefore, the decoder 990 outputs "1" as the ucco signal. That is, the system will be placed or returned to the CCO signal state.

The conditions for this FDH are the power up clear signal PU
C is input, the state of the CC2 signal, that is, the EDSP signal becomes "1" while the self-timer is operating, or the winding of the film is not completed and the WNUP signal is "0", and When the CC7 signal is not in the state, CC
This is established when the winding is completed in the state of the 7 signal, the WNUP signal is "1", and the time corresponding to 2 Hz has elapsed.

By the way, the CC7 signal is "1" and the WNUP signal is °1"
, FDR is established when the 2Hz signal is 1'', while the shutter release button 18 continues to be pressed.
This is to enter the next control state after the film winding is completed and the next calculation result is loaded into the display register, and in particular, by using a motor drive device. Shutter release button 18
This is an important condition for continuous shooting while holding down the button.

Note that the AND gate AND85. is involved in satisfying the above FDH condition. AND86゜AND87, OR gate 0R47, 0R48゜0R49, Iabar I
It is INV42.

The fact that the condition of the CC2 signal is satisfied means that the flip-flop F33 is placed in the set state, and the flip-flop F32. This means that F34 is placed in the reset state, and for that purpose, the condition 5FC2 needs to be satisfied.

That is, in order to create the CC2 signal state, the EDSP signal must be 0" in the CCO signal state, the FDH condition is not satisfied, and the signal from the signal line @ must be 1°, that is,
When the calculation in the central control unit 362 has been completed and the signal from the signal line ■ is “1”, that is, when data is not being transferred from the central control unit 362 to the output control unit 364. It is necessary that the condition 5FC2 is satisfied by being satisfied when the shutter release button 18 is pressed and the SR signal becomes "1".

Note that if the 5ELF signal is "0" at this time, the 5FCI condition also holds true, so the system
The state of the CO signal shifts to the state of the CO2 signal without passing through the state of the CC2 signal.

In addition, when in the state of the CC2 signal, if the 5ECF signal becomes "0" and the SR signal becomes "0",
Assuming that self-timer photography has been canceled, the RFC2 condition is satisfied, and the system returns to the CCO state.

On the other hand, when the CC2 signal is in the state, the signal on the signal line [phase] becomes "1", that is, the DO terminal of the frequency dividing circuit 620 outputs "1", and the signal on the signal line O becomes "1". Occasionally, the 5FCI condition is met and the signal shifts to the system acc3CC3 signal.

The transition from the CO2 signal state to the CCI signal state occurs when the signal on the signal line [phase] reaches °1'', that is, 2
This is when the RFC2 condition is satisfied when m5ec has elapsed.

The state of the CCI signal shifts to the state of the CC5 signal when the signal on the signal line [phase] becomes "1", that is, at 2.
This is when the condition of SFC3 is satisfied when m5ec has elapsed.

The transition from the CC5 signal state to the CC4 signal state occurs when the MDSP signal is "0" and the signal on the signal line [phase] is "1".
``Natsu-h'', that is, when the AE lever 94 has traveled by an amount corresponding to the aperture step number control data AVs, or when the signal on the signal line [phase] becomes 1'', that is, 30m5e.
When c has elapsed, the RPCI condition is satisfied.

The transition from the CC4 signal state to the CC6 signal state occurs when the front shutter curtain starts running and the CTST signal is "1°".
This is when the condition of 5FC2 is satisfied.

The state of the CC6 signal shifts to the state of the CC7 signal when the BDSP signal is 0'' and the output of the signal line [phase] is 1'', that is, when the real time corresponding to the shutter time control data TVs is When the timing ends, this will result in 5FCI
This is when the conditions are satisfied.

Note that when the CC6 signal is in the state, the BDSP signal is “1”.
° and the SR signal becomes "0", the conditions of RFC2 and RFC4 are satisfied and the system returns to the state of the CCO signal.

Further, when the SR signal becomes "0" in the state of the CC7 signal, the conditions of RFCl, RFC2, and RFC4 are satisfied, and the system returns to the state of the CCO signal.

Furthermore, those involved in 5FCI are &G.
G AND79. AND80. AND87゜NAND gate NAND5. NAND6. NAND7,
NAND16. NAND23. Inverter INV36,
INV37. , INV38. This is a logical configuration based on INV39 and flip-flop F35.

Also, those involved in RFCl are and1・
Gate AND81. AND90. Nando Gate NA
ND8. NAND9. NANDlo, NAND
ll, NAND19, inverter INV44.7 lip-flop F31, OR gate 0R50°0R51,
This is a logical configuration based on 0R52.

Also involved in 5FC2 is Nando Goo.
NAND 1 7, NAND 1 8.
NAND24, flip-flop F30. F31.
This is a logical configuration based on the inverter INV48.

Nando Gou is also involved in RFC2.
G NAND 1 2. NAND 1 4.
NAND20, NAND8. NAND9, flip
Flop F36, AND gate AND81. AND8
8, OR gate OR50, inverter INV37゜I
NV38. This is a logical configuration based on INV44.

Also, NAND Gate NA is involved in 5FC3.
ND13. AND GO 1-AND89° OR gate 0R51, inverter INV43° flip-flop F37.

Also involved in RFC3 is Nando Gou.
NAND 9, NAND 1 4
, NAND21.

This is a logic circuit based on an inverter INV37.

Note that the control signal generation circuit 646 provides a direct reset signal to the direct reset terminal R of the frequency dividing circuit 620 through the signal line (2).

The condition for outputting "1" to this signal line O is that when the CC7 signal is in the state and the SR signal becomes "0", the 5FC
IO condition, 5FC2(7) condition.

The contents of the frequency divider circuit 620 are all cleared by this direct reset signal during one bit of the first clock pulse CP after the conditions RFC2 and 5FC3 are satisfied. It is something that ' Note that the devices involved in outputting "1" to this signal line O are NAND9, NAND22.
NAND2 5. NAND26°NAND 27. NA
ND28. Inverter INV37, INV40.
, t7 and gates 0R50-'C'.

Further, from this control signal generation circuit 646, energization signals are given to the shutter/release means 396, aperture control means 398, and shutter speed control means 400, respectively. In this case, an energizing signal is given to the aperture control means 398 at the time of the CCI signal, an energizing signal is given to the aperture control means 398 at the time of the CC3, CC1, CC5 signals, and the shutter speed control means 4
For 00, an energization signal is given between CC5, CC4° and CC6.

In order to realize such an operation, the CCI signal is directly applied to the gloss release means 396, and the AND gate AND82 is applied to the aperture control means 398.
Inverter IN of PCI signal and CC7 signal via
An inverted signal based on V41 is applied to the shutter speed control means 400 via an AND gate 82.
C3C3b is provided with the output signal of the inverter INV41.

Further, from this control signal generation circuit 646, a direct reset signal is applied to the direct reset terminal R of the flip-flop F23 shown in the figure 82 via the signal line 3.

This is to prohibit new calculation data from being input from the central control section 362 to the output control section 364 during the exposure control operation, and is
84, the flip-flop F32. When the AND condition of each Q output of F34 is satisfied, this signal becomes 1"
This is the result.

Furthermore, to explain, the control signal generation circuit 646 sends a signal to the drive circuit 404 in order to blink the LED display 32 to indicate that the self-timer is in operation and to indicate that the power supply is normal. A control signal is issued, but
The configuration of the drive control circuit for this LED display 32 is shown in FIG.

In the figure, 800 is a 15-stage frequency divider circuit, which divides the 64 kHz clock pulse CP by 15 stages to generate 2 Hz on/off signals. This 2H
The z signal is provided to an AND gate AND100.

Further, 808 denotes a battery check circuit, which is configured to output a "1" signal when the battery has sufficient remaining capacity during battery check.

The output of the battery check circuit 808 is connected to the CC
The output signal of the ANDloo is supplied to the LED drive circuit 40 along with the ANDLOO signal through the OR100.
4 is given.

In such a configuration, a CC whose self-timer is in operation
When the 2 signal is "1" or when the remaining battery power is sufficient as a result of the battery check, a 2Hz on/off signal is given to the LED drive circuit 404,
Therefore, the LED display 32 flashes.

The configuration of the camera/stem of this embodiment is as described above, although the explanation is insufficient.

The comparison table in FIG. 99 shows how each data is used in calculations. Here, the subject brightness BV
, film sensitivity SV, /yatsuta speed TV, aperture value AV,
Open aperture value AVo.

1 for each apex series of minimum aperture value AMAX, exposure amount EV, and aperture value set from the flash side.
/ Supports 8-bit binary code with 8-step precision,
Furthermore, an 8-bit binary code with the same stacking degree is used as a converted digital value for analog data when AD conversion is performed in the input control section.

Note that the bending error ROM 528 shown in FIG.
For a given open aperture value AVo, binary code data of the bending error AVc as shown in FIG. 100 is output.

Also, as shown in FIG. 89, there is a decoder ROM 7 for displaying the aperture value.
02. Shutter speed display decoder ROM704. FIG. 101 shows a comparison table of each input binary code of the symbol display decoder ROM 706 and display data.

In the system of this embodiment, the data is
The calculation routines shown in FIG. 70 are all based on binary data as shown in the comparison tables of FIGS. 0 and 101.

Therefore, in this specification, the portions that have not been sufficiently explained or the arithmetic circuit shown in the block diagram shown in FIG.
Regarding the operations to be performed according to the arithmetic instructions shown in FIG. 69, each arithmetic routine shown in FIG.
Figure 99.

By contrasting all the other drawings in addition to FIGS. 100 and 101, those skilled in the art will easily understand that according to the present invention, the camera can be integrated into an IC, and in particular, the input section of the camera can be integrated into an IC.
Since the number of input signals does not increase even if the IC is changed to a smaller size, the reliability of the camera using the IC is improved, and the camera can be manufactured at a lower cost.

[Brief explanation of drawings]

FIG. 1 is a 6FkJ diagram of a camera device to which a camera system according to one embodiment of the present invention is applied. Figure 2 shows the lens device 2 and body 4 of the camera 2 shown in the first diagram.
Il + ancestor map to clarify the situation when the . Figure 3: Some kind of aperture value has been reset by 1 at 2m on the lens mount! A diagram showing the operation of each lever in JK. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of each lever in a state where the print value of the lens device 2 has not been reset at all. FIG. 5 is a three-sided view showing an example of a strobe that is applied to the camera system of this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of an external photometer applied to the camera system of this embodiment. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of an incident light type exposure meter applied to the camera system of this embodiment. FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing an example of a motor drive device applied to the camera system of this embodiment. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram of finder information when looking through the 7-a-inner window 13 of the camera device. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of finder information shown in FIG. FIG. 11(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the photographing mode during strobe photography. FIG. 11(B) is a logical explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the photographing modes of the u camera. FIG. 12 is a specific configuration diagram for inputting digital data related to film sensitivity from the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40. FIG. 13 is a time chart for explaining the states of timing pulses TBI to TB6. FIG. 14 is a detailed configuration diagram for inputting information regarding the open aperture value of the lens device 2, the state of the aperture ring, and the aperture drive lever. Figure 15 is a comparison diagram of binary code and gray code. FIG. 16 is a principle diagram of a conversion circuit from Gray code to binary code. FIG. 17 is a logical explanatory diagram for explaining the operation of the flip-flop shown in FIG. 16. FIG. 18 is a specific configuration diagram for inputting data set using the dial 34 and the state of the mode changeover switch 38. FIG. 19 is a specific configuration diagram for inputting the minimum aperture value of the lens device 2. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the input timing of various data and information. FIGS. 21 and 22 are specific configuration diagrams for inputting the states of various switches. FIG. 23 is a specific configuration diagram for detecting and inputting the traveling distance of the AE lever 94. FIG. 24 is a schematic block diagram of a strobe photography device. FIG. 25 is a schematic block diagram of an external photometer. FIG. 26 is a schematic block diagram of an incident light type exposure meter. FIG. 27 is a schematic block diagram of the camera system of this embodiment. FIG. 28 is a schematic configuration diagram showing the functional configuration of mechanical parts of the camera system shown in FIG. 27. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the relationship between each photographing mode based on FiTTL photometry and external photometry and the corresponding calculation routine. FIG. 30 is a schematic block diagram of the control circuit of the camera system of this embodiment. FIG. 31 is a circuit configuration diagram of a clock pulse CP generation circuit. Figure 3-2 is a time chart showing the output pulse waveform of the u system pulse generator. FIG. 33 is a specific configuration diagram of the system pulse generator. FIG. 34 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit device CD4029. FIG. 35 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit device CD4028. FIG. 36 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of the set circuit 520. FIG. 37 is a detailed circuit diagram of the gray binary converter. FIG. 38 is a detailed circuit diagram of the integrated circuit element CD4035. FIG. 39 is a logical configuration diagram of the transmision gate shown in FIG. 38. FIG. 40 is a block diagram of the integrated circuit element CD4042. FIG. 41 is a block diagram of the integrated circuit element MC14539. FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram of the integrated circuit element MC14539. FIG. 43 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit element MC14539. FIG. 44 is a specific circuit configuration diagram of a signal separation circuit and a doubling circuit. FIG. 45 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of the condition signal storage circuit. FIG. 46 is a timing chart for explaining detection of valve signals. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram of CU and AO multiplication signal logic. FIG. 48 is a detailed block diagram of the input control section. FIG. 49 is a block diagram of integrated circuit device MC14520. FIG. 50 is a logic diagram of one of the counters shown in FIG. 49. FIG. 51 shows a counter 558 and a flip-70 tube 560, 56 based on the integrated circuit element MC14520 shown in FIG.
2 configuration diagram. FIG. 52 is a configuration diagram of a buffer register 564 based on a combination of integrated circuit elements CD4035. FIG. 53 is a logic diagram of the integrated circuit element MC14512. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram of the integrated circuit element MC14512 shown in FIG. 53. FIG. 55 is a time chart for explaining the operation of the input control section. FIGS. 56 and 57 are time charts for explaining the state of A-D conversion in the input control section. FIG. 58 is a logic configuration diagram of input bus selector 578. FIG. 59 shows the clip flops F18 and F1 shown in FIG.
A time chart explaining the operation of 9. FIG. 60 is a block diagram of the condition register 574. FIG. 61 is a circuit configuration diagram when the circuit shown in FIG. 60 is implemented using an integrated circuit element. FIG. 62 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit element CD4015. FIG. 63 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of a signal switching circuit and a D register. FIG. 64 is a block diagram of integrated circuit device CD4021. FIG. 65 is a block diagram of the control system and logic circuit 598 of the instruction ROM 504. FIG. 66 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit element CD4019. FIG. 67 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit device CD4024. FIG. 68 is a block diagram of the instruction ROM 504. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram of the output code of the instruction ROM 504. FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating a comparison between addresses of the instruction ROM 504, instructions, and operand codes. FIG. 71 is a configuration diagram of an output logic circuit of address decoder 600. FIG. 72 is a block diagram of the integrated circuit element MC14514. FIG. 73 is a logic diagram of the integrated circuit element MC14514. FIG. 74 is a logic diagram of logic circuit 598. FIG. 75 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of the data selector 502 shown in FIG. 30, the fixed tenter ROM 534, and a circuit for taking in the maximum aperture value AMAX of the photographic lens device 2 used. FIG. 76 is a block diagram of integrated circuit device CD4013. FIG. 77 is a logic diagram of logic circuit 5920. FIG. 78 is a block diagram of multiplexer 594. Figure 79 is a logic diagram of the arithmetic circuit 5000. FIG. 80 is a logic diagram of logic circuit 596. FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram of signals and data of bus lines, input bus lines, and output bus lines. FIG. 82 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of the synchronization circuit 660. FIG. 83 is an output timing chart of the interfoot period circuit shown in FIG. 82. FIG. 84 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram including a demultiplexer 610 and an output control register 622. FIG. 85 is a detailed logic configuration diagram of a data acquisition circuit for display. FIG. 86 is a block diagram of integrated circuit device CD4032. FIG. 87 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit device CD4032. FIG. 88 is an operation timing chart of the circuit shown in FIG. 85. FIG. 89 is a detailed block diagram of the display control circuit 624. FIG. 90 is a plan view of the digital display 402. Figure 91 is a detailed logic diagram for capturing data for control. FIG. 92 is a flow chart for explaining the operation of the output control section. FIG. 93 is a sequence explanatory diagram based on the flow chart of FIG. 91. FIG. 94 shows the shutter speed control register 614 and the constant generation circuit 616. Select Goo) 618° frequency divider circuit 620
Detailed configuration diagram. FIG. 95 shows a block guiagerum of the integrated circuit element MC14536. FIG. 96 shows the shutter speed control register 626.degree., the number of narrowing stage control registers 628. Data selector 632. Down counter 642. A detailed configuration diagram of the select gate 640. FIG. 97 is a detailed circuit diagram of the control signal generation circuit 646. FIG. 98 is a circuit configuration diagram of a drive control circuit for an LED display. FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating the contrast between data and binary code. FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating a comparison between the binary code of the input open aperture value and the output surface error of the bending error ROM 528. FIG. 101 shows an aperture value display decoder ROM 702. Shutter speed display decoder ROM704. It is a figure explaining the comparison of each manual binary code of decoder ROM706 for symbol display, and display data. 2≦3.279.2L? ? ...a) lg-ta, fg-ri... -System pulse M4: benefit. Applicant Canon Co., Ltd. (OL) (B) (C 141) / 2/44 No. 1 / Figure 1 / Fig. 2 Otsu Otsu Fig. 73 Fig. 58 Figure 1 Figure 52 Figure 40 Figure 6 Out of Figure 6

Claims (1)

[Claims] a plurality of input information forming means for forming input information related to imaging information; a single timing pulse generating means for supplying a timing pulse to each bit of the means; and a timing pulse generating means for generating a timing pulse from the timing pulse generating means. an output twin connected to each input information forming means for outputting digital signals corresponding to the input information in synchronization with each other, an input information selection means for generating a plurality of input information selection signals, and from the selection means A photographing information input circuit for a camera, comprising: data selector means for selecting the output line in response to a selection signal.